OWNER'S MANUAL
VÄLKOMMEN!
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The
car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your pas-
sengers. Volvo is one of the world's safest passenger vehicles. Your
Volvo is also designed to meet applicable safety and environmental
requirements.
In order to increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that
you read the instructions and maintenance information in this owner's
manual. The owner's manual is also available as a mobile app (Volvo
Manual) and on the Volvo Cars support site (support.volvocars.com).
2
INTRODUCTION
This is how you find owner's information
12
Digital owner's manual in the car
13
Volvo Cars support site
15
Reading the owner's manual
16
Recording data
19
Accessories and extra equipment
20
Volvo ID
20
Environmental philosophy
22
The owner's manual and the environment
25
Laminated glass
25
Twin Engine - overview
26
Twin Engine - introduction
28
SAFETY
General information on seatbelts
30
Seatbelt - putting on
31
Seatbelt - loosening
32
Seatbelt - pregnancy
32
Seatbelt reminder
33
Seatbelt tensioner
33
Safety - warning symbol
34
Airbag system
34
Driver airbag
36
Passenger airbag
36
Passenger airbag - activating/deac-
tivating*
38
Side airbag (SIPS)
39
Inflatable Curtain (IC)
40
General information on WHIPS
(whiplash protection)
41
WHIPS - seating position
42
General information on safety mode
43
Safety mode - attempting to start the car
44
Safety mode - moving the car
44
General information on child safety
45
Child seats
46
Child seats - location
51
Child seat - integrated child seat*
52
Integrated child seat* - raising the
seat cushion
53
Integrated child seat* - lowering the
seat cushion
54
Child seat - ISOFIX
55
ISOFIX - size classes
56
ISOFIX - types of child seat
57
Child seats - upper mounting points
59
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Instruments and controls, left-hand
drive car - overview
62
Instruments and controls, right-hand
drive car - overview
65
Combined instrument panel
68
Digital combined instrument panel -
overview
69
Eco guide & Hybrid guide
73
Combined instrument panel - mean-
ing of indicator symbols
74
Combined instrument cluster -
meaning of warning symbols
75
Outside temperature gauge
77
Trip meter
77
Clock
78
Combined instrument panel - license
agreement
78
Symbols in the display
79
Volvo Sensus
81
Key positions
82
Key positions - functions at different
levels
83
Seats, front
84
Seats, front - electrically operated*
85
Seats, rear
87
Steering wheel
89
Heating* of the steering wheel
90
Light switches
91
Position lamps
92
Daytime running lights
93
Tunnel detection*
94
Main/dipped beam
94
Active main beam*
95
Active Xenon headlamps*
97
Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern
98
Rear fog lamp
98
Brake lights
99
Hazard warning flashers
99
direction indicators
100
Interior lighting
101
Home safe lighting
102
Approach lighting
102
Wipers and washers
103
Power windows
105
Door mirrors
107
Windows and rearview and door mir-
rors - heating
108
Rearview mirror - interior
108
Compass*
109
Sunroof*
110
Menu navigation - combined instru-
ment panel
112
Menu overview - combined instru-
ment panel
113
Messages
113
Messages - handling
114
MY CAR
115
Trip computer
116
Trip computer - digital combined
instrument panel
118
Trip computer - trip statistics*
121
4
CLIMATE CONTROL
General information on climate control
124
Actual temperature
125
Sensors - climate control
125
Air quality
125
Air quality - passenger compartment filter
126
Air quality - Clean Zone Interior
Package (CZIP)*
126
Air quality - IAQS*
126
Air quality - material
127
Menu settings - climate control
127
Air distribution in the passenger
compartment
127
Electronic climate control - ECC
130
Heated front seats*
131
Heated rear seat*
132
Fan
132
Auto-regulation
133
Temperature control in the passen-
ger compartment
133
Air conditioning
134
Demisting and defrosting the windscreen
134
Air distribution - recirculation
135
Air distribution - table
136
General information about precondi-
tioning
138
Preconditioning - parking inside
139
Preconditioning - parking outside
139
Preconditioning - direct start
140
Preconditioning - immediate stop
141
Preconditioning - timer
142
Timer - setting
142
Timer - starting
143
Timer - switching off
143
Preconditioning - messages
144
General information about heaters
146
Electrically-driven heater
146
Fuel-driven heater
146
Fuel-driven heater - auto mode/
deactivation
147
LOADING AND STORAGE
Storage spaces
150
Tunnel console
152
Glovebox
152
Inlaid mats*
152
Vanity mirror
153
Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets
153
Loading
154
Loading - long load
155
Roof load
155
Load retaining eyelets
156
12 V electrical socket - cargo area*
156
Safety net*
157
Safety grille*
158
Cargo cover*
159
5
LOCKS AND ALARM
Remote control key
162
Remote control key - losing
162
Remote control key - personalisation*
163
Locking/unlocking - indicator
164
Lock indicator
164
Immobiliser
165
Remote-controlled immobiliser with
tracking system*
165
Remote control key - functions
166
Remote control key - range
167
Remote control key with PCC* -
unique functions
167
Remote control key with PCC* - range
168
Detachable key blade
169
Detachable key blade - detaching/
attaching
169
Detachable key blade - unlocking doors
170
Privacy locking*
171
Remote control key - replacing the
battery
172
Keyless drive*
173
Keyless Drive* - remote control key
range
174
Keyless drive* - secure handling of
the remote control key
174
Keyless Drive* - interference to
remote control key function
175
Keyless Drive* - locking
175
Keyless drive* - unlocking
176
Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the
key blade
176
Keyless Drive* - lock settings
177
Keyless Drive* - antenna location
177
Locking/unlocking - from the outside
178
Manual locking of the door
178
Locking/unlocking - from the inside
179
Global opening
180
Locking/unlocking - glovebox
181
Locking/unlocking - tailgate
181
Deadlocks*
183
Child safety locks - manual activation
184
Child safety locks - electrical activation*
184
Alarm*
185
Alarm indicator*
186
Alarm* - automatic re-arming
186
Alarm* - remote control key not working
187
Alarm signals*
187
Reduced alarm level*
187
Type approval - remote control key
system
188
DRIVER SUPPORT
Adjustable steering force*
190
Electronic stability control (ESC) -
general
190
Electronic stability control (ESC) -
operation
191
Electronic stability control (ESC) -
symbols and messages
193
Speed limiter*
195
Speed limiter* - getting started
195
Speed limiter* - changing speed
196
Speed limiter* - temporary deactiva-
tion and standby mode
196
Speed limiter* - alarm for speed
exceeded
197
Speed limiter* - deactivation
197
Cruise control*
198
Cruise control* - managing speed
199
Cruise control* temporary deactiva-
tion and standby mode
199
Cruise control* - resume set speed
200
Cruise control* - deactivate
200
Distance Warning*
201
Distance Warning* - limitations
202
Distance Warning* - symbols and
messages
203
Adaptive cruise control - ACC*
204
6
Adaptive cruise control* - function
205
Adaptive cruise control* - overview
206
Adaptive cruise control* - managing
speed
207
Adaptive cruise control* - set time
interval
209
Adaptive cruise control* - temporary
deactivation, and standby mode
209
Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking
another vehicle
210
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate
211
Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue
assistance
211
Adaptive cruise control* - fault trac-
ing and action
214
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols
and messages
215
Radar sensor
217
Radar sensor - limitations
217
Type approval - radar system
219
City Safety™
222
City Safety™ - function
223
City Safety™ - operation
223
City Safety™ - limitations
224
City Safety™ - laser sensor
226
City Safety™ - symbols and messages
228
Collision warning system*
229
Collision warning system* - function
230
Collision warning system* - detection
of cyclists
231
Collision warning system* - detection
of pedestrians
232
Collision warning system* - operation
233
Collision warning system* - limitations
235
Collision warning system* - camera
sensor limitations
236
Collision warning system* - symbols
and messages
238
BLIS*
240
BLIS* - operation
241
CTA*
242
BLIS - symbols and messages
244
Road Sign Information (RSI)*
244
Road Sign Information (RSI)* - operation
246
Road Sign Information (RSI)* - limitations
248
Driver Alert System*
248
Driver Alert Control (DAC)*
249
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation
250
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols
and messages
251
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*
252
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) -
function
252
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) -
operation
253
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) -
limitations
254
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) -
symbols and messages
255
Park Assist*
256
Park assist syst* - function
256
Park assist syst* - backward
257
Park assist syst* - forward
258
Park assist syst* - fault indication
259
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
259
Park assist camera*
260
Park assist camera - settings
263
Park assist camera - limitations
263
7
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting the engine
266
Switching off the engine
267
Steering lock
267
Jump starting with another battery
268
Drive systems
269
Drive system - drive modes
270
Energy flow
273
Drive system - symbols and messages
274
Gearboxes
276
Gear shift indicator*
276
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic
277
Gear selector inhibitor
279
Hill start assist (HSA)*
280
All-wheel drive - (AWD)
280
Foot brake
281
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system
284
Foot brake - emergency brake lights
and automatic hazard warning flashers
284
Foot brake - emergency brake assistance
284
Parking brake
285
Economical driving
289
Driving in water
290
Overheating
291
Driving with open tailgate/boot lid
291
Overload - starter battery
292
Before a long journey
292
Winter driving
292
Range for electric operation
293
Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing
294
Fuel filler flap - manual opening
294
Filling up with fuel
295
Fuel - handling
295
Fuel - diesel
296
Diesel particle filter (DPF)
298
Catalytic converters
299
Charging the hybrid battery
300
Charging current
301
Charging the hybrid battery - prepa-
rations
302
Charging cable with control unit
303
Charging cable with control unit -
status messages
305
Charging cable with control unit -
temperature monitoring
307
Charging cable with control unit -
ground fault breaker
307
Charging the hybrid battery - starting
308
Charging the hybrid battery - ending
310
Long-term storage of vehicles with
hybrid batteries
311
Driving with a trailer*
312
Driving with a trailer* - automatic gearbox
313
Towing bracket/Towbar*
313
Detachable towbar* - storage
314
Detachable towbar* - specifications
314
Detachable towbar* - attachment/
removal
315
Trailer Stability Assist - TSA
318
Towing
319
Towing eye
319
Recovery
320
8
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyres - maintenance
322
Tyres - direction of rotation
323
Tyres - tread wear indicators
324
Tyres - air pressure
324
Wheel and wheel rim dimensions
325
Tyres - dimensions
325
Tyres - load index
326
Tyres - speed ratings
326
Wheel bolts
327
Winter tyres
327
Changing wheels - removing wheels
328
Changing wheels - fitting
331
Warning triangle
332
Tools
333
Jack*
333
First aid kit*
334
Tyre pressure monitoring*
335
Tyre pressure monitoring system
(TPMS)* - general information
335
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* -
adjust (recalibration)
336
Tyre pressure monitoring system
(TPMS)* - tyre status
337
Tyre pressure monitoring system
(TPMS)* - activate/deactivate
337
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* -
recommendations
338
Tyre pressure monitoring system
(TPMS)* - rectifying low tyre pressure
338
Tyre pressure monitoring system
(TPMS)* - driveable punctured tyres*
339
Type approval - tyre pressure moni-
toring system (TPMS)*
340
Emergency puncture repair
346
Emergency puncture repair kit - location
346
Emergency puncture repair kit - overview
347
Emergency puncture repair - operation
348
Emergency puncture repair - rechecking
350
Emergency puncture repair kit -
inflating the tyres
352
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Volvo service programme
356
Book service and repair*
356
Raising the car
359
Bonnet - opening and closing
361
Engine compartment - overview
361
Engine compartment - checking
362
Engine oil - general
363
Engine oil - checking and filling
364
Coolant - level
365
Brake and clutch fluid - level
366
Power steering fluid - level
367
Climate control system - fault tracing
and repair
368
Lamp replacement - general
368
Lamp replacement - headlamps
370
Lamp replacement - cover for main/
dipped beam bulbs
371
Lamp replacement - dipped beam
371
Lamp replacement - main beam
372
Lamp replacement - extra main beam
373
Lamp replacement - direction indica-
tors front
373
Lamp replacement - rear lamp
374
Lamp replacement - location of rear
lamps
375
9
Lamp replacement - number plate
lighting
375
Lamp replacement - lighting in cargo
area
375
Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting
376
Lamps - specifications
376
Wiper blades
377
Washer fluid - filling
379
Starter battery - general
380
Battery - symbols
382
Starter battery - replacement
382
Hybrid battery
384
Electrical system
384
Fuses - general
385
Fuses - in engine compartment
386
Fuses - under glovebox
389
Fuses - in the control module under
the glovebox
391
Fuses - in cargo area
393
Fuses - in the engine compartment's
cold zone
397
Car wash
399
Polishing and waxing
401
Water and dirt-repellent coating
401
Rustproofing
402
Cleaning the interior
402
Paint damage
404
SPECIFICATIONS
Type designations
408
Dimensions
411
Weights
412
Towing capacity and towball load
413
Engine specifications
414
Motor specifications - Electric drive
motor
415
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions
415
Engine oil - grade and volume
417
Coolant - grade and volume
418
Transmission fluid - grade and volume
419
Brake fluid - grade and volume
420
Power steering fluid - grade
420
Fuel tank - volume
421
Specifications for air conditioning
422
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
424
Wheels and tyres - approved dimensions
427
Load index and speed rating
428
Tyres - approved tyre pressures
429
Hybrid Battery - specification
430
10
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Alphabetical Index 431
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
12
This is how you find owner's
information
Owner's information is available in several differ-
ent product formats, both digital and printed.
The owner's manual is available in the car's
screen, as a mobile app and on the Volvo Cars
support site. There is a Quick Guide and a sup-
plement to the owner's manual available in the
glovebox, with specifications and fuse informa-
tion, amongst other things. A printed owner's
manual can be ordered.
The car's screen
1
A digital version of the owner's
manual is available in the car's
screen. Press the MY CAR but-
ton in the centre console, press
OK/MENU and select
Owner's manual. The infor-
mation is searchable and can
also be subdivided into categories.
Read more in the Digital owner's manual in the
car.
Mobile app
In App Store or Google Play,
search for "Volvo Manual",
download the app to your
smartphone or tablet and select
the car.
The app contains video tutorials
as well as options for visual navigation with exte-
rior and interior images of the car. It is easy to
navigate between the different sections in the
owner's manual and the content is searchable.
Read more about Owner's Manual in mobile devi-
ces.
Volvo Cars support site
Go to support.volvocars.com
and select your country. Here
you can find owner's manuals,
both online and in PDF format.
On the Volvo Cars support site
there are also video tutorials
and further information and
help regarding your Volvo and your car owner-
ship. The page is available for most markets.
Read more on the Volvo Cars support site.
Printed information
There is a supplement to the
owner's manual
2
in the glove-
box that contains information
on fuses and specifications, as
well as a summary of important
and practical information.
There is also a Quick Guide available in printed
format that helps you to get started with the most
commonly used functions in the car.
Depending on equipment level selected, market,
etc. additional owner's information may also be
available in printed format in the car.
A printed owner's manual and associated supple-
ment can be ordered. Contact a Volvo dealer to
order. See how the owner's manual is structured
in Reading the owner's manual.
1
A complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the screen.
2
A complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the screen.
INTRODUCTION
}}
13
Changing the language in the car's
screen
Changing the language in the car's display may
mean that some information does not correspond
to national or local laws and regulations. Don't
change to a language that's difficult to under-
stand, it may then be difficult to find your way
back in the structure on the screen.
IMPORTANT
The driver is always responsible that the vehi-
cle is driven safely in traffic and that applica-
ble laws and regulations are followed. It is
also important that the car is maintained and
handled in accordance with Volvo's recom-
mendations in the owner's information.
If there should be a difference between the
information in the screen and the printed
information then it is always the printed infor-
mation that applies.
Related information
•
Digital owner's manual in the car (p. 13)
•
Volvo Cars support site (p. 15)
•
Reading the owner's manual (p. 16)
Digital owner's manual in the car
The owner's manual can be read on the screen
in the car
3
. The content is searchable and it is
easy to navigate between different sections.
Open the digital owner's manual - press the MY
CAR button in the centre console, press OK/
MENU and select
Owner's manual.
For basic navigation, see Operating the system.
See below for a more detailed description.
Owner's manual, start page.
There are four options for finding information in
the digital owner's manual:
•
Search - Search function for finding an arti-
cle.
•
Categories - All articles sorted into catego-
ries.
•
Favourites - Quick access to favourite-
bookmarked articles.
•
Quick Guide - A selection of articles for
common functions.
Select the information symbol in the lower right-
hand corner in order to obtain information about
the digital owner's manual.
NOTE
The digital owner's manual is not available
while driving.
Search
Searching using the character wheel.
Character list.
Changing the input mode (see following
table).
3
Applies to certain car models.
||
INTRODUCTION
14
Use the character wheel to enter a search term,
e.g. "seatbelt".
1.
Turn TUNE to the desired letter, press OK/
MENU to confirm. The number and letter
buttons on the control panel in the centre
console can also be used.
2. Continue with the next letter and so on.
3. To change the input mode to numbers or
special characters, or to perform a search,
turn TUNE to one of the options (see explan-
ation in the following table) in the list for
changing the input mode (2), press OK/
MENU.
123/AB
C
Change between letters and num-
bers with OK/MENU.
MORE
Change to special characters with
OK/MENU.
OK
Perform the search. Turn TUNE to
select a search result article, press
OK/MENU to go to the article.
a|A
Changes between lowercase and
uppercase letters with OK/MENU.
| | }
Changes from the character wheel
to the search field. Move the cur-
sor with TUNE. Delete any mis-
spelling with EXIT. To return to the
character wheel, press OK/MENU.
Note that the digit and letter but-
tons on the control panel can be
used for editing in the search field.
Enter with the numerical keyboard
Numerical keyboard.
Another way of entering characters is to use the
centre console's buttons 0-9, * and #.
When e.g. 9 is pressed, a bar appears with all
characters
4
under the button, e.g.
W, x, y, z and
9. Quick presses on the button move the cursor
through these characters.
•
Stop with the cursor on the desired character
in order to select it - the character is shown
on the enter line.
•
Delete/undo using EXIT.
To enter a number, hold in the corresponding
number key.
Categories
The articles in the owner's manual are structured
into main categories and subcategories. The
same article can be in several appropriate cate-
gories in order to be found more easily.
Turn TUNE to navigate in the category tree and
press OK/MENU to open a category - selected
- or article - selected . Press EXIT to go
back to the previous view.
Favourites
Located here are the articles that are saved as
favourites. To select an article as a favourite, see
the heading "Navigating in an article" below.
Turn TUNE to navigate in the favourite list and
press OK/MENU to open an article. Press EXIT
to go back to the previous view.
4
The character for each button may vary depending on market/country/language.
INTRODUCTION
}}
* Option/accessory.
15
Quick Guide
Located here is a selection of articles for getting
to know the car's most common functions. The
articles can also be accessed via categories, but
are collected here for quick access.
Turn TUNE to navigate in the Quick Guide and
press OK/MENU to open an article. Press EXIT
to go back to the previous view.
Navigating in an article
Home - leads to the start page for the
owner's manual.
Favourite - adds/removes an article as a
favourite. You can also press the FAV button
in the centre console to add/remove an arti-
cle as a favourite.
Highlighted link - leads to linked article.
Special texts - if the article contains warn-
ings, important or note texts then an associ-
ated symbol is shown here as well as the
number of such texts in the article.
Turn TUNE to navigate between the links or
scroll in an article. When the screen has scrolled
to the start/end of an article the home and
favourite options are accessed by scrolling a fur-
ther step up/down. Press OK/MENU to activate
the selection/highlighted link. Press EXIT to go
back to the previous view.
Volvo Cars support site
More information on your car is available on the
Volvo Cars website and support site.
Support on the Internet
Go to support.volvocars.com or use the QR code
below to visit the page. The support page is avail-
able for most markets.
QR code that leads to the support page.
The information on the support page is searcha-
ble and can also be subdivided into different cat-
egories. Available here is support for options rela-
ted to e.g. Internet connected services and func-
tions, Volvo On Call*, the navigation system* and
apps. Video and step-by-step instructions explain
different procedures, e.g. how the car is con-
nected to the Internet via a mobile phone.
Downloadable information from the
support page
Maps
For cars equipped with Sensus Navigation*, there
is the facility to download maps from the support
page.
||
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory.
16
Apps
For selected Volvo models from model year 2014
and 2015, the owner's manual is available in the
form of an app. The Volvo On Call* app can also
be accessed from here.
Owner's manuals from previous model years
Owner's manuals from previous model years are
available here in PDF format. The Quick Guide
and supplement can also be accessed from the
support page. Select car model and model year in
order to download the publication required.
Contact
On the support page there is contact information
for customer support and the nearest Volvo
dealer.
Log in to the Volvo Cars website
Create a personal Volvo ID and log in to
www.volvocars.com. Once you are logged in you
can get an overview of service, agreements and
warranties, amongst other things. There is also
information here about accessories and software
adapted for your car model.
Related information
•
Volvo ID (p. 20)
Reading the owner's manual
A good way of getting to know your new car is
to read the owner's manual, ideally before your
first journey.
Reading the owner's manual is a good way to
become familiar with new functions, get advice
on how best to handle the car in different situa-
tions and learn how to make the best use of all
the car's features. Please pay attention to the
safety instructions contained in the owner's man-
ual.
Development work is constantly in progress to
improve our product. Modifications may mean
that information, descriptions and illustrations in
the owner's manual differ from the equipment in
the car. We reserve the right to make modifica-
tions without prior notice.
© Volvo Car Corporation
IMPORTANT
Do not remove this manual from the car -
should a problem arise then the information
required about where and how to seek pro-
fessional help would be missing.
Owner's Manual in mobile devices
NOTE
The Owner's manual is available for download
as a mobile application (applies for certain car
models and mobile devices), see
www.volvocars.com.
The mobile application also includes video
and searchable content and easy navigation
between different sections.
Options/accessories
All types of option/accessory are marked with an
asterisk*.
In addition to standard equipment, the owner's
manual also describes options (factory fitted
equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted
extra equipment).
INTRODUCTION
}}
17
The equipment described in the owner's manual
is not available in all cars - they have different
equipment depending on adaptations for the
needs of different markets and national or local
laws and regulations.
In the event of uncertainty over what is standard
or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo dealer.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts appear if there is a risk of
injury.
IMPORTANT
"Important" texts appear if there is a risk of
damage.
NOTE
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate
the use of e.g. features and functions.
Footnote
There is footnote information in the owner's man-
ual that is located at the bottom of the page. This
information is an addition to the text that it refers
to via a number. If the footnote refers to text in a
table then letters are used instead of numbers
for referral.
Message texts
In the car there are displays that show menu
texts and message texts. In the owner's manual
the appearance of these texts differs from the
normal text. Examples of menu texts and mes-
sage texts:
Media, Sending location.
Decals
The car contains different types of decal which
are designed to convey important information in a
simple and clear manner. The decals in the car
have the following descending degree of impor-
tance for the warning/information.
Warning for personal injury
G031590
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white
text/image on black message field. Used to indi-
cate the presence of danger which, if the warning
is ignored, may result in serious personal injury or
fatality.
Risk of property damage
G031592
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black or blue warning field and message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if
the warning is ignored, may result in damage to
property.
||
INTRODUCTION
18
Information
G031593
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black message field.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in
the owner's manual should be exact replicas
of those in the car. They are included to show
their approximate appearance and locations
in the car. The information that applies to your
particular car can be found on the decal on
the car.
Procedure lists
Procedures where action must be taken in a cer-
tain sequence are numbered in the owner's man-
ual.
When there is a series of illustrations for
step-by-step instructions each step is num-
bered in the same way as the corresponding
illustration.
Lists of letters appear adjacent to the series
of illustrations where the order of the instruc-
tions is not significant.
Arrows appear numbered and unnumbered
and are used to illustrate a movement.
Arrows with letters are used to clarify a
movement when the reciprocal order is of no
relevance.
If there is no series of illustrations for step-by-
step instructions then the different steps are
numbered with normal numbers.
Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used in
overview images where different components
are pointed out. The number recurs in the
position list featured in connection with the
illustration that describes the item.
Bulleted lists
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
points in the owner's manual.
Example:
•
Coolant
•
Engine oil
Related information
Related information refers to other articles con-
taining closely-associated information.
Images
The manual's images are sometimes schematic
and may deviate from the car's appearance
depending on equipment level and market.
To be continued
}} This symbol is located furthest down to the
right when an article continues on the following
page.
Continued from previous page
|| This symbol is located furthest up to the left
when an article continues from the previous
page.
Related information
•
The owner's manual and the environment
(p. 25)
•
Volvo Cars support site (p. 15)
INTRODUCTION
19
Recording data
As part of Volvo's safety and quality assurance,
certain information about the vehicle's operation,
functionality and incidents are recorded in the
car.
This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data
Recorder" (EDR). Its primary purpose is to regis-
ter and record data related to traffic accidents or
collision-like situations, such as times when the
airbag deploys or the vehicle strikes an obstacle
in the road. The data is recorded in order to
increase understanding of how vehicle systems
work in these types of situations. The EDR is
designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short time,
usually 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
data related to the following in the event of traffic
accidents or collision-like situations:
•
How the various systems in the car worked
•
Whether the driver and passenger seatbelts
were fastened/tensioned
•
The driver's use of the accelerator or brake
pedal
•
The travel speed of the vehicle
This information can help us better understand
the circumstances in which traffic accidents, inju-
ries and damage occur. The EDR only records
data when a non-trivial collision situation occurs.
The EDR does not record any data during normal
driving conditions. Similarly, the system never
registers who is driving the vehicle or the geo-
graphic location of the accident or near-miss sit-
uation. However, other parties, such as the police,
could use the recorded data in combination with
the type of personally identifiable information
routinely collected after a traffic accident. Special
equipment and access to either the vehicle or the
EDR is required to be able to interpret the regis-
tered data.
In addition to the EDR, the car is equipped with a
number of computers designed to continually
check and monitor the function of the car. They
can record data during normal driving conditions,
but in particular register faults affecting the vehi-
cle's operation and functionality, or upon activa-
tion of the vehicle's active driver support function
(e.g. City Safety and the auto brake function).
Some of the recorded data is required to enable
service and maintenance technicians to diagnose
and remedy any faults that occurred in the vehi-
cle. The registered information is also needed to
enable Volvo to satisfy legal requirements laid out
in laws and by government authorities. Informa-
tion registered in the vehicle is stored in its com-
puter until the vehicle is serviced or repaired.
In addition to the above, the registered informa-
tion can be used in aggregate form for research
and product development with the aim of contin-
uously improving the safety and quality of Volvo
cars.
Volvo will not contribute to the above-described
information being disclosed to third parties with-
out the vehicle owner's consent. To comply with
national legislation and regulations, Volvo may be
forced to disclose information of this nature to
the police or other authorities who may assert a
legal right to access such. Special technical
equipment which Volvo and workshops that have
entered into agreements with Volvo have access
to is required to be able to read and interpret the
recorded data. Volvo is responsible that the infor-
mation, which is transferred to Volvo during serv-
icing and maintenance, is stored and handled in a
secure manner and that the handling complies
with applicable legal requirements. For further
information - contact a Volvo dealer.
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory.
20
Accessories and extra equipment
The incorrect connection and installation of
accessories and extra equipment can negatively
affect the car's electronic system.
Certain accessories only function when associ-
ated software is installed in the car's computer
system. Volvo therefore recommends that you
always contact an authorised Volvo workshop
before installing accessories or extra equipment
which are connected to or affect the electrical
system.
Heat-reflecting windscreen*
The windscreen is equipped with a heat-reflect-
ing film (IR) that reduces the solar heat radiation
into the passenger compartment.
The positioning of electronic equipment, such as
a transponder, behind a glass surface with heat-
reflecting film may affect its function and per-
formance.
For the optimal function of electronic equipment,
it should be positioned on the part of the wind-
screen with no heat-reflecting film (see the high-
lighted area in the illustration).
Areas where IR film is not applied.
A is the distance from the top edge of the wind-
screen down to the start of the field. B is the dis-
tance from the top edge of the windscreen down
to the end of the field.
Dimensions
A 40 mm
B 80 mm
Volvo ID
Volvo ID provides access to a wide range of per-
sonalized Volvo services
5
online.
Examples of services:
•
In an Internet-connected car* - Certain func-
tions and services require that you have reg-
istered your car to a personal Volvo ID, for
example to be able to send a new address
from a map service on the Internet directly to
the car.
•
Volvo On Call* - Volvo ID is used when log-
ging in to the Volvo On Call app.
Advantages of Volvo ID
•
One user name and one password to access
online services, i.e. only one username and
one password to remember.
•
When changing the username/password for
a service (e.g. Volvo On Call) it will also be
changed automatically for other services.
Create a Volvo ID
To create a Volvo ID you need to enter a personal
e-mail address. Then follow the instructions in
the e-mail message that is automatically sent to
the specified address in order to complete the
registration. It is possible to create a Volvo ID via
one of the following services:
5
The services available may vary over time and vary depending on equipment level and market.
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory.
21
•
Volvo Cars website - Go to
www.volvocars.com and log in
6
at the icon,
top right. Select Create Volvo ID.
•
For an Internet-connected car* - Enter your
e-mail address in the app that requires Volvo
ID and follow the instructions. Alternatively,
press the Connect button
in the centre
console twice and select
Apps Settings
and follow the instructions.
•
Volvo On Call* - Download the latest version
of the Volvo On Call app. Choose to create a
Volvo ID from the start page, enter e-mail
address and follow the instructions.
Related information
•
Volvo Cars support site (p. 15)
6
Available in certain markets.
INTRODUCTION
22
Environmental philosophy
Volvo Car Corporation is constantly working on
the development of safer and more efficient
products and solutions in order to reduce the
negative impact on the environment.
Environmental care is one of Volvo Cars’ core val-
ues and influences all operations. The environ-
mental work is based on the whole life cycle of
the car and takes into account the environmental
impact it has, from design to scrapping and recy-
cling. Volvo Cars' basic principle is that every new
product developed must have less impact on the
environment than the product it replaces.
Volvo's environmental management work has
resulted in the development of the more efficient
and less polluting Drive-E drivelines. The personal
environment is also important to Volvo - the air
inside a Volvo is, for example, cleaner than the air
outside thanks to the climate control system.
Your Volvo complies with stringent international
environmental standards. All Volvo's manufactur-
ing units must be ISO 14001 certified, and this
supports a systematic approach to the opera-
tion's environmental issues, which leads to con-
tinuous improvement with reduced environmental
impact. Holding the ISO certificate also means
that environmental laws and regulations in force
are complied with. Volvo also requires that its
partners must also meet these requirements.
Fuel consumption
Since a large part of a car's total environmental
impact stems from its use, the emphasis of Volvo
Cars' environmental work is on reducing fuel con-
sumption, carbon dioxide emissions and other air
pollutants. Volvo cars have competitive fuel con-
sumption in each of their respective classes.
Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower
emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
INTRODUCTION
}}
* Option/accessory.
23
Contributing to a better environment
An energy-efficient and fuel-efficient car not only
contributes to a reduced impact on the environ-
ment, but also means reduced costs for the
owner of the car. As the driver, it is easy to
reduce fuel consumption and thereby save
money and contribute to a better environment -
here is some advice:
•
Plan for an effective average speed. Speeds
above approx. 80 km/h (50 mph) and below
50 km/h (30 mph) lead to increased energy
consumption.
•
Follow the Service and Warranty Booklet's
recommended intervals for service and main-
tenance of the car.
•
Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the
engine when stationary for longer periods.
Pay attention to local regulations.
•
Plan the journey - a lot of unnecessary stops
and uneven speed contribute to increased
fuel consumption.
•
Use preconditioning - it improves the range
of the hybrid battery and reduces the energy
requirement while driving.
Also remember to always dispose of environmen-
tally hazardous waste, such as batteries and oil, in
an environmentally safe manner. Consult a work-
shop in the event of uncertainty about how this
type of waste should be discarded - an author-
ised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Following this advice can save money, the plan-
et's resources are saved, and the car's durability
is extended. For more information and further
advice see Eco guide (p. 73) , Driving economi-
cally (p. 289) and Fuel consumption (p. 424).
Efficient emission control
Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept
"Clean inside and out" – a concept that encom-
passes a clean interior environment as well as
highly efficient emission control. In many cases
the exhaust emissions are well below the applica-
ble standards.
Clean air in the passenger
compartment
A passenger compartment filter prevents dust
and pollen from entering the passenger compart-
ment via the air intake.
The Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* ensures
that the incoming air is cleaner than the air in the
traffic outside.
The system cleans the air in the passenger com-
partment from contaminants such as particles,
hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level
ozone. If the outside air is contaminated then the
air intake is closed and the air is recirculated.
Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic,
queues and tunnels for example.
IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Pack-
age (CZIP)*, which also includes a function that
allows the fan to start when the car is unlocked
with the remote control key.
Interior
The material used in the interior of a Volvo is
carefully selected and has been tested in order to
be pleasant and comfortable. Some of the details
are hand-made, such as the seams of the steer-
ing wheel that are sewn by hand. The interior is
monitored in order not to emit strong odours or
substances that cause discomfort in the event of
e.g. high heat and bright light.
Volvo workshops and the environment
Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a
long service life and low fuel consumption for
your car. In this way you also contribute to a
cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops
are entrusted with the service and maintenance
of your car it becomes part of Volvo's system.
Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in
which workshop premises shall be designed in
order to prevent spills and discharges into the
environment. The workshop staff have the knowl-
edge and the tools required to guarantee good
environmental care.
Recycling
Since Volvo works from a life cycle perspective, it
is also important that the car is recycled in an
environmentally sound manner. Almost all of the
car can be recycled. The last owner of the car is
therefore requested to contact a dealer for refer-
ral to a certified/approved recycling facility.
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory.
25
The owner's manual and the
environment
The paper pulp in a printed owner's manual
comes from Forest Stewardship Council
®
certi-
fied forests or other controlled sources.
The FSC
®
symbol shows that the paper pulp in a
printed owner's manual comes from FSC
®
certi-
fied forests or other controlled sources.
Related information
•
Environmental philosophy (p. 22)
Laminated glass
The glass is reinforced which provides
better protection against break-ins and
improved sound insulation in the pas-
senger compartment. The windscreen
and other windows* have laminated glass.
INTRODUCTION
26
Twin Engine - overview
Overview of the unique functions for V60 Twin
Engine.
INTRODUCTION
28
Twin Engine - introduction
The car is driven as a completely normal car. The
electric motor drives the car mostly at low
speeds, the diesel engine at higher speeds, as
well as during more active driving.
Important to know
WARNING
Remember that the car does not emit any
engine noise when it is only powered by the
electric motor and may therefore be difficult
to notice by children, pedestrians, cyclists and
animals. This applies in particular at low
speeds, such as in car parks.
High-voltage current
Several components in the car
work with high-voltage current
that could be dangerous in the
event of incorrect intervention.
Do not touch anything that is
not clearly described in the
owner's manual. Read more
about the engine compartment (p. 361).
WARNING
Orange-coloured cables must only be handled
by qualified personnel.
Driving the car
The car is driven as a completely normal car. The
electric motor drives the car mostly at low
speeds, the diesel engine at higher speeds, as
well as during more active driving. Read more
about Economical driving (p. 289).
Drive modes
It is possible to set the car in different drive
modes while driving, e.g. electric operation only
or, when power is required, both electric motor
and diesel engine. The car calculates an optimal
combination of driveability, driving experience,
environmental impact and fuel economy accord-
ing to the drive mode selected. Read more about
Drive system - drive modes (p. 270).
Combined instrument panel
Two fields in the combined instrument panel
show unique information for the V60 Twin
Engine; hybrid battery gauge (current energy
level), active drive mode, symbol that is illumi-
nated when the diesel engine is operating, Hybrid
Guide as well as energy recovery. Read more
about the combined instrument panel (p. 69).
Preconditioning
In order that the car should have optimal function
it is important that the hybrid battery with associ-
ated electrical drive systems, as well as the diesel
engine and its drive systems, have the correct
operating temperature. Battery capacity is
reduced considerably if the battery is too cold or
too hot. Preconditioning prepares the car's drive
systems and the passenger compartment before
departure so that both wear and energy needs
during the journey are reduced. Read more about
General information about preconditioning
(p. 138).
Charging the hybrid battery
IMPORTANT
Never connect the charging cable when there
is a risk of lightning.
The hybrid battery is the Lithium-ion type and can
be recharged in different ways. A charging cable
with control unit can be connected between the
car and a 230V AC socket, see Charging cable
with control unit (p. 303). Charging time depends
on charging current (p. 301).
The electric motor is used as an engine brake
during light braking and the car's kinetic energy
is converted to electrical energy which is used to
charge the hybrid battery. Read more about recy-
cling the brake force energy (p. 281).
In addition, the diesel engine can charge the
electric motor's hybrid battery with a special high-
voltage generator when the need arises, see
drive system and drive modes (p. 270).
Related information
•
Twin Engine - overview (p. 26)
SAFETY
SAFETY
30
General information on seatbelts
Heavy braking can have serious consequences
if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all pas-
sengers are using their seatbelts during the jour-
ney.
Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal
shoulder belt up towards the shoulder. The hip strap
must be positioned low down (not over the abdomen).
It is important that the seatbelt lies against the
body so it can provide maximum protection. Do
not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is
designed to protect in a normal seating position.
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten
their (p. 31) seatbelt by means of an audio and
visual reminder (p. 33).
Remember
•
Do not use clips or anything else that can
prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly.
•
The seatbelt must not be twisted or caught
on anything.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
diminish the protection provided by the airbag
in the event of a collision.
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one person.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop.
If a seatbelt has been subjected to a major
load, such as in conjunction with a collision,
the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of
the protective characteristics of the seatbelt
may have been lost, even if it appears to be
undamaged. In addition, replace the seatbelt if
the belt is worn or damaged. The new seat-
belt must be type-approved and intended for
installation in the same position as the
replaced seatbelt.
Related information
•
Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 32)
•
Seatbelt - loosening (p. 32)
•
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 33)
SAFETY
31
Seatbelt - putting on
Put on the seatbelt (p. 30) before driving starts.
Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by pressing
its locking tab into the seatbelt buckle. A loud
"click" indicates that the belt has locked.
Correctly fitted seatbelt.
Incorrectly fitted seatbelt. The belt must rest on the
shoulder.
Seatbelt height adjustment. Press the button and move
the belt vertically. Position the belt as high as possible
without it chafing against your throat.
The buckles only fit the intended lock in the rear
seat
1
.
Remember
The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:
•
if it is pulled out too quickly
•
during braking and acceleration
•
if the car leans heavily.
Related information
•
Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 32)
•
Seatbelt - loosening (p. 32)
•
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 33)
•
Seatbelt reminder (p. 33)
1
Certain markets.
SAFETY
32
Seatbelt - loosening
Loosen the seatbelt (p. 30) when the car is sta-
tionary.
Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle and
then let the belt retract. If the seatbelt does not
retract fully, feed it in by hand so that it does not
hang loose.
Related information
•
Seatbelt - putting on (p. 31)
•
Seatbelt reminder (p. 33)
Seatbelt - pregnancy
Seatbelt (p. 30) must always be worn during
pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the
correct way.
G020998
The diagonal section should wrap over the shoul-
der then be routed between the breasts and to
the side of the abdomen.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and
as low as possible under the abdomen. It must
never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the
slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as
close to the body as possible. In addition, check
that there are no twists in the seatbelt.
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
must adjust the seat (p. 84) and steering wheel
(p. 89) such that they can easily maintain con-
trol of the vehicle as they drive (which means that
they must be able to easily operate the foot ped-
als and steering wheel). The aim should be to
position the seat with as large a distance as pos-
sible between abdomen and steering wheel.
Related information
•
Seatbelt - putting on (p. 31)
•
Seatbelt - loosening (p. 32)
SAFETY
33
Seatbelt reminder
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten
their (p. 31) seatbelt by means of an audio and
visual reminder.
G017726
The audio reminder is speed dependent, and in
some cases time dependent. The visual reminder
is located in the roof console and in the com-
bined instrument panel (p. 68).
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt
reminder system.
Rear seat
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
subfunctions:
•
Provides information on which seatbelts
(p. 30) are being used in the rear seat. A
message appears in the combined instru-
ment panel when the seatbelts are in use, or
if one of the rear doors has been opened.
The message is acknowledged automatically
after approximately 30 seconds driving or
after pressing the indicator stalk OK button
(p. 112). If anyone is unbelted then the mes-
sage can only be acknowledged manually by
pressing the indicator stalk OK button.
•
Provides a warning if one of the rear seat-
belts is unfastened during travel. This warn-
ing takes the form of a message in the com-
bined instrument panel along with the audio/
visual signal. The warning stops when the
seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can also be
acknowledged manually by pressing the OK
button.
The combined instrument panel's information dis-
play shows which seatbelts are in use. This infor-
mation is always available.
Certain markets
An acoustic signal and indicator lamp remind the
driver and front seat passenger to use a seatbelt
if either of them is not wearing one. At low speed,
the audio reminder will sound for the first 6 sec-
onds.
Seatbelt tensioner
All the seatbelts (p. 30) are equipped with belt
tensioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt ten-
sioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of a suf-
ficiently violent collision. The seatbelt then pro-
vides more effective restraint for the occupants.
WARNING
Never insert the tongue of the passenger's
seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's side.
Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into
the buckle on the correct side. Do not make
any damages on seatbelts nor insert any for-
eign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts and
buckles would then possibly not function as
intended in the event of a collision. There is a
risk of serous injury.
SAFETY
34
Safety - warning symbol
The warning symbol is shown if a fault is
detected during fault tracing or if a system has
been activated. Where required, the warning
symbol is shown together with a message in the
combined instrument panel (p. 68) information
display.
Warning triangle and warning symbol for the airbag sys-
tem (p. 34) in the combined instrument panel.
The warning symbol in the combined instrument
panel illuminates when the remote control key is
in key position II (p. 83). The symbol clears
after approx. 6 seconds provided the airbag sys-
tem is fault-free.
WARNING
If the warning symbol for the airbag system
remains illuminated or illuminates while driv-
ing, it means that the airbag system does not
have full functionality. The symbol indicates a
fault in the seatbelt tensioner system, SIPS,
the IC system or some other fault in the sys-
tem. Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop immediately.
If the warning symbol malfunctions, the warning
triangle illuminates and
SRS airbag Service
required or SRS airbag Service urgent
appears in the display. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo workshop imme-
diately.
Related information
•
General information on safety mode (p. 43)
Airbag system
In the event of a frontal collision the airbag sys-
tem helps to protect the head, face and chest of
the driver and passenger.
G018665
Airbag system viewed from above, left-hand-drive car.
G018666
Airbag system viewed from above, right-hand-drive car.
SAFETY
35
The system consists of airbags and sensors. A
sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and
the airbag(s) are inflated and become hot. The
airbag cushions the initial collision impact for the
occupant. The airbag deflates when compressed
by the collision. When this occurs, smoke
escapes into the car. This is completely normal.
The entire process, including inflation and defla-
tion of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a sec-
ond.
If the airbags have deployed, the following is rec-
ommended:
•
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that
you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo
workshop. Do not drive with deployed air-
bags.
•
Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to handle the
replacement of components in the car's
safety systems.
•
Always contact a doctor.
WARNING
The airbag system's control module is located
in the centre console. If the centre console is
drenched with water or other liquid, discon-
nect the cables to the starter battery. Do not
attempt to start the car since the airbags may
deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo recom-
mends that you have it conveyed to an
authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They can
make steering difficult. Other safety systems
may also be damaged. The smoke and dust
created when the airbags are deployed can
cause skin and eye irritation/injury after inten-
sive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with
cold water. The rapid deployment sequence
and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin
burns.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop for repair. Defec-
tive work in the airbag system could cause
malfunction and result in serious personal
injury.
NOTE
The detectors react differently depending on
the nature of the collision and whether or not
the seatbelts are fastened. Applies to all belt
positions.
It is therefore possible that only one (or none)
of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The
detectors sense the force of the collision on
the vehicle and the action is adapted accord-
ingly so that one or more airbags are
deployed.
Related information
•
Driver airbag (p. 36)
•
Passenger airbag (p. 36)
•
Safety - warning symbol (p. 34)
SAFETY
36
Driver airbag
To supplement the protection afforded by the
seatbelt (p. 30) the car is equipped on the driv-
er's side with an airbag (p. 34).
This airbag is fitted into the centre of the steering
wheel. The steering wheel is marked AIRBAG.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt
is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
diminish the protection provided by the airbag
in the event of a collision.
Related information
•
Passenger airbag (p. 36)
Passenger airbag
To supplement the protection afforded by the
seatbelt (p. 30) on the passenger side, the car
is equipped with an airbag (p. 34).
The airbag is folded up into a compartment
above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked
AIRBAG.
Location of the front passenger airbag in a left-hand
drive car.
Location of the front passenger airbag in a right-hand
drive car.
Label for passenger airbag
Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
37
Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label
becomes visible when the passenger door is opened.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is
positioned as shown above.
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on a seat
protected by an activated airbag. Failure to
follow this advice can lead to death or serious
injury to the child.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt
is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
diminish the protection provided by the airbag
in the event of a collision.
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and backs
against the backrest. Seatbelts must be
secured.
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the
dashboard where the passenger airbag is
located.
WARNING
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of
the front passenger seat.
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the passenger airbag is
activated.
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
must never sit on the front passenger seat if
the passenger airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
Switch - PACOS*
The front passenger airbag can be deactivated
(p. 38) if the car is equipped with a switch,
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch).
WARNING
If the car is equipped with an airbag for the
front passenger seat, but does not have a
switch PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off
Switch), then the airbag will always be acti-
vated.
Related information
•
Driver airbag (p. 36)
•
Child seats (p. 46)
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
38
Passenger airbag - activating/
deactivating*
The front passenger airbag (p. 36) can be deac-
tivated if the car is equipped with a switch,
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch).
Switch - PACOS
The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS) is
located on the passenger end of the instrument
panel and is accessible when the passenger door
is open.
Check that the switch is in the required position.
The remote control key's key blade (p. 169)
should be used to change position.
Location of airbag switch.
ON- the airbag is activated. With the switch
in this position, all front-facing passengers
(children and adults) can sit safely on the
passenger seat.
OFF - the airbag is deactivated. With the
switch in this position, children in rear-facing
child seats can sit safely on the front pas-
senger seat.
WARNING
Activated airbag (passenger seat):
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat when the passenger airbag is
activated.
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
must never sit on the front passenger seat
when the passenger airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
NOTE
When the remote control key is in key posi-
tion II (p. 83) the warning symbol (p. 34) for
the airbag is shown in the combined instru-
ment panel for approx. 6 seconds.
Following which, the indicator in the roof con-
sole is illuminated showing the correct status
for the front passenger seat airbag.
G017800
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is activated.
A warning symbol in the roof console indicates
that the airbag for the front passenger seat is
activated (see preceding illustration).
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
seat if the passenger airbag is activated and
the
symbol in the roof console is illumi-
nated to indicate this. Failure to follow this
advice could endanger the life of the child.
SAFETY
}}
39
2
2
G017724
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is deacti-
vated.
A text message and a symbol in the roof console
indicate that the airbag for the front passenger
seat is deactivated (see preceding illustration).
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas-
senger seat if the message in the roof con-
sole indicates that the airbag is deactivated,
and if the warning symbol (p. 34) for the air-
bag system is also displayed on the combined
instrument panel. This indicates that there has
been a severe malfunction. Visit a workshop
as soon as possible. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger the lives of passengers in the car.
Related information
•
Child seats (p. 46)
Side airbag (SIPS)
In a side impact collision a large proportion of
the collision force is transferred by the SIPS
(Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pil-
lars, the floor, the roof and other structural parts
of the body. The side airbags at the driver's and
front passenger seats protect the chest area and
the hip and are an important part of the SIPS.
G032949
The SIPS bag system consists of two main com-
ponents, side airbag and sensors. The side air-
bags are located in the front seat's backrests.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag
inflates between the occupant and the door
panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The
airbag deflates when compressed by the collision.
The side airbag is normally only deployed on the
side of the collision.
||
SAFETY
40
Driver's seat, left-hand drive.
Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.
WARNING
•
Volvo recommends that repairs are only
carried out by an authorised Volvo work-
shop. Defective work in the SIPS-bag
system could cause malfunction and
result in serious personal injury.
•
Do not put objects in the area between
the outside of the seat and the door
panel, since this area is required by the
side airbag.
•
Volvo recommends the use only of car
seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat
covers may impede the operation of the
side airbags.
•
Side airbags are a supplement the seat-
belts. Always use a seatbelt.
SIPS and child seats
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is
not diminished by the side airbag.
Related information
•
Driver airbag (p. 36)
•
Passenger airbag (p. 36)
•
Inflatable Curtain (IC) (p. 40)
Inflatable Curtain (IC)
The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the driver
and passengers from striking their heads on the
inside of the car during a collision.
Inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is part of
the SIPS system (p. 39) and the airbag system
(p. 34). It is fitted along both sides of the headlin-
ing and helps protect the driver and passengers
in the car's outer seats. A sufficiently violent colli-
sion trips the sensors and the inflatable curtain is
inflated.
SAFETY
}}
41
WARNING
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
handles in the roof. The hook is only designed
for light clothing (not for solid objects such as
umbrellas for example).
Do not screw or install anything onto the car's
headlining, door pillars or side panels. This
could compromise the intended protection.
Volvo recommends that you only ever use
Volvo genuine parts that are approved for
placement in these areas.
WARNING
Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under
the top edge of the windows in the doors.
Otherwise, the intended protection of the
inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the
headlining, may be compromised.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Related information
•
General information on seatbelts (p. 30)
General information on WHIPS
(whiplash protection)
WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) is a pro-
tection against whiplash injuries. The system
consists of energy absorbing backrests and
specially designed head restraints in the front
seats.
The WHIPS system is actuated by a rear-end col-
lision, where the angle and speed of the collision,
||
SAFETY
42
and the nature of the colliding vehicle all have an
influence.
WARNING
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Seat properties
When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front
seat backrests are lowered backward to change
the seating position of the driver and front seat
passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash
injury.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
system yourself. Volvo recommends that you
contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WHIPS and child seats
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is
not diminished by the WHIPS system.
Related information
•
WHIPS - seating position (p. 42)
•
General information on seatbelts (p. 30)
WHIPS - seating position
For optimum protection from the WHIPS system
(p. 41) the driver and passenger must have the
correct seating position and make sure that the
system's function is not obstructed.
Seating position
Set the correct seating position in the front seat
(p. 84) before driving starts.
Driver and front seat passenger should sit in the
centre of the seat with as little space as possible
between the head and the head restraint.
Function
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the driver's
seat/passenger seat that may prevent the WHIPS sys-
tem from functioning.
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
rear seat cushion and the front seat's back-
rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the
function of the WHIPS system.
Do not place objects on the rear seat that may prevent
the WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered or a
rear-facing child seat is used in the rear seat,
the corresponding front seat must be moved
forward so that it does not make contact with
the lowered backrest or child seat.
SAFETY
43
WARNING
If a seat has been subjected to extreme
forces, such as due to a rear-end collision, the
WHIPS system must be checked. Volvo rec-
ommends that it is checked by an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Part of the WHIPS system's protective
capacity may have been lost even if the seat
appears to be undamaged.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop to have the sys-
tem checked even after a minor rear-end col-
lision.
General information on safety mode
Safety mode is a protective state that is trig-
gered when a collision may have damaged any
of the car's vital functions, such as the fuel lines,
sensors for any of the safety systems, or the
brake system.
Warning triangle in the combined instrument panel.
If the car is involved in a collision, the text Safety
mode See manual may appear in the combined
instrument panel (p. 68) information display.
This means that the car has reduced functional-
ity.
WARNING
Never attempt to repair your car or reset the
electronics yourself if the car has been in
safety mode. This could result in personal
injury or the car not functioning as normal.
Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to check and
restore the car to normal status after
Safety
mode See manual has been displayed.
Related information
•
Safety mode - attempting to start the car
(p. 44)
•
Safety mode - moving the car (p. 44)
SAFETY
44
Safety mode - attempting to start
the car
If the car is set in safety mode (p. 43) then an
attempt to start the car can be made if every-
thing seems normal and the absence of fuel
leakage has been checked.
First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car.
There must be no smell of fuel either.
If everything seems normal and you have
checked for indications of fuel leakage, you may
attempt to start the car.
Remove the remote control key and open the
driver's door. If a message is now shown to the
effect that the ignition is on, press the start but-
ton. Then close the door and reinsert the remote
control key. The car's electronics will now try to
reset themselves to normal mode. Then try to
start the car.
If the message
Safety mode See manual is
still shown on the display then the car must not
be driven or towed but a vehicle recovery service
(p. 320) used instead. Even if the car appears to
be driveable, hidden damage may make the car
impossible to control once moving.
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to
restart the car if it smells of fuel when the
Safety mode See manual message is dis-
played. Leave the car at once.
WARNING
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its loca-
tion. Volvo recommends that it is transported
to an authorised Volvo workshop.
Related information
•
Safety mode - moving the car (p. 44)
Safety mode - moving the car
If
Normal mode is shown after Safety mode
See manual has been reset after attempting to
start the car (p. 44) , the car can be moved care-
fully out of a dangerous position.
Do not move the car further than necessary.
Related information
•
General information on safety mode (p. 43)
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
45
General information on child safety
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats,
booster cushions & attachment devices) which
is designed for fitting in this particular car.
Using Volvo's child safety equipment, the opti-
mum conditions are obtained for the child to
travel safely in the car. In addition, the child safety
equipment fits well and is simple to use.
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to
sit on the knee of a passenger.
Volvo recommends that children travel in rear-
facing child seats until as late an age as possible,
at least up to 3-4 years of age, and then in front-
facing booster cushions/child seats until the
child is 140 cm tall.
NOTE
Legal provisions about the type of child seat
that must be used for children of different
ages and heights vary from country to coun-
try. Check what does apply.
NOTE
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety products, contact the manufacturer for
clearer instructions.
Child safety locks
The rear doors and the windows in the rear
doors* can be locked manually (p. 184) or elec-
tronically (p. 184)* to prevent them being opened
from inside.
Related information
•
Child seats - location (p. 51)
•
Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 55)
•
Child seats - upper mounting points (p. 59)
SAFETY
46
Child seats
Children should sit comfortably and safely. Make
sure that the child seat is being used correctly.
NOTE
When using child safety products it is impor-
tant to read the installation instructions
included.
NOTE
Never leave a child seat unsecured in the car.
Always secure it according to the instructions
for the child seat, even when it is not in use.
WARNING
Do not secure the straps of the child seat to
the seat's horizontal adjustment bar, springs
or the rails and beams under the seat. Sharp
edges may damage the straps.
Look in the installation instructions for the child
seat for the correct fitting.
Recommended child seats
2
Weight Front seat (with deactivated
airbag, only rear-facing child
seats)
Front seat (with activated
airbag, only front-facing
child seats)
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 0
max 10 kg
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-
facing child seat, secured with the ISOFIX
fixture system.
Type approval: E1 04301146
(L)
Group 0
max 10 kg
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant
Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-
facing child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant
Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seat-
belt.
Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
2
With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.
SAFETY
}}
47
Weight Front seat (with deactivated
airbag, only rear-facing child
seats)
Front seat (with activated
airbag, only front-facing
child seats)
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 0
max 10 kg
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Child seats which are univer-
sally approved.
(U)
Child seats which are universally approved.
(U)
Child seats which are univer-
sally approved.
(U)
Group 1
9-18 kg
Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) – rear-
facing child seat, secured with
the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible
Child Seat) – rear-facing child seat, secured
with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Group 1
9-18 kg
Volvo rear-facing child seat
Type approval: E5 04212
(L)
Volvo rear-facing child seat
Type approval: E5 04212
(L)
Group 1
9-18 kg
Front-facing child seats
which are universally
approved.
A
(UF)
Child seats which are universally approved.
(U)
Child seats which are univer-
sally approved.
(U)
||
SAFETY
48
Weight Front seat (with deactivated
airbag, only rear-facing child
seats)
Front seat (with activated
airbag, only front-facing
child seats)
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 2
15-25 kg
Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) – rear-
facing child seat, secured with
the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible
Child Seat) – rear-facing child seat, secured
with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Group 2
15-25 kg
Volvo rear-facing child seat
Type approval: E5 04212
(L)
Volvo rear-facing child seat
Type approval: E5 04212
(L)
Group 2
15-25 kg
Volvo turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child
Seat) - front-facing child
seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191
(U)
Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible
Child Seat) - front-facing child seat, secured
with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191
(U)
Volvo turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat)
- front-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seat-
belt.
Type approval: E5 04191
(U)
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
Volvo booster seat with
backrest (Volvo Booster
Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1
04301169
(UF)
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo
Booster Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
Volvo booster seat with back-
rest (Volvo Booster Seat with
backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
SAFETY
}}
49
Weight Front seat (with deactivated
airbag, only rear-facing child
seats)
Front seat (with activated
airbag, only front-facing
child seats)
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
Booster cushion with and
without backrest (Booster
Cushion with and without
backrest).
Type approval: E5 04216
(UF)
Booster cushion with and without backrest
(Booster Cushion with and without
backrest).
Type approval: E5 04216
(UF)
Booster cushion with and
without backrest (Booster
Cushion with and without
backrest).
Type approval: E5 04216
(UF)
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
Volvo booster seat
Type approval: E1
04301312
(UF)
Volvo booster seat
Type approval: E1 04301312
(UF, L)
Volvo booster seat
Type approval: E1 04301312
(UF)
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
Integrated child seat (Integrated Child Seat)
- available as a factory fitted option.
Type approval: E5 04189
(B)
L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.
B: Built-in child seats approved for this weight class.
A
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.
SAFETY
}}
51
Child seats - location
The position of a child in the car and the choice
of equipment are dictated by the child's weight
and size.
G020739
Rear-facing child seat and airbag are not compatible.
Always fit rear-facing child seats (p. 46) in the
rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated
(p. 38). If a child is sitting on the front passenger
seat then he/she could suffer serious injury if the
airbag deploys.
If the passenger airbag is deactivated then rear-
facing child seats can be fitted on the front pas-
senger seat.
Label for passenger airbag
Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label
becomes visible when the passenger door is opened.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is
positioned as shown above.
You may place:
•
a rear-facing child seat on the front passen-
ger seat when the passenger airbag is deac-
tivated.
•
a front-facing child seat/booster cushion on
the front passenger seat when the passen-
ger airbag is activated.
•
one or more child seats/booster cushions in
the rear seat.
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on a seat
protected by an activated airbag. Failure to
follow this advice can lead to death or serious
injury to the child.
WARNING
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of
the front passenger seat.
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the passenger airbag is
activated.
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
must never sit on the front passenger seat if
the passenger airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
||
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
52
WARNING
Booster cushions/child seats with steel
braces or some other design that could rest
on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must
not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt
buckle to open accidentally.
Do not allow the upper section of the child
seat to rest against the windscreen.
NOTE
Regulations regarding the placement of chil-
dren in cars vary from country to country.
Check what does apply.
Related information
•
Child seats (p. 46)
•
General information on child safety (p. 45)
•
Child seats - upper mounting points (p. 59)
•
Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 55)
Child seat - integrated child seat*
The integrated child seats in the rear seat allow
children to sit comfortably and safely.
The child seat is specially designed to provide
children with good safety, together with the car's
seatbelt. The seat cushion can be raised in two
positions depending on the weight of the child.
The child seat is approved for children weighing
between 15 and 36 kg and at least 95 cm tall.
Correct position, the seatbelt should be positioned in on
the shoulder.
Incorrect positioning, the seatbelt must not be placed
beneath the shoulder.
Check before driving that:
•
the seat cushion is raised to the correct posi-
tion for the weight of the child
•
the seat cushion in locked in position
•
the seatbelt is in contact with the child's
body and is not slack or twisted
•
the seatbelt does not lie across the child's
throat or below the shoulder (see preceding
illustrations)
•
the lap section of the seatbelt is positioned
low over the pelvis to provide optimal protec-
tion.
Adjusting the seat cushion's two levels is per-
formed by raising (p. 53) and lowering (p. 54).
SAFETY
}}
* Option/accessory.
53
WARNING
Volvo recommends that repair or replacement
of the integrated child seat is only performed
by an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not
make any modifications or additions to the
child seat. If an integrated child seat has been
subjected to a heavy load, e.g. in connection
with a collision, then the seat cushion, seat-
belt and backrest, or possibly the whole seat,
must be replaced. Even if the child seat
appears to be undamaged, it may not afford
the same level of protection. This also applies
if the seat cushion was in lowered position
during a collision or similar. The seat cushion
must also be replaced if it is heavily worn.
WARNING
If the instructions for the integrated child seat
are not followed then the child could sustain
serious injury in the event of an accident.
Integrated child seat* - raising the
seat cushion
When the integrated child seat (p. 52) is in use,
the seat cushion must be folded up.
The seat cushion can be folded up in two posi-
tions. The position that should be used depends
on the weight of the child.
Stage 1 Stage 2
Weight 22-36 kg 15-25 kg
Stage 1
3
Pull the handle forwards and upwards to
release the seat cushion.
Press the seat cushion backwards to lock.
3
Lower stage.
||
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
54
Stage 2
4
Start from the lower stage. Press the button.
Lift the seat cushion up at the front edge
and press it back against the backrest to
lock.
NOTE
It is not possible to adjust the seat cushion
from stage 2 to stage 1. It must first be reset
by being fully folded down (p. 54) into the
rear seat.
Related information
•
Integrated child seat* - lowering the seat
cushion (p. 54)
Integrated child seat* - lowering the
seat cushion
When the integrated child seat (p. 52) is not in
use, the seat cushion must be lowered into the
rear seat. The seat cushion can be lowered from
the upper or lower stage to fully lowered position
in the rear seat. However, it is not possible to
adjust the seat cushion from the upper stage to
the lower stage.
Pull the handle forwards to release the seat
cushion.
4
Upper stage.
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
55
Press down with your hand in the centre of
the seat cushion in order to lock it.
IMPORTANT
Check that there are no loose objects (e.g.
toys) left behind in the space under the child
seat's seat cushion before lowering.
NOTE
Before the rear backrest is lowered, the child
seat's seat cushion must be lowered first.
Related information
•
Integrated child seat* - raising the seat cush-
ion (p. 53)
Child seat - ISOFIX
ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child seats
(p. 46) that is based on an international stand-
ard.
Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system are
concealed behind the lower section of the rear
seat backrest, in the outer seats.
The location of the mounting points is indicated
by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see pre-
ceding illustration).
Press the seat cushion down to access the
mounting points.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to the
ISOFIX mounting points.
Related information
•
ISOFIX - size classes (p. 56)
•
ISOFIX - types of child seat (p. 57)
•
General information on child safety (p. 45)
SAFETY
56
ISOFIX - size classes
There is a size classification for child seats using
the ISOFIX (p. 55) fixture system in order to
assist users in choosing the correct type of child
seat (p. 57).
Size
class
Description
A Full size, front-facing child seat
B Reduced size (alt. 1), front-facing
child seat
B1 Reduced size (alt. 2), front-facing
child seat
C Full size, rear-facing child seat
D Reduced size, rear-facing child
seat
E Rear-facing infant seat
F Transverse infant seat, left-hand
G Transverse infant seat, right-hand
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the passenger airbag is
activated.
NOTE
If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifica-
tion, the car model must be included on the
vehicle list for the child seat.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo dealer for recommendations
about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo recom-
mends.
SAFETY
}}
57
ISOFIX - types of child seat
Child seats are in different sizes – cars are in dif-
ferent sizes. This means that not all child seats
are suitable for all seats in all car models.
Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Infant seat transverse max 10 kg F X X
G X X
Infant seat, rear-facing max 10 kg E X OK
(IL)
Infant seat, rear-facing max 13 kg E X OK
(IL)
D X OK
(IL)
C X OK
(IL)
Child seat, rear-facing 9-18 kg D X OK
(IL)
C X OK
(IL)
||
SAFETY
58
Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Front-facing child seat 9-18 kg B X
OK
A
(IUF)
B1 X
OK
A
(IUF)
A X
OK
A
(IUF)
X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class.
IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for a particular car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.
A
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
Make sure you select the right size class (p. 56)
of child seat with ISOFIX (p. 55) fixture system.
SAFETY
59
Child seats - upper mounting points
The car is equipped with upper mounting points
for certain front-facing child seats (p. 46). These
mounting points are located on the rear of the
seat.
The upper mounting points are primarily intended
for use with front-facing child seats. Volvo recom-
mends that small children should sit in rear-fac-
ing child seats to as late an age as possible.
NOTE
Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate
fitting this type of child seat in cars with fold-
ing head restraints on the outer seats.
NOTE
In cars with a cargo cover over the luggage
compartment, this must be removed before
child seats can be attached to the securing
points.
For detailed information on how the child seat
should be tensioned in the upper mounting
points, see the seat manufacturer's instructions.
WARNING
The child seat's straps must always be drawn
through the hole in the head restraint leg
before they are tensioned at the attachment
point.
Related information
•
General information on child safety (p. 45)
•
Child seats - location (p. 51)
•
Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 55)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
62
Instruments and controls, left-hand
drive car - overview
The overview shows where the car's displays
and controls are located.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
63
Overview, left-hand drive cars
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
64
Function See
Menus and mes-
sages, direction indi-
cators, main/dipped
beam, trip computer
(p. 112),
(p. 114),
(p. 100),
(p. 94) and
(p. 116).
Cruise control*
(p. 198) and
(p. 204).
Horn, airbags (p. 89) and
(p. 34).
Combined instrument
panel
(p. 68).
Menu navigation,
audio control, phone
control*
(p. 115) and
the Sensus Info-
tainment sup-
plement.
START/STOP
ENGINE button
(p. 266).
Ignition switch (p. 82).
Screen for infotain-
ment system and dis-
play of menus
(p. 115) and
the Sensus Info-
tainment sup-
plement.
Door handle -
Function See
Control panel (p. 179),
(p. 184),
(p. 105) and
(p. 107).
Hazard warning flash-
ers
(p. 99).
Control panel for info-
tainment system and
menu navigation
(p. 115) and
the Sensus Info-
tainment sup-
plement.
Control panel for cli-
mate control
(p. 130).
Gear selector (p. 277).
Controls for drive
modes
(p. 270).
Wipers and washing (p. 103).
Steering wheel
adjustment
(p. 89).
Bonnet opener (p. 361).
Parking brake (p. 285).
Function See
Seat adjustment*
(p. 85).
Headlamp control,
opener for fuel filler
flap and tailgate
(p. 91),
(p. 294) and
(p. 181).
Related information
•
Outside temperature gauge (p. 77)
•
Trip meter (p. 77)
•
Clock (p. 78)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
65
Instruments and controls, right-
hand drive car - overview
The overview shows where the car's displays
and controls are located.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
66
Overview, right-hand drive cars
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
67
Function See
Screen for infotain-
ment system and dis-
play of menus
(p. 115) and
the Sensus Info-
tainment sup-
plement.
Ignition switch (p. 82).
START/STOP
ENGINE button
(p. 266).
Cruise control*
(p. 198) and
(p. 204).
Combined instrument
panel
(p. 68).
Horn, airbags (p. 89) and
(p. 34).
Menu navigation,
audio control, phone
control*
(p. 115) and
the Sensus Info-
tainment sup-
plement.
Wipers and washing (p. 103).
Door handle -
Control panel (p. 179),
(p. 184),
(p. 105) and
(p. 107).
Function See
Headlamp control,
opener for fuel filler
flap and tailgate
(p. 91),
(p. 294) and
(p. 181).
Seat adjustment*
(p. 85).
Parking brake (p. 285).
Steering wheel
adjustment
(p. 89).
Menus and mes-
sages, direction indi-
cators, main/dipped
beam, trip computer
(p. 112),
(p. 114),
(p. 100),
(p. 94) and
(p. 116).
Gear selector (p. 277).
Controls for drive
modes
(p. 270).
Control panel for cli-
mate control
(p. 130).
Control panel for info-
tainment system and
menu navigation
(p. 115) and
the Sensus Info-
tainment sup-
plement.
Hazard warning flash-
ers
(p. 99).
Bonnet opener (p. 361).
Related information
•
Outside temperature gauge (p. 77)
•
Trip meter (p. 77)
•
Clock (p. 78)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
68
Combined instrument panel
The combined instrument panel's information
display shows information on some of the car's
functions, as well as messages.
•
Digital combined instrument panel - overview
(p. 69)
•
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 74)
•
Combined instrument cluster - meaning of
warning symbols (p. 75)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
69
Digital combined instrument panel -
overview
The combined instrument panel's information
display shows information on some of the car's
functions, as well as messages.
The instrument shows information according to the selections made, see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 112).
Hybrid battery gauge
Current energy level
Active drive mode
The symbol illuminates when the internal
combustion engine is operating.
Hybrid guide (Driver Support Power Meter).
Shows the current driver-requested propul-
sion power and available electric motor
power, i.e. the limit when the internal com-
bustion engine starts/stops. For more infor-
mation, Eco guide & Hybrid guide (p. 73).
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
70
Energy recovery
When the electric motor generates power for
the hybrid battery, bubbles are shown in the
hybrid battery gauge - see Foot brake
(p. 281).
Information display
Information display.
The combined instrument panel's information dis-
play shows information on some of the car's
functions, e.g. cruise control and trip computer, as
well as messages. The information is shown with
symbols and text. There are further descriptions
under the functions that use the display.
Gauges and indicators
Alternative themes can be selected for the com-
bined instrument panel. Possible themes are
"Hybrid", "Elegance", "Eco" and "Performance".
A theme can only be selected when the engine is
running.
To select the theme, press the left-hand stalk
switch's OK button and select the
Themes
menu option by turning the thumbwheel on the
lever. Press the OK button. Turn the thumbwheel
to select the theme and confirm the selection by
pressing the OK button.
On certain model variants, the appearance of the
centre console's screen follows the theme
selected for the combined instrument panel.
The contrast mode and colour mode for the
instrument can also be set using the left-hand
stalk switch.
For more information on menu navigation, see
Menu navigation - combined instrument panel
(p. 112).
The choice of theme and setting of contrast
mode and colour mode can be stored for each
remote control key in the car key memory*, see
Remote control key - personalisation* (p. 163).
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
71
Theme "Hybrid"
Gauges and indicators, theme "Hybrid".
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking
1
, the yellow indicator
symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illumi-
nated. See also Trip computer (p. 116) and
Filling up with fuel (p. 295).
Hybrid battery gauge
Speedometer
Hybrid guide. See also Eco guide & Hybrid
guide (p. 73).
Gear position indicator. See also Automatic
gearbox - Geartronic (p. 277).
Theme "Elegance"
Gauges and indicators, theme "Elegance".
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking
1
, the yellow indicator
symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illumi-
nated. See also Trip computer (p. 116) and
Filling up with fuel (p. 295).
No function
Speedometer
No function
Gear position indicator. See also Automatic
gearbox - Geartronic (p. 277).
Theme "Eco"
Gauges and indicators, theme "Eco".
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking
1
, the yellow indicator
symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illumi-
nated. See also Trip computer (p. 116) and
Filling up with fuel (p. 295).
Eco guide. See also Eco guide & Hybrid
guide (p. 73).
Speedometer
Hybrid guide. See also Eco guide & Hybrid
guide (p. 73).
Gear position indicator. See also Automatic
gearbox - Geartronic (p. 277).
1
When the display's message "
Distance to empty fuel tank:" starts to show "----", the marking becomes red.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
72
Theme "Performance"
Gauges and indicators, theme "Performance".
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking
1
, the yellow indicator
symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illumi-
nated. See also Trip computer (p. 116) and
Filling up with fuel (p. 295).
E-boost gauge. Illustrates electric motor use,
its support to the internal combustion engine
and engine braking
2
with the electric motor.
Speedometer
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per minute
(rpm).
Hybrid guide. See also Eco guide & Hybrid
guide (p. 73).
Gear position indicator. See also Automatic
gearbox - Geartronic (p. 277).
Indicator and warning symbols
Indicator and warning symbols.
Indicator symbols
Indicator and warning symbols
Warning symbols
Functionality check
All indicator and warning symbols, apart from
symbols in the centre of the information display,
illuminate in key position II or when the engine is
started. When the engine has started, all the
symbols should go out except the parking brake
symbol, which only goes out when the brake is
disengaged.
If the engine does not start or if the functionality
check is carried out in key position II then all
symbols go out within a few seconds except the
symbol for faults in the car's emissions system.
Related information
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 68)
•
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 74)
•
Combined instrument cluster - meaning of
warning symbols (p. 75)
1
When the display's message "
Distance to empty fuel tank:" starts to show "----", the marking becomes red.
2
Engine braking with the electric motor charges the hybrid battery, see Foot brake (p. 281).
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
73
Eco guide & Hybrid guide
Eco guide and Hybrid guide are two combined
instrument panel (p. 68) instruments which help
the driver to drive the car with optimum driving
economy.
The car also stores statistics of journeys made,
which can be viewed in the form of a block dia-
gram; see Trip computer - trip statistics*
(p. 121).
Eco guide
This instrument provides an indication of how
economically the car is being driven.
To view this function, select the theme "Eco"; see
Digital combined instrument panel - overview
(p. 69).
Instantaneous value
Average value
Instantaneous value
The instantaneous value is shown here - the
higher the reading on the scale, the better.
The instantaneous value is calculated based on
speed, engine speed, engine power utilised plus
use of the foot brake.
Optimum speed (50-80 km/h (30-50 mph)) and
low engine speeds are encouraged. The pointers
fall during acceleration and braking.
Very low instantaneous values illuminate the red
zone on the meter (with a short delay), which
means poor driving economy and hence should
be avoided.
Average value
The average value slowly follows the instantane-
ous value and describes how the car has been
driven most recently. The higher the pointers on
the scale, the better the economy achieved by
the driver.
Hybrid guide
This instrument shows the relationship between
how much power is being taken from the electric
motor and how much power is available.
To view this function, select the theme "Hybrid"
or "Performance", see Digital combined instru-
ment panel - overview (p. 69).
Driver-requested power
Available electric motor power
Where the two pointers meet is the threshold for
when the internal combustion engine starts/
stops.
Driver-requested power
The large pointer indicates the amount of engine
power requested by the driver by regulating the
accelerator pedal. The higher the reading on the
scale, the more power is requested by the driver
in the current gear.
Available electric motor power
The small pointer indicates the amount of power
currently available for the electric motor.
A large gap between the two pointers indicates a
large power reserve.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
74
Combined instrument panel -
meaning of indicator symbols
The indicator symbols alert the driver that a func-
tion is activated, that the system is operating, or
that an error or failure has occurred.
Indicator symbols
Symbol Specification
ABL fault
Emissions system
ABS fault
Rear fog lamp on
Stability system, see Electronic sta-
bility control (ESC) - general
(p. 190)
Stability system, sport mode, see
Electronic stability control (ESC) -
operation (p. 191)
Engine preheater
Low level in fuel tank
Information, read display text
Symbol Specification
Main beam On
Left-hand direction indicator
Right-hand direction indicator
Tyre pressure system , see Tyre
pressure monitoring* (p. 335)
ABL fault
The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in the
ABL function (Active Bending Lights).
Emissions system
If the symbol illuminates after the engine has
been started then it may be due to a fault in the
car's emissions system. Drive to a workshop for
checking. Volvo recommends that you seek
assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
ABS fault
If this symbol illuminates then the system is not
working. The car's regular brake system contin-
ues to work, but without the ABS function.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
2. Restart the engine.
3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to a
workshop to have the ABS system checked.
Volvo recommends that you seek assistance
from an authorised Volvo workshop.
Rear fog lamp on
This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp is
switched on.
Stability system
A flashing symbol indicates that the stability sys-
tem is operating. If the symbol illuminates with
constant glow then there is a fault in the system.
Stability system, sport mode
The symbol illuminates when the sport mode is
activated. Sport mode allows for a more active
driving experience. The system then detects
whether the accelerator pedal, steering wheel
movements and cornering are more active than in
normal driving and then allows controlled skid-
ding of the rear section up to a certain level
before it intervenes and stabilises the car.
Engine preheater
This symbol illuminates during engine preheating.
Preheating takes place mostly due to low tem-
perature.
Low level in fuel tank
When the symbol illuminates the level in the fuel
tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
75
Information, read display text
When one of the car's systems does not behave
as intended, this information symbol illuminates
and a text appears on the information display.
The message text is cleared with the OK button,
see Menu navigation - combined instrument
panel (p. 112), or it disappears automatically
after a time (time depending on which function is
indicated). The information symbol can also illu-
minate in conjunction with other symbols.
NOTE
When a service message is shown, the sym-
bol and message are cleared using the OK
button, or disappear automatically after a
time.
Main beam On
The symbol illuminates when main beam is on
and with main beam flash.
Left/right-hand direction indicator
Both direction indicator symbols flash when the
hazard warning flashers are used.
Tyre pressure system
The symbol illuminates in the event of low tyre
pressure, or if a fault arises in the tyre pressure
system.
Reminder – doors not closed
If one of the doors is not closed properly then the
information or warning symbol illuminates
together with an explanatory image in the infor-
mation display. Stop the car in a safe place as
soon as possible and close the door that is open.
If the car is driven at a speed lower than
approx. 7 km/h (approx. 4 mph) then the
information symbol illuminates.
If the car is driven at a speed higher than
approx. 7 km/h (approx. 4 mph) then the
warning symbol illuminates.
If the bonnet
3
is not closed properly then the
warning symbol illuminates together with an
explanatory image in the information display. Stop
the car in a safe place as soon as possible and
close the bonnet.
If the tailgate is not closed properly then the
information symbol illuminates together with an
explanatory image in the information display. Stop
the car in a safe place as soon as possible and
close the tailgate.
Related information
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 68)
•
Combined instrument cluster - meaning of
warning symbols (p. 75)
•
Digital combined instrument panel - overview
(p. 69)
Combined instrument cluster -
meaning of warning symbols
The warning symbols alert the driver that an
important function is activated, or that a serious
error or a serious failure has occurred.
Warning symbols
Symbol Specification
Parking brake applied
Airbags – SRS
Seatbelt reminder
Starter battery not charging
Fault in brake system
Warning
3
Only cars with alarm*.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
76
Parking brake applied
This symbol illuminates with a constant glow
when the parking brake is applied. The symbol
flashes during application, and then changes over
to a constant glow.
A flashing symbol in any other situation means
that a fault has arisen. Read the message on the
information display.
For more information, see Parking brake
(p. 285).
Airbags – SRS
If the symbol remains illuminated or illuminates
while driving, a fault has been detected in one of
the car's safety systems. Drive to a workshop for
checking as soon as possible. Volvo recommends
that you seek assistance from an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Seatbelt reminder
This symbol flashes if someone in a front seat
has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in a
rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.
Starter battery not charging
This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault
has occurred in the electrical system. Visit a
workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek
assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
Fault in brake system
If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level
may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place and
check the level in the brake fluid reservoir; see
Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 366).
If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at the
same time, there may be a fault in the brake
force distribution system.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
2. Restart the engine.
•
If both symbols extinguish, continue driv-
ing.
•
If the symbols remain illuminated, check
the level in the brake fluid reservoir; see
Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 366). If
the brake fluid level is normal but the
symbols are still illuminated, the car can
be driven, with great care, to a workshop
to have the brake system checked. Volvo
recommends that you seek assistance
from an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid.
The loss of brake fluid must be investigated
by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you
contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at the
same time, there is a risk that the rear end will
skid during heavy braking.
Warning
The red warning symbol illuminates when a fault
has been indicated which could affect the safety
and/or driveability of the car. An explanatory text
is shown on the information display at the same
time. The symbol remains visible until the fault
has been rectified but the text message can be
cleared with the OK button; see Menu navigation
- combined instrument panel (p. 112). The warn-
ing symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with
other symbols.
Action:
1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car fur-
ther.
2. Read the information on the information dis-
play. Implement the action in accordance
with the message in the display. Clear the
message using the OK button.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
77
Reminder – doors not closed
If one of the doors is not closed properly then the
information or warning symbol illuminates
together with an explanatory image in the infor-
mation display. Stop the car in a safe place as
soon as possible and close the door that is open.
If the car is driven at a speed lower than
approx. 7 km/h (approx. 4 mph) then the
information symbol illuminates.
If the car is driven at a speed higher than
approx. 7 km/h (approx. 4 mph) then the
warning symbol illuminates.
If the bonnet
4
is not closed properly then the
warning symbol illuminates together with an
explanatory image in the information display. Stop
the car in a safe place as soon as possible and
close the bonnet.
If the tailgate is not closed properly then the
information symbol illuminates together with an
explanatory image in the information display. Stop
the car in a safe place as soon as possible and
close the tailgate.
Related information
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 68)
•
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 74)
•
Digital combined instrument panel - overview
(p. 69)
Outside temperature gauge
The display for the outside temperature gauge
appears in the combined instrument panel.
Display for outside temperature gauge
When the temperature lies between +2 °C to -5
°C a snowflake symbol illuminates in the display.
This warns of icy roads. If the car has been sta-
tionary, the gauge may display a reading that is
too high.
Related information
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 68)
Trip meter
The trip meter display appears in the combined
instrument panel.
Trip meter.
Display for trip meter
Both trip meters
T1 and T2 are used to measure
short distances. The distance is shown in the dis-
play.
Turn the left-hand stalk switch's thumbwheel to
show the required meter.
A long press (until the change occurs) on the
left-hand stalk switch RESET button resets the
trip meter shown. For more information, see Trip
computer (p. 116).
Related information
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 68)
4
Only cars with alarm*.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
78
Clock
The clock display appears in the combined
instrument panel.
Clock.
Display for showing the time
Setting the clock
The clock can be adjusted in the menu system
MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115).
Related information
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 68)
Combined instrument panel -
license agreement
A license is an agreement for the right to oper-
ate a certain activity or the right to use someone
else's entitlement according to the terms and
conditions in the agreement. The following text is
Volvo's agreement with the manufacturer/devel-
oper.
Combined Instrument Panel Software
Open Source Software Notice
This product uses certain free / open source and
other software originating from third parties, that
is subject to the GNU Lesser General Public
License version 2 (LGPLv2), The FreeType
Project License ("FreeType License") and other
different and/or additional copy right licenses,
disclaimers and notices. The links to access the
exact terms of LGPLv2, and the other open
source software licenses, disclaimers,
acknowledgements and notices are provided to
you below. Please refer to the exact terms of the
relevant License, regarding your rights under said
licenses. Volvo Car Corporation (VCC) offers to
provide the source code of said free/open source
software to you for a charge covering the cost of
performing such distribution, such as the cost of
media, shipping and handling, upon written
request. Please contact your nearest Volvo
Dealer.
The offer is valid for a period of at least three (3)
years from the date of the distribution of this
product by VCC / or for as long as VCC offers
spare parts or customer support.
Portions of this product uses software
copyrighted © 2007 The FreeType Project
(www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
Portions of this product uses software with
Copyright © 1994–2013 Lua.org, PUC-Rio
(http://www.lua.org/)
This product includes software under
following licenses:
LGPL v2.1: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-
licenses/lgpl-2.1.html
•
GNU FriBidi
•
DevIL
The FreeType Project License: http://
git.savannah.gnu.org/cgit/freetype/freetype2.git/
tree/docs/FTL.TXT
•
FreeType 2
MIT License: http://opensource.org/licenses/
mit-license.html
•
Lua
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
79
Symbols in the display
There are a variety of different symbols in the
display in the car. The symbols are divided into
warning, indicator and information symbols.
Shown below are the most common symbols with
their meanings and a reference to where in the
manual further information can be found.
- Red warning symbol, illuminates when a
fault has been indicated which could affect the
safety and/or driveability of the car. An explana-
tory text is shown in the information display in the
combined instrument panel at the same time.
- Information symbol, illuminates in combi-
nation with text in the information display in the
combined instrument panel, when a deviation in
any of the car's systems has occurred. The infor-
mation symbol can also illuminate in conjunction
with other symbols.
Warning symbols in the combined
instrument panel
Symbol Specification See
Parking brake
applied
(p. 75),
(p. 285)
Airbags – SRS (p. 34),
(p. 75)
Seatbelt reminder (p. 30),
(p. 75)
Symbol Specification See
Starter battery not
charging
(p. 75)
Fault in brake sys-
tem
(p. 75),
(p. 281)
Warning, safety
mode
(p. 34),
(p. 43),
(p. 75)
Control symbols in the combined
instrument panel
Symbol Specification See
ABL fault*
(p. 74),
(p. 97)
Emissions system (p. 74)
ABS fault (p. 74),
(p. 281)
Rear fog lamp on (p. 74),
(p. 98)
Stability system,
ESC (Electronic
Stability Control),
Trailer stability
assist*
(p. 74),
(p. 193),
(p. 318)
Stability system,
sport mode
(p. 74),
(p. 193)
Symbol Specification See
Engine preheater
(diesel)
(p. 74)
Low level in fuel
tank
(p. 74),
(p. 144)
Information, read
display text
(p. 74)
Main beam On (p. 74),
(p. 94)
Left-hand direction
indicators
(p. 74)
Right-hand direc-
tion indicators
(p. 74)
Tyre pressure sys-
tem*
(p. 74),
(p. 335)
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
80
Information symbols in the combined
instrument panel
Symbol Specification See
Active high beam,
AHB (Active High
Beam)*
(p. 95)
Camera sensor*,
Laser sensor*
(p. 95),
(p. 228),
(p. 238),
(p. 251),
(p. 255)
Adaptive cruise con-
trol*
(p. 215)
Adaptive cruise con-
trol*, Distance Warn-
ing* (Distance Alert)
(p. 209),
(p. 201)
Adaptive cruise con-
trol*, time interval
(p. 204),
(p. 206)
Cruise control*
(p. 198)
Radar sensor*
(p. 215),
(p. 203),
(p. 238)
Foot brake (p. 281)
Speed limiter (p. 195)
Symbol Specification See
Auto Brake*, Dis-
tance Warning* (Dis-
tance Alert), City
Safety
TM
, Collision
warning system*
(p. 203),
(p. 228),
(p. 238)
Engine block and
passenger compart-
ment heater*
(p. 144)
Engine block heater
and passenger com-
partment heater*
Service required
(p. 144)
Activated timer*
(p. 144)
ABL system*
(p. 97)
Fuel filler flap, right-
hand side
(p. 294)
Low battery (p. 144)
Parking brake (p. 285)
Rain sensor*
(p. 103)
Symbol Specification See
Driver Alert System*,
Lane Departure
Warning*
(p. 251),
(p. 255)
Driver Alert System*,
Lane Departure
Warning*
(p. 255)
Driver Alert System*,
Time for a break
(p. 250)
Driver Alert System*,
Time for a break
(p. 251)
Recorded speed
information*
(p. 246)
Parking inside (p. 139)
Parking outside (p. 139)
Heating the seat (p. 139),
(p. 139)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
81
Symbol Specification See
Drive systems (p. 274)
Gear shift indicator (p. 276)
Gear positions (p. 277)
Measuring the oil
level
(p. 364)
Information symbols in the roof console
display
Symbol Specification See
Seatbelt reminder (p. 33)
Airbag, passenger seat,
activated
(p. 38)
Airbag, passenger seat,
deactivated
(p. 38)
Related information
•
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 74)
•
Combined instrument cluster - meaning of
warning symbols (p. 75)
•
Messages - handling (p. 114)
Volvo Sensus
Volvo Sensus is the heart of the personal Volvo
experience and connects you with the car and
outside world. Sensus provides information,
entertainment and assistance when it is needed.
Sensus consists of intuitive functions that both
enhance the car journey and simplifies owner-
ship of the car.
An intuitive navigation structure makes it possible
to receive relevant support, information and
entertainment when it is necessary, without dis-
tracting the driver.
Sensus covers all the car's solutions that enable
connection* to the outside world and provides
you with intuitive control over all the car's capabil-
ities.
Volvo Sensus combines and presents many func-
tions in several of the car's systems on the centre
console's screen. With Volvo Sensus the car can
be personalised by means of an intuitive user
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
82
interface. Settings can be made in Car settings,
Audio and media, Climate control, etc.
With the centre console buttons and controls or
the steering wheel's right-hand keypad* functions
can be activated or deactivated and many differ-
ent settings can be made.
With a press on MY CAR all settings related to
the driving and control of the car are presented,
such as City Safety, locks and alarm, automatic
fan speed, setting the clock, etc.
With a press on the respective function RADIO,
MEDIA, TEL*,
*, NAV* and CAM
5
other
sources, systems and functions can be activated,
e.g. AM, FM, CD, DVD*, TV*, Bluetooth
®
*, naviga-
tion* and park assist camera*.
For more information about all functions/
systems, see the relevant section in the owner's
manual or its supplement.
Overview
Control panel in centre console. The figure is schematic
- the number of functions and layout of the buttons both
vary, depending on the equipment selected and the mar-
ket.
Navigation* - NAV, see separate supplement
(Sensus Navigation).
Audio and media - RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*, see
separate supplement (Sensus Infotainment).
Function settings - MY CAR, see MY CAR
(p. 115).
Internet-connected car - *, see separate
supplement (Sensus Infotainment).
Climate control system (p. 124).
Park assist camera* (p. 260) – CAM*.
Key positions
The remote control key can be used to set the
vehicle's electrical system in different modes/
levels so that different functions are available;
see Key positions - functions at different levels
(p. 83).
Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/
inserted.
NOTE
For cars with the keyless start and lock sys-
tem* the remote control key does not need to
be inserted into the ignition switch but can be
stored in e.g. a pocket. For more information
on the keyless start and lock system, see
Keyless drive* (p. 173).
5
Applies to certain car models.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
83
Insert the remote control key
1. Hold the end of the remote control key with
the detachable key blade and insert the
remote control key in the ignition switch.
2. Then press the remote control key in the
ignition switch up to its end position.
IMPORTANT
Foreign objects in the ignition switch can
impair the function or destroy the lock.
Do not press in the remote control key incor-
rectly turned - hold the end with the detacha-
ble key blade, see Detachable key blade -
detaching/attaching (p. 169).
Remove the remote control key
Grip the remote control key and pull it out from
the ignition switch.
Key positions - functions at different
levels
To enable the use of a limited number of func-
tions with the engine switched off, the car's elec-
trical system can be set in 3 different levels - 0, I
and II - with the remote control key. This owner's
manual describes these levels throughout using
the denomination "key positions".
The following table shows the functions available
in each key position/level.
Level Functions
0
•
Odometer, clock and temperature
gauge are illuminated.
•
Electrically operated seats can be
adjusted.
•
The audio system can be used for
a limited time - see the Sensus
Infotainment supplement.
I
•
Sunroof, power windows, 12 V
socket in the passenger compart-
ment, navigation, phone, ventilation
fan and windscreen wipers can be
used.
Current consumption loads the
starter battery in this key position.
II
•
The headlamps come on.
•
Warning/indicator lamps illuminate
for 5 seconds.
•
Several other systems are acti-
vated. However, electric heating in
seat cushions and the rear window
can only be activated after starting
the engine.
This key position consumes a lot of
current from the starter battery and
should therefore be avoided!
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
84
Selecting key position/level
•
Key position 0 - Unlock the car - This
means that the car's electrical system is at
level 0.
NOTE
To reach level I or II without starting the
engine - do not depress the brake/clutch
pedal when these key positions are due to be
selected.
•
Key position I - With the remote control key
fully inserted into the ignition switch
6
- Briefly
press START/STOP ENGINE.
•
Key position II - With the remote control
key fully inserted into the ignition switch
6
-
Give a long
7
press on START/STOP
ENGINE.
•
Back to key position 0 - To return to key
position 0 from position II and I - Briefly
press on START/STOP ENGINE.
Audio system
For information on audio system functions with
remote control key removed, see the Sensus
Infotainment supplement.
Starting and stopping the engine
For information about starting/stopping the
engine, see Starting the engine (p. 266).
Related information
•
Key positions (p. 82)
Seats, front
The car's front seats have different setting
options for optimum seating comfort.
Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.
Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust
the distance to the steering wheel and ped-
als. Check that the seat is locked after
changing position.
Raise/lower* front edge of seat cushion,
pump up/down.
Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.
Change the lumbar support*, press the but-
ton.
Control panel for power seat*, see Seats,
front - electrically operated* (p. 85).
6
Not required for cars with keyless start and lock system*.
7
Approx. 2 seconds.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
85
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat before
setting off, never while driving. Make sure that
the seat is in locked position in order to avoid
personal injury in the event of heavy braking
or an accident.
Lowering the passenger seat backrest*
8
The passenger seat's backrest can be folded for-
ward to make room for long loads.
Move the seat as far back/down as possible.
Adjust the backrest to an upright position.
Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest
and fold it forward.
4. Push the seat forward so that the head
restraint "locks" in under the glovebox.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
WARNING
Grasp the backrest and make sure that it is
properly locked after being folded up in order
to avoid personal injury in the event of sudden
braking or an accident.
Related information
•
Seats, front - electrically operated* (p. 85)
•
Seats, rear (p. 87)
Seats, front - electrically operated*
The car's front seats have different setting
options for optimum seating comfort. The power
seat can be moved forward/backward and up/
down. The front edge of the seat cushion can be
raised/lowered. The backrest angle and lumbar
support* can be changed.
Power seat
Front edge of seat cushion up/down
Raise/lower seat
Seat, forward/backward
Backrest rake
Lumbar support* is adjusted inward and out-
ward
8
Only applies to comfort seats.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
86
The power seats have overload protection which
is tripped if a seat is blocked by an object. If this
should happen, set the car's electrical system in
key position I or 0 and wait a short time before
adjusting the seat again.
Only one movement (forward/back/up/down/
inward/outward) can be made at a time.
Preparations
The seat can be adjusted for a certain time after
unlocking the door with the remote control key
without the key in the ignition switch. Seat adjust-
ment is normally made in key position I and can
always be made when the engine is running.
Seat with memory function*
The memory function stores settings for the seat
and the door mirrors.
Store setting
Memory button
Memory button
Memory button
Button for storing settings
1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.
2.
Press and hold button M while pressing but-
ton 1, 2 or 3 simultaneously. Hold the but-
tons depressed until the acoustic signal is
heard and text is shown in the combined
instrument panel.
The seat must be adjusted again before a new
memory can be set.
The setting for lumbar support is not stored.
Using a stored setting
Press one of the memory buttons 1-3 until the
seat and the door mirrors stop. If the button is
released, the movement of the seat and door mir-
rors will be interrupted.
Key memory* in remote control key
All remote control keys can be used by different
drivers to store the settings for the driver's seat
and door mirrors
9
, see Remote control key - per-
sonalisation* (p. 163).
Emergency stop
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press one
of the setting buttons for the seat or memory
buttons in order to stop the seat.
Restarting to reach the seat position stored in
the key memory is performed by pressing the
unlock button on the remote control key. The
driver's door must then be open.
WARNING
Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do
not play with the controls. Check that there
are no objects in front of, behind or under the
seat during adjustment. Make sure that none
of the passengers in the rear seat is in danger
of becoming trapped.
Heated seats
For heated seats, see Heated front seats*
(p. 131) and Heated rear seat* (p. 132).
Related information
•
Seats, front (p. 84)
•
Seats, rear (p. 87)
9
Only if the car is equipped with power seat with memory and power retractable door mirrors. The setting for lumbar support is not stored.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
87
Seats, rear
The rear seat backrest and the outer seat head
restraints can be folded. The centre seat head
restraint can be adjusted to suit the height of the
passenger.
Head restraint, centre seat, rear
Adjust the head restraint according to passenger
height so that the whole of the back of the head
is covered if possible. Slide it up as required.
To lower the head restraint again, the button
(located in the centre between the backrest and
head restraint, see illustration) must be pressed
in while the head restraint is pressed down care-
fully.
WARNING
The centre seat head restraint must be in its
lowest position when the centre seat is not
used. When the centre seat is used, the head
restraint must be correctly adjusted to the
height of the passenger so that it covers the
whole of the back of the head if possible.
Manual lowering of the outer head
restraints, rear seat
Pull the locking handle closest to the head
restraint to fold the head restraint forward.
The head restraint is moved back manually until a
"click" can be heard.
WARNING
The head restraint must be in locked position
after being folded up.
Lowering the rear seat backrest
IMPORTANT
There must be no objects on the rear seat
when the backrest is to be folded down. The
seat belts must not be connected either. Oth-
erwise there is a risk of damaging the rear
seat upholstery.
The triple-section backrest can be folded in dif-
ferent ways.
NOTE
The front seats may need to be pushed for-
wards, and/or the backrests adjusted
upwards, in order that the rear backrests can
be fully folded forward.
•
The left-hand section can be folded sepa-
rately.
•
The centre section can be folded separately.
•
The right-hand section can only be folded
together with the centre section.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
88
If the centre backrest is being lowered -
release and adjust the head restraint for the
centre backrest, see the earlier section
"Head restraint, centre seat, rear".
The outer head restraints are lowered auto-
matically when the outer backrests are low-
ered. Pull up the backrest's locking handle
while folding the backrest forward at the
same time. A red indicator on the lock catch
shows that the backrest is no longer
locked in place.
NOTE
When the backrests have been lowered, the
head restraints may need to be moved for-
ward slightly so as not to make contact with
the seat cushion.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
NOTE
When the backrest has been raised, the red
indicator should no longer be showing. If it is
still showing then the backrest is not locked
in place.
WARNING
Check that the backrests and head restraints
in the rear seat are locked properly after
being folded up.
The head restraints of the outer seats must
always be raised when there are passengers
on any of the rear seats.
Electrical lowering of the rear seat's
outer head restraints*
1. The remote control key must be in key posi-
tion II.
2. Press the button to lower the rear outer head
restraints to improve rearward visibility.
WARNING
Do not lower the outer head restraints if there
are passengers in any of the outer rear seats.
Move the head restraint back manually until a
click is heard.
WARNING
The head restraint must be in locked position
after being folded up.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
89
Related information
•
Seats, front (p. 84)
•
Seats, front - electrically operated* (p. 85)
Steering wheel
The steering wheel can be adjusted in different
positions and has controls for horn and cruise
control, as well as menu, audio and phone con-
trol.
Adjusting
Adjusting the steering wheel.
Lever - releasing the steering wheel
Possible steering wheel positions
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both
height and depth:
1. The lever is pulled towards the driver to
release the steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that
suits you.
3. Push back the lever to fix the steering wheel
in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering
wheel lightly at the same time as you push
the lever back.
WARNING
Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before
driving away.
With speed related power steering* the level of
steering force can be adjusted, see Adjustable
steering force* (p. 190).
Keypads*
Keypads in the steering wheel.
Cruise control* (p. 198)* and Adaptive cruise
control - ACC* (p. 204)*.
Audio and phone control, see supplement,
Sensus Infotainment.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
90
Horn
Horn.
Press the centre of the steering wheel to signal.
Related information
•
Heating* of the steering wheel (p. 90)
Heating* of the steering wheel
The steering wheel can be heated with electric
heating.
Function
Button position may vary depending on equipment
selected and market.
Repeatedly press the button to switch
between the following functions:
Function Indicator
Switched off Button lamp extinguished
Heating Button lamp illuminated
Automatic steering wheel heating
With activated automatic start of steering wheel
heating, the heating of the steering wheel starts
when the engine is started. Automatic start takes
place when the car is cold and the ambient tem-
perature is below approx. 10 °C. Activate/deacti-
vate the function in the menu system MY CAR
(p. 115).
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
91
Light switches
The headlamp control activates and adjusts the
external lighting. It is also used to adjust display
and instrument lighting and ambience lights
(p. 101).
Overview, light switches.
Thumbwheel for adjusting display and instru-
ment lighting as well as ambience lights*
Button for rear fog lamp
Knob for lighting while driving and parking
Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling
A car with active xenon headlamps* has auto-
matic headlamp levelling and therefore does not
have the thumbwheel for headlamp levelling.
Knob positions
NOTE
The same lamps are used for daytime running
lights and front position lamps. The bright-
ness is higher when the lamps are used as
daytime running lights.
Position Specification
Daytime running lights
A
when the
car's electrical system is in key
position II or the engine is running.
Main beam flash can be used.
Daytime running lights, position
lamps rear and side marker lamps
when the car's electrical system is
in key position II or the engine is
running.
Position lamps/side marker lamps
when the car is parked
B
.
Main beam flash can be used.
Position Specification
Daytime running lights, position
lamps rear and side marker lamps
in daylight when the car's electrical
system is in key position II or the
engine is running.
Dipped beam and position lamps/
side marker lamps in weak daylight
or darkness, or when the rear fog
lamp or windscreen wipers with
continuous wiping are activated.
The tunnel detection (p. 94)*
function is activated.
The Active main beam (p. 95)*
function can be used.
Main beam can be activated when
dipped beam is switched on.
Main beam flash can be used.
Dipped beam and position lamps/
side marker lamps.
Main beam can be activated.
Main beam flash can be used.
A
Fitted in or under the front bumper.
B
Also at idle when the engine is running, provided that the knob
is moved to this position from another position.
Volvo recommends that mode is used
when the car is driven.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
92
WARNING
The car's audio system is not able to deter-
mine when daylight is too weak or sufficiently
strong, e.g. in fog and rain, in all situations.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring
that the car is driven with a beam pattern suit-
able for the traffic situation and in accordance
with applicable traffic regulations.
Display and instrument lighting
Different display and instrument lighting is
switched on depending on key position; see Key
positions - functions at different levels (p. 83).
The display lighting is automatically subdued in
darkness - the sensitivity is set with the thumb-
wheel.
The intensity of the instrument lighting is
adjusted with the thumbwheel.
Headlamp levelling
The load in the car changes the vertical align-
ment of the headlamp beam, which could dazzle
oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting the
height of the beam. Lower the beam if the car is
heavily laden.
1. Leave the engine running, or have the car's
electrical system in key position I.
2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/lower
beam alignment.
Thumbwheel positions for different load cases.
Only driver
Driver and passenger in the front passenger
seat
Occupants in all seats
Occupants in all seats and maximum load in
the cargo area
The driver and maximum load in the cargo
area
Related information
•
Position lamps (p. 92)
•
Daytime running lights (p. 93)
•
Main/dipped beam (p. 94)
Position lamps
Position lamps are switched on using the head-
lamp control's knob.
Knob for headlamp control in the position for position
lamps.
Turn the knob to the position for (number
plate lighting is switched on at the same time).
If the car's electrical system is in key position II or
the engine is running then the daytime running
lights are switched on instead of the front posi-
tion lamps.
When it is dark outside and the tailgate is
opened the rear position lamps illuminate to alert
traffic behind. This takes place irrespective of
what position the knob is in or what key position
the car's electrical system is in.
When driving for more than 30 seconds at max.
10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), or if the speed
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
93
exceeds 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), the daytime
running lights are switched on and
Reset light
switch position is shown in the combined
instrument panel, which prompts you to turn to a
mode other than
.
Related information
•
Light switches (p. 91)
Daytime running lights
With the knob for headlamp control in
position, and the car's electrical system in key
position II or the engine running, the daytime
running lights are activated automatically in day-
light.
Daytime running lights during the day.
DRL
Knob for headlamp control in AUTO position.
With the knob for headlamp control in
position the daytime running lights (Daytime
Running Lights - DRL) are activated automati-
cally when the car is driven in daylight. A light
sensor on the top of the instrument panel
changes from daytime running lights to dipped
beam at twilight or when daylight becomes too
weak. Switching to dipped beam also takes place
when the windscreen wipers or rear fog lamp are
activated.
WARNING
This system help to save energy - it cannot
determine in all situations when daylight is too
weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist and
rain.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring
that the car is driven with the correct beam
pattern for the traffic situation and in accord-
ance with applicable traffic regulations.
Related information
•
Main/dipped beam (p. 94)
•
Light switches (p. 91)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
94
Tunnel detection*
Tunnel detection changes the lighting from day-
time running lights to dipped beam when the car
is driven into a tunnel.
The tunnel detection function is available in cars
with rain sensor*. The sensor detects the
entrance to a tunnel and resets the lighting from
daytime running lights to dipped beam. Approx.
20 seconds after the car has left the tunnel, the
lighting returns to daytime running lights. If the
car is driven into another tunnel within this time
period then dipped beam is kept switched on.
This avoids repeated changes to the car's light-
ing.
Note that the headlamp control's knob must
remain in
position for tunnel detection to
work.
Related information
•
Main/dipped beam (p. 94)
•
Light switches (p. 91)
Main/dipped beam
With the knob for headlamp control in position
and the car's electrical system in key posi-
tion II or the engine running, the dipped beam is
activated automatically in poor light conditions.
Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control.
Position for main beam flash
Position for main beam
Dipped beam
With the knob in position, dipped beam is
activated automatically at twilight or when day-
light becomes too weak. Dipped beam is also
activated automatically if the windscreen wipers
or the rear fog lamps are activated.
With the knob in position
dipped beam is
always switched on when the engine is running
or when key position II is active.
Main beam flash
Move the stalk switch gently towards the steering
wheel to the position for main beam flash. Main
beam comes on until the stalk switch is released.
Main beam
Main beam can be activated when the knob is in
position
10
or
. Activate/deactivate
main beam by moving the stalk switch towards
the steering wheel to the end position and then
releasing. Alternatively, the main beam can be
deactivated by a light press of the stalk switch
toward the steering wheel.
When main beam has been activated the
symbol illuminates in the combined instrument
panel.
Auxiliary lamps*
If the car has auxiliary lamps, the driver can use
the MY CAR menu system to choose whether
they should be deactivated or switched on/off
simultaneously with the main beam
11
, see MY
CAR (p. 115).
10
When dipped beam is switched on.
11
Auxiliary lamps must be connected to the electrical system by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
95
Related information
•
Active Xenon headlamps* (p. 97)
•
Active main beam* (p. 95)
•
Light switches (p. 91)
•
Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern
(p. 98)
•
Tunnel detection* (p. 94)
Active main beam*
Active main beam function detects the headlamp
beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights of
vehicles in front, and switches the lighting from
main beam to dipped beam. The lighting returns
to main beam when the incoming light has stop-
ped.
Active main beam - AHB
Active main beam (Active High Beam - AHB) is a
function which uses a camera sensor at the top
edge of the windscreen to detect the headlamp
beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights of
vehicles in front, and then switches from main
beam to dipped beam. The function can also take
streetlights into account.
Main beam is reactivated when the camera sen-
sor no longer sees any oncoming vehicles or
vehicles ahead.
Car with halogen headlamps
The lighting returns to main beam about a sec-
ond after the camera sensor no longer detects
the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the
rear lights from vehicles in front.
Car with active Xenon headlamps
If the active main beam has the on/off functional-
ity
12
then the lighting returns to main beam about
a second after the camera sensor no longer
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.
If the active main beam has adaptive functional-
ity
12
then, unlike what happens during conven-
tional dimming, the light beam continues to illu-
minate with main beam on both sides of oncom-
ing traffic or vehicles ahead - only the part of the
light beam that points directly to the vehicle is
dimmed.
Adaptive functionality: Dipped beam directly toward
oncoming vehicles, but continued main beam on both
sides of the vehicle.
The lighting returns to full main beam about a
second after the camera sensor no longer
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.
12
Depending on the car's equipment level.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
96
Activating/deactivating
AHB can be activated when the headlamp con-
trol's knob is in position
(provided that the
function has not been deactivated in the menu
system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115)).
Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control in AUTO
position.
The function can start while driving in the dark
when the car's speed is approx. 20 km/h
(12 mph) or higher.
Activate/deactivate AHB by moving the left-hand
stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the
end position and then releasing. Deactivation
when main beam is on means that the lights are
reset directly to dipped beam.
When AHB is activated the
symbol turns
white in the instrument's information display.
When main beam is activated, the symbol turns
blue. This also applies for active Xenon head-
lamps if the main beam is partially dimmed, i.e. as
soon as the light beam shines with slightly more
than dipped beam.
Manual operation
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the
camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist and
dirt.
Do not stick or attach anything to the wind-
screen in front of the camera sensor as this
may reduce effectiveness or cause one or
more of the systems dependent on the cam-
era to stop working.
If the message Active main beam Temporary
unavailable Switch manually is shown in the
combined instrument panel's information display
then you have to switch manually between main
and dipped beam. However, the knob for head-
lamp control can still remain in position
.
The same applies if the message
Windscreen
sensors blocked See manual
and the
symbol are shown. The symbol goes out
when these messages are shown.
AHB may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in situa-
tions with dense fog or heavy rain. When AHB
becomes available again, or the windscreen sen-
sors are no longer blocked, the message extin-
guishes and the
symbol illuminates.
WARNING
AHB is an aid for using the optimum beam
pattern when conditions are favourable.
The driver always bears responsibility for man-
ually switching between main and dipped
beam when traffic situations or weather con-
ditions so require.
IMPORTANT
Examples of when manual switching between
main and dipped beam may be required:
•
In heavy rain or dense fog
•
In freezing rain
•
In snow flurries or slush
•
In moonlight
•
When driving in poorly lit built-up areas
•
When the traffic ahead has weak lighting
•
If there are pedestrians on or beside the
road
•
If there are highly reflective objects such
as signs in the vicinity of the road
•
When the lighting from oncoming traffic
is obscured by e.g. a crash barrier
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
97
•
When there is traffic on connecting roads
•
On the brow of a hill or in a hollow
•
In sharp bends.
For more information on the limitations of the
camera sensor, see Collision warning system* -
camera sensor limitations (p. 236).
Related information
•
Main/dipped beam (p. 94)
•
Light switches (p. 91)
Active Xenon headlamps*
Active xenon headlamps/active bending lights
are designed to provide maximum illumination in
bends and junctions and so provide increased
safety.
Active xenon headlamps/active
bending lights - ABL
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and
activated (right) respectively.
If the car is equipped with active xenon head-
lamps/active bending lights (Active Bending
Lights, ABL) the light from the headlamps follows
the steering wheel movement in order to provide
maximum lighting in bends and junctions and so
provide increased safety.
The function is activated automatically when the
car is started (provided that it has not been deac-
tivated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY
CAR (p. 115)). In the event of a fault in the func-
tion the
symbol illuminates in the com-
bined instrument panel at the same time as the
information display shows an explanatory text and
a further illuminated symbol.
Symbol Message Specification
Headlamp
system
malfunction
Service
required
The system is dis-
engaged. Visit a
workshop if the
message remains.
Volvo recommends
that you contact an
authorised Volvo
workshop.
The function is only active in twilight or darkness
and only when the car is moving.
The function
13
can be deactivated/activated in
the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR
(p. 115).
13
Activated on delivery from the factory.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
98
Cornering lights*
Active xenon headlamps/active bending lights
with Automatic main beam function with adaptive
functionality are equipped with cornering lights.
The cornering lights temporarily illuminate the
area diagonally in front of the car in the direction
the steering wheel is turned on a sharp bend, or
in the direction shown by the direction indicators.
The function is activated when main beam or
dipped beam is used and the car's speed is lower
than approx. 30 km/h (20 mph).
In addition, both cornering lights are switched on
as a supplement to the reversing lamp during
reversing.
Related information
•
Main/dipped beam (p. 94)
•
Active main beam* (p. 95)
•
Light switches (p. 91)
Headlamps - adjusting headlamp
pattern
If the car is equipped with active Xenon head-
lamps and has the Active main beam function
then the headlamp pattern must be reset when
changing from right to left-hand traffic, and vice
versa.
Active Xenon headlamps*
No adjustment of the headlamp pattern is neces-
sary for cars without the Active main beam* func-
tion. The headlamp pattern is designed in such a
way that oncoming traffic is not dazzled.
Adjustment of the headlamp pattern is required
for cars with Active main beam. The car must be
stationary with the engine running when the
headlamp pattern is shifted between right and
left-hand traffic.
The headlamp pattern is changed in the menu
system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115).
Halogen headlamps
No adjustment of the headlamp pattern is neces-
sary. The headlamp pattern is designed in such a
way that oncoming traffic is not dazzled.
Rear fog lamp
When visibility is reduced by fog the rear fog
lamp can be used so that other road users can
detect the vehicle in front at an early stage.
Button for rear fog lamp.
The rear fog lamp can only be switched on when
key position II is active or the engine is running
and the headlamp control's knob is in position
or .
Press the button for On/Off. The indicator sym-
bol
in the combined instrument panel and
the light in the button both illuminate when the
rear fog lamp is switched on.
The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically
when the START/STOP ENGINE button is
depressed or when the headlamp control's knob
is turned to position
or .
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
99
NOTE
Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps vary
from country to country.
Related information
•
Light switches (p. 91)
Brake lights
The brake light automatically comes on during
braking.
The brake light is switched on when the brake
pedal is depressed. In addition, it is switched on
when one of driving support systems Adaptive
cruise control (p. 204), City Safety (p. 222) or
Collision warning system (p. 229) brakes the car.
Related information
•
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 284)
Hazard warning flashers
The hazard warning flashers warn other road
users by means of all of the car's direction indi-
cator lamps flashing simultaneously when this
function is activated.
Button for hazard warning flashers.
Press the button to activate the hazard warning
flashers. Both direction indicator symbols in the
combined instrument panel flash when the haz-
ard warning flashers are used.
The hazard warning flashers are activated auto-
matically when the car has been braked so sud-
denly that the emergency brake lights have been
activated and speed is below approx. 10 km/h
(6 mph). The hazard warning flashers remain
active when the car has stopped and are deacti-
vated automatically when you start driving again;
they can also be deactivated by pressing the but-
ton.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
100
Related information
•
direction indicators (p. 100)
•
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 284)
direction indicators
The car's direction indicators are operated with
the left-hand stalk switch. The direction indicator
lamps flash three times or continuously, depend-
ing on how far up or down the stalk switch is
moved.
Direction indicators.
Short flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the first
position and release. The direction indicator
lamps flash three times. The function can be
activated/deactivated in the menu system
MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115).
Continuous flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to its end
position.
The stalk switch remains in its position and is
moved back manually, or automatically by the
steering wheel movement.
Direction indicator symbols
For direction indicator symbols, see Combined
instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols
(p. 74).
Related information
•
Hazard warning flashers (p. 99)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
101
Interior lighting
The passenger compartment lighting is acti-
vated/deactivated with the buttons in the con-
trols above the front seats and the rear seat.
G021149
Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and
passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp, left-hand side
Reading lamp, right-hand side
Interior lighting
All lighting in the passenger compartment can be
switched on and off manually within 30 minutes
from when:
•
the engine has been switched off and the
car's electrical system is in key position 0
•
the car has been unlocked but the engine
has not been started.
Front roof lighting
The front reading lamps are switched on or off by
pressing the relevant button in the roof console.
Rear roof lighting
G021150
Rear roof lighting.
The lamps are switched on or off by pressing
each respective button.
Courtesy lighting
Courtesy lighting (and passenger compartment
lighting) is switched on and off respectively when
a side door is opened or closed.
Glovebox lighting
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respec-
tively when the lid is opened or closed.
Vanity mirror lighting
The lighting for the vanity mirror (p. 153) is
switched on and off respectively when the cover
is opened or closed.
Lighting in the cargo area
The lighting in the cargo area is switched on and
off respectively when the tailgate is opened or
closed.
Automatic lighting
The switch for passenger compartment lighting
has three positions for the lighting in the passen-
ger compartment:
•
Off – right-hand side pressed in, automatic
lighting deactivated.
•
Neutral position – automatic lighting acti-
vated.
•
On – left-hand side pressed in, passenger
compartment lighting switched on.
Neutral position
When the button is in neutral position the pas-
senger compartment lighting is switched on and
off automatically in accordance with the following.
The passenger compartment lighting is switched
on and remains on for 30 seconds if:
•
the car is unlocked with the remote control
key or key blade, see Remote control key -
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
102
functions (p. 166) or Detachable key blade -
unlocking doors (p. 170)
•
the engine has been switched off and the
car's electrical system is in key position 0.
Passenger compartment lighting is switched off
when:
•
the engine is started
•
the car is locked.
The passenger compartment lighting comes on
and remains on for two minutes if one of the
doors is open.
If any lighting is switched on manually and the
car is locked then it will be switched off automati-
cally after two minutes.
Ambience lights*
When the normal passenger compartment light-
ing is switched off and the engine is running, a
number of LEDs illuminate, including one in the
ceiling lighting, in order to provide a low-light and
enhance the mood while driving. The light also
makes it easier to see objects in storage com-
partments etc. during the darker hours of the day.
This lighting goes out for a little while after the
normal passenger compartment lighting when
the car is locked. The brightness is controlled
using the thumbwheel on the headlamp control
(p. 91).
Home safe lighting
Home safe lighting consists of dipped beam,
position lamps, lamps in the door mirrors, num-
ber plate lighting.
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept
switched on to work as home safe lighting after
the car has been locked.
1. Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch.
2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward the
steering wheel to the end position and
release it. The function can be activated in
the same way as with main beam flash; see
Main/dipped beam (p. 94).
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
When the function is activated, dipped beam,
position lamps, lamps in the door mirrors and
number plate lighting are switched on.
The length of time for which the home safe light-
ing should be kept on can be set in the menu
system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115).
Related information
•
Approach lighting (p. 102)
Approach lighting
Approach lighting consists of position lamps,
lamps in the door mirrors, number plate lighting,
interior roof lighting as well as courtesy lighting.
Approach lighting is switched on with the remote
control key, see Remote control key - functions
(p. 166), and is used to switch on the car's light-
ing at a distance.
When the function is activated with the remote
control key, position lamps, lamps in the door mir-
rors, number plate lighting, interior roof lamps
and courtesy lighting are switched on.
The length of time for which the approach light-
ing should be kept on can be set in the menu
system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115).
Related information
•
Home safe lighting (p. 102)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
103
Wipers and washers
Wipers and washers clean the windscreen and
rear window. The headlamps are cleaned with
high-pressure washing.
Windscreen wipers
14
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers.
Rain sensor, On/Off
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
Windscreen wipers off
Move the stalk switch to position 0 to
switch off the windscreen wipers.
Single sweep
Raise the stalk switch and release to
make one sweep.
Intermittent wiping
Set the number of sweeps per time
unit with the thumbwheel when inter-
mittent wiping is selected.
Continuous wiping
The wipers sweep at normal speed.
The wipers sweep at high speed.
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers - ensure that the
wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any
snow or ice on the windscreen (and rear win-
dow) is scraped away.
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers during winter
ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in,
and that any snow or ice on the windscreen is
scraped away.
IMPORTANT
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers
are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen
must be wet when the windscreen wipers are
operating.
Service position wiper blade
For cleaning the windscreen/wiper blades and
replacement of wiper blades, see Car wash
(p. 399) and Wiper blades (p. 377).
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor automatically starts the wind-
screen wipers based on how much water it
detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of the
rain sensor can be adjusted using the thumb-
wheel.
When the rain sensor is activated a lamp in the
button is illuminated and the rain sensor symbol
is shown in the combined instrument
panel.
Activating and setting the sensitivity
When activating the rain sensor, the car must be
running or the remote control key in position I or
II while the windscreen wiper stalk switch must
be in position 0 or in the position for a single
sweep.
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain sen-
sor button
. The windscreen wipers make
one sweep.
Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to make
an extra sweep.
Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitiv-
ity and downward for lower sensitivity. (An extra
14
For replacing the wiper blades and service position wiper blades, see Wiper blades (p. 377). For filling washer fluid, see Washer fluid - filling (p. 379).
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
104
sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned
upward.)
Deactivate
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the rain
sensor button
or move the stalk switch
down to another wiper program.
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated when
the remote control key is removed from the igni-
tion switch or five minutes after the engine has
been switched off.
IMPORTANT
The windscreen wipers could start and be
damaged in an automatic car wash. Switch off
the rain sensor while the car is in motion or
when the remote control key is in position I or
II. The symbol in the combined instrument
panel and the lamp in the button go out.
Washing the headlamps and windows
Washing function.
Washing the windscreen
Move the stalk switch toward the steering wheel
to start the windscreen and headlamp washers.
The windscreen wipers will make several more
sweeps and the headlamps are washed once the
stalk switch has been released.
Heated washer nozzles*
The washer nozzles are heated automatically in
cold weather to prevent the washer fluid freezing
solid.
High-pressure headlamp washing*
High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a
large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the
headlamps are washed automatically at every
fifth windscreen wash cycle.
Reduced washing
If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains in
the reservoir and the message that you should fill
the washer fluid is shown in the combined instru-
ment panel, then the supply of washer fluid to the
headlamps is switched off. This is in order to pri-
oritise cleaning the windscreen and the visibility
through it.
Wiping and washing the rear window
Rear window wiper – intermittent wiping
Rear window wiper – continuous speed
Press the stalk switch forward (see the arrow in
the illustration above) to initiate rear window
washing and wiping.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
105
NOTE
The rear window wiper is equipped with over-
heating protection which means that the
motor is switched off if it overheats. The rear
window wiper works again after a cooling-
down period.
Wiper – reversing
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen wip-
ers are on initiates intermittent rear window wip-
ing
15
. The function stops when reverse gear is
disengaged.
If the rear window wiper is already on at continu-
ous speed, no change is made.
NOTE
On cars with rain sensors, the rear wiper is
activated during reversing if the sensor is
activated and it is raining.
Related information
•
Washer fluid - filling (p. 379)
Power windows
All power windows can be operated using the
control panel for the driver's door - the control
panels for the other doors operate their respec-
tive power window.
Driver's door control panel.
Electric child safety locks that prevent chil-
dren from being able to open the rear doors
from inside* and open/close the rear win-
dows, see Child safety locks - electrical acti-
vation* (p. 184).
Controls for rear windows
Controls for front windows
WARNING
Check that children or other passengers are
not trapped when the windows are closed
from the driver's door.
WARNING
Check that no children or other passengers
are trapped if/when the windows are closed
using the remote control key.
WARNING
If there are children in the car - remember to
always switch off the power supply to the
power windows by selecting key position 0
and then take the remote control key with you
when leaving the car. For information on key
positions - see Key positions - functions at
different levels (p. 83).
15
This function (intermittent wiping when reversing) can be deactivated. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends an authorised Volvo workshop.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
106
Operating
Operating the power windows.
Operating without auto
Operating with auto
All power windows can be operated using the
control panel for the driver's door - the control
panels for the other doors can only operate their
respective power window. Only one control panel
can be operated at a time.
In order for the power windows to be used, the
key position must be at least I - see Key posi-
tions - functions at different levels (p. 83). The
power windows can be operated for a few
minutes after the engine has been switched off
and after the remote control key has been
removed - although not after a door has been
opened.
Closing of the windows is stopped and the win-
dow is opened if anything prevents its movement.
It is possible to override the pinch protection
when closing has been interrupted, e.g. if there is
ice forming. After two successive closing inter-
ruptions the pinch protection will be forced and
the automatic function deactivated for a short
while, now it is possible to close by continually
holding the button pulled up.
NOTE
One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise
when the rear windows are open is to also
open the front windows slightly.
Operating without auto
Move one of the controls up/down gently. The
power windows move up/down as long as the
control is held in position.
Operating with auto
Move one of the controls up/down to the end
position and release it. The window runs auto-
matically to its end position.
Operating with the remote control key or
central locking button
To operate the power windows from the outside
with the remote control key, or from inside with
the central locking button, see Remote control
key - functions (p. 166) or Locking/unlocking -
from the inside (p. 179).
Resetting
If the battery is disconnected then the function
for automatic opening must be reset so that it
can work correctly.
1. Gently raise the front section of the button to
raise the window to its end position and hold
it there for one second.
2. Release the button briefly.
3. Raise the front section of the button again
for one second.
WARNING
A reset must take place for pinch protection
to work.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
107
Door mirrors
The door mirror positions are adjusted with the
joystick in the driver's door controls.
Controls for door mirrors.
Adjusting
1.
Press the L button for the left-hand door mir-
ror or the R button for the right-hand door
mirror. The light in the button illuminates.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
centre.
3.
Press the L or R button again. The light
should no longer be illuminated.
WARNING
Both mirrors are bent to provide optimal
vision. Objects may appear further away than
they actually are.
Storing settings
16
The settings for the door mirrors and the posi-
tions of the driver's seat can be stored for each
remote control key in the car key memory*, see
Remote control key - personalisation* (p. 163).
Angling the door mirror when parking
16
The door mirror can be angled down for the
driver to view the side of the road when parking
for example.
–
Engage reverse gear and press the L or R
button.
When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror
automatically returns to its original position after
approx. 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing the
button labelled L or R respectively.
Automatic angling of the door mirror
when parking
16
When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror is
automatically angled down so that the driver can
see the side of the road when parking for exam-
ple. When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror
automatically returns to its original position after
a short time.
The function can be activated/deactivated in the
menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115).
Automatic retraction when locking*
When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote
control key the door mirrors are automatically
retracted/extended.
The function can be activated/deactivated in the
menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115).
Resetting to neutral
Mirrors that have been moved out of position by
an external force must be reset electrically to the
neutral position for electric retracting/extending
to work correctly:
1.
Retract the mirrors with the L and R buttons.
2.
Fold them out again with the L and R but-
tons.
3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
Automatic dimming*
For the door mirrors to be fitted with this function
requires that the interior rearview mirror also has
automatic dimming, see Rearview mirror - interior
(p. 108).
16
Only in combination with power seat with memory, see Seats, front - electrically operated* (p. 85).
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
108
Retractable power door mirrors*
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving
in narrow spaces:
1.
Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously
(key position must be at least I).
2. Release them after approximately 1 second.
The mirrors automatically stop in the fully
retracted position.
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and
R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors automati-
cally stop in the fully extended position.
Home safe and approach lighting
The lamp on the door mirrors illuminates when
approach lighting (p. 102) or home safe lighting
(p. 102) is selected.
Related information
•
Rearview mirror - interior (p. 108)
•
Windows and rearview and door mirrors -
heating (p. 108)
Windows and rearview and door
mirrors - heating
The defroster is used to quickly remove misting
and ice from the rear window and door mirrors.
Rear window and door mirror defrosters
Heating, rear window and door mirrors
The function is used to remove ice and misting
from the rear window and door mirrors.
One press of the button starts the heating. The
light in the button indicates that the function is
active. Switch off the heating as soon as the ice/
misting is cleared in order not to load the battery
unnecessarily. However, the function is switched
off automatically after a certain time.
The door mirrors and rear window are demisted/
defrosted automatically if the car is started in an
outside temperature lower than +7 °C. Automatic
defrosting can be selected in the menu system
MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115).
Rearview mirror - interior
The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed with
a control in the mirror's lower edge. Alternatively,
the rearview mirror dims automatically.
Control for dimming
Manual dimming
Bright light from behind could be reflected in the
rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use dim-
ming with the dimming control when lights from
behind are distracting:
1. Use dimming by moving the control in
towards the passenger compartment.
2. Return to normal position by moving the con-
trol towards the windscreen.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
109
Automatic dimming*
Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed
by the rearview mirror. The control for manual
dimming is not available on mirrors with auto-
matic dimming.
The rearview mirror contains two sensors - one
forward facing and one rearward facing - that
work together to identify and eliminate dazzling
light. The forward facing sensor detects ambient
light, while the rearward facing sensor detects
the light from vehicle headlights behind.
NOTE
If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking
permits, transponders, sun visors or objects in
the seats or in the cargo area in such a way
that light is prevented from reaching the sen-
sors, then the dimming function of the interior
rearview and door mirrors is reduced.
Only rearview mirror with automatic dimming can
be equipped with compass (p. 109).
Related information
•
Door mirrors (p. 107)
Compass*
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mir-
ror contains a display that shows the compass
direction in which the front of the car is pointing.
Operation
Rearview mirror with compass.
Eight different directions are shown with English
abbreviations:
N (north), NE (north east), E (east),
SE (south east), S (south), SW (south west), W
(west) and NW (north west).
The compass is activated automatically when the
car is started or when key position II is active, see
Key positions - functions at different levels
(p. 83). To deactivate/activate the compass -
press in the button on the underside of the mirror
using a paper clip for example.
Calibration
The compass may need calibrating to show the
correct compass direction.
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The
compass should be calibrated if the car is moved
across several magnetic zones.
Proceed as follows to perform calibration:
1. Stop the car in a large open area free from
steel structures and high-voltage power lines.
2. Start the car and switch off all electrical
equipment (air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and
ensure that all doors are closed.
NOTE
Calibration may fail or not start at all if electri-
cal equipment is not switched off.
3. Hold the button on the underside of the rear-
view mirror depressed (use a paper clip or
similar) for approx. 3 seconds. The number of
the current magnetic zone is shown.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
110
Magnetic zones.
4. Press the button repeatedly until the
required magnetic zone (
1–15) is shown.
See the map of magnetic zones for the com-
pass.
5. Wait until the display returns to showing the
character C, or hold the button on the under-
side of the rearview mirror depressed for
approx. 6 seconds until the character C is
shown.
6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more
than 10 km/h (6 mph) until a compass direc-
tion is shown in the display, indicating that
calibration is complete. Then drive a further
2 circles to fine-tune calibration.
7.
Cars with heated windscreen*: If the
C
character is shown in the display when the
heated windscreen is activated, perform a
calibration as described in point 6 above with
the heated windscreen activated; see
Demisting and defrosting the windscreen
(p. 134).
8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
Sunroof*
The sunroof is operated with the control in the
roof.
The sunroof's inner sunscreen is closed man-
ually.
The sunroof has a wind deflector.
The sunroof controls are located in the roof
panel. The sunroof can be opened vertically at
the rear edge and horizontally. Key position I or II
is required for the sunroof to be opened.
Horizontal opening
G017823
Horizontal opening, backward/forward.
Opening, automatic
Opening, manual
Closing, manual
Closing, automatic
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
111
Opening
To open the sunroof to comfort position
17
, press
the control back to the position for automatic
opening and release. To fully open the sunroof,
press the control back to the position for auto-
matic opening again and release.
Open manually by pressing the control back-
wards to the point of resistance for manual open-
ing. The sunroof moves to comfort position
17
while the control is being pressed backwards. To
fully open the sunroof, press the control back-
wards again.
Closing
Close manually by pushing the control forwards
to the point of resistance for manual closing. The
sunroof moves to the closed position while the
control is being pressed forwards.
WARNING
Risk of crushing when the sunroof is closed.
The sunroof's pinch-protection function only
operates during automatic closing, not man-
ual.
Close automatically by pressing the control to the
position for automatic closing and then release it.
The power supply to the sunroof is switched off
by selecting key position 0 and removing the
remote control key from the ignition switch.
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
Remember to always switch off the power
supply to the sunroof by selecting key posi-
tion 0 and then take the remote control key
with you when leaving the car. For information
on key positions - see Key positions - func-
tions at different levels (p. 83).
Vertical opening
G028900
Vertical opening, raised at the rear edge.
Open by pressing the rear edge of the con-
trol upward.
Close by pulling the rear edge of the control
down.
Closing using the remote control key or
central locking button
G021345
Remote control key
–
Give one long press on the remote control
key's lock button
until the sunroof and
all the windows are closed and the doors and
the tailgate are locked.
To interrupt closing, press the remote control
key's lock button again.
17
Comfort position is an open position for the sunroof, where wind noise and resonance noise are at a comfortably low level while driving.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
112
Central locking button
The central locking button in the driver's door or
passenger door* can be used to close the sun-
roof.
–
Give one long press on the central locking
button
until the sunroof and all the win-
dows are closed and the doors and the tail-
gate are locked.
To interrupt closing, press the central locking
button again.
WARNING
If the sunroof is closed with the remote con-
trol key or the central locking button, check
that no one risks being trapped.
Sunscreen
The sunroof features a manual, sliding interior
sunscreen. The sunscreen slides back automati-
cally when the sunroof is opened. Grip the handle
and slide the sunscreen forward to close it.
Pinch protection
The sunroof has a pinch protection function
which is triggered if it is blocked by an object
during automatic closing. If blocked, the sunroof
will stop and automatically open to the previous
position.
Wind deflector
The sunroof has a wind deflector that is folded
up when the sunroof is in the open position.
Related information
•
Remote control key - functions (p. 166)
•
Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 179)
Menu navigation - combined
instrument panel
The left-hand stalk controls the menus (p. 113)
shown on the information display in the com-
bined instrument panel (p. 68). Which menus
are shown depends on the key position (p. 83).
Display and controls for menu navigation.
OK – access to message list and message
confirmation.
Thumbwheel – browse between menu
options.
RESET – reset the active function. Used in
certain cases to select/activate a function,
see the explanation under each respective
function.
If there is a message (p. 113) then it must be
acknowledged with OK in order that the menus
shall be shown.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
113
Related information
•
Messages - handling (p. 114)
Menu overview - combined
instrument panel
Which menus are shown in the combined instru-
ment panel's information display depends on the
key position (p. 83).
Some of the following menu options require the
function and hardware to be installed in the car.
Settings*
Themes
Contrast mode/Colour mode
Service status
Messages
18
Oil level
19
Preconditioning
Trip computer reset
Related information
•
Digital combined instrument panel - overview
(p. 69)
•
Menu navigation - combined instrument
panel (p. 112)
Messages
When a warning, information or indicator symbol
illuminates, a corresponding message appears
on the information display.
Message Specification
Stop safely
A
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of dam-
age - consult a workshop
B
.
Stop engine
A
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of dam-
age - consult a workshop
B
.
Service
urgent
A
Contact a workshop
B
to
check the car immediately.
Service
required
A
Contact a workshop
B
to
check the car as soon as
possible.
See manual
A
Read the owner's manual.
Book time for
maintenance
Time to book regular service
- contact a workshop
B
.
18
The number of messages is indicated in brackets.
19
Certain engines.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
114
Message Specification
Time for reg-
ular mainte-
nance
Time for regular service -
contact a workshop
B
. The
timing is determined by the
number of kilometres driven,
number of months since the
last service, engine running
time and oil grade.
Maintenance
overdue
If the service intervals are
not followed then the war-
ranty does not cover any
damaged parts - contact a
workshop
B
.
Transmission
Oil change
needed
Contact a workshop
B
to
check the car as soon as
possible.
Transmission
Reduced per-
formance
The gearbox cannot handle
full capacity. Drive carefully
until the message clears
C
.
If shown repeatedly - con-
tact a workshop
B
.
Transmission
hot Reduce
speed
Drive more smoothly or stop
the car in a safe manner.
Disengage the gear and run
the engine at idling speed
until the message clears
C
.
Message Specification
Transmission
hot Stop
safely Wait for
cooling
Critical fault. Stop the car
immediately in a safe man-
ner and contact a work-
shop
B
.
Temporarily
off
A
A function has been tempo-
rarily switched off and is
reset automatically while
driving or after starting
again.
Low battery
charge Power
save mode
The audio system is
switched off to save energy.
Charge the battery.
A
Part of message, shown together with information on where the
problem has arisen.
B
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
C
For more information regarding the automatic gearbox, see
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic (p. 277).
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and
follow the instructions in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
Related information
•
Messages - handling (p. 114)
•
Menu navigation - combined instrument
panel (p. 112)
Messages - handling
Use the left-hand stalk switch to acknowledge
and browse among messages (p. 113) that are
shown in the information display of the com-
bined instrument panel.
When a warning, information or indicator symbol
illuminates, a corresponding message appears in
the display at the same time. An error message is
stored in a memory list until the fault has been
rectified.
Press OK on the left-hand stalk switch to
acknowledge a message. Scroll through mes-
sages with the thumbwheel (p. 112).
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you are
using the trip computer, the message must be
read (press OK) before the previous activity
can be resumed.
Related information
•
Menu overview - combined instrument panel
(p. 113)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
115
MY CAR
MY CAR is a menu source that handles many of
the car's functions, e.g. City Safety™, locks and
alarm, automatic fan speed, setting the clock,
etc.
Certain functions are standard, others are
optional - the range also varies depending on the
market.
Operation
Navigation in the menus is carried out using but-
tons in the centre console or with the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad*.
Control panel in centre console and steering wheel key-
pad. The figure is schematic - the number of functions
and layout of the buttons both vary, depending on the
equipment selected and the market.
MY CAR - opens the menu system MY CAR.
OK/MENU - press the button in the centre
console or the thumbwheel on the steering
wheel to select/tick in the highlighted menu
option or store the selected function in the
memory.
TUNE - turn the knob in the centre console
or the thumbwheel on the steering wheel to
scroll up/down through the menu options.
EXIT
EXIT functions
Depending on the function the cursor is on when
EXIT is depressed briefly, and on which menu
level, one of the following may occur:
•
phone call is rejected
•
current function is interrupted
•
input characters are deleted
•
most recent selections are undone
•
leads up in the menu system.
A long press on EXIT leads to the normal view
for MY CAR or if you are in the normal view, to
the highest menu level (main source menu).
Menu options and search paths
For a description of the menu options and search
paths in MY CAR, see the Sensus Infotainment
supplement.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
116
Trip computer
The car's trip computer records and calculates
vales such as e.g. distance, fuel consumption
and average speed whilst driving.
The information from the trip computer can be shown in
the combined instrument panel's information display.
Trip meter
The trip computer has two trip meters and one
odometer for the total mileage.
Average
Average fuel consumption is calculated from the
last resetting.
NOTE
There may be a slight deviation if a fuel-driven
heater* has been used.
Average speed
The average speed is calculated for the driving
distance driven since the last reset to zero.
Instantaneous
The information for current fuel consumption is
updated continuously - approximately once per
second. When the car is driven at low speed the
consumption is shown per time unit - at a higher
speed it is shown related to mileage.
Different units (km/miles) can be selected for the
display - see section "Change unit" (p. 116).
Range - distance to empty tank
The trip computer shows the approximate dis-
tance that can be driven with the fuel quantity
remaining in the tank.
No guaranteed range remains when the heading
Distance to empty shows "----".
•
In which case, refuel as soon as possible.
The calculation is based on the average fuel con-
sumption over the last 30 km and the remaining
driveable fuel quantity.
Distance to empty battery
No guaranteed range remains when the display
shows "
---- km to empty battery". The display
shows the approximate distance that can be
driven with the energy quantity remaining in the
hybrid battery.
The calculation is based on the average con-
sumption of normally loaded vehicle, during nor-
mal driving and taking into account whether the
air conditioning (AC) is switched on or off.
NOTE
There may be a slight deviation if the driving
style has been changed.
An economic driving style generally results in a
longer driving distance. For more information on
how energy consumption can be influenced, see
Volvo Car Corporation 's Environmental Philoso-
phy (p. 22).
Mileage for electric operation
In order to achieve the longest possible mileage
for electric operation, the driver of an electric car
also has to think about energy conservation. The
more consumers there are (stereo, electric heat-
ing in windows/mirrors/seats, very cold air from
the climate control system, etc.) that are active -
the shorter the potential mileage.
NOTE
In addition to high current take-off in the pas-
senger compartment, sudden acceleration
and braking, high speed, heavy loads, low out-
side temperature and uphill gradients also
reduce the possible driving distance.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
117
Digital speed display in another unit
20
If the main instrument is graduated in mph, the
equivalent digital speed is shown as km/h.
Change unit
Distance and fuel unit can be changed in the
menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115).
NOTE
In addition to in the trip computer, these units
are also changed in Volvo's navigation sys-
tem*.
Related information
•
Trip computer - digital combined instrument
panel (p. 118)
•
Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 121)
20
Only certain markets.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
118
Trip computer - digital combined
instrument panel
The information from the trip computer can be
shown in the combined instrument panel and
operated with the controls on the left-hand stalk
switch and with the combined instrument panel's
menu.
Checking and settings can be made immediately
after the combined instrument panel is automati-
cally illuminated in connection with unlocking. If
none of the trip computer's controls are actuated
within approx. 30 seconds after the driver's door
has been opened then the instrument extin-
guishes, after which either key position II or
engine starting is required in order to operate the
trip computer.
NOTE
If a warning message appears when the trip
computer is used then the message must first
be acknowledged before the trip computer
can be reactivated.
•
Acknowledge the message by briefly
pressing the indicator stalk OK button.
Controls
Three trip computer options can be displayed simultane-
ously - one in each "window".
OK - opens the combined instrument panel's
menu, confirms messages or menu selec-
tions.
Thumbwheel - browses between menu
options or trip computer options.
RESET - resets the current trip meter or
goes back out of the menu structure.
Trip comp. opt.
Choose which trip computer should be shown:
1. To ensure that no control is in the middle of
a sequence - reset them first with
two presses on RESET.
2. Turn the thumbwheel to browse between the
heading combinations.
3. Stop at the required combination for the con-
stant display of this trip data in the combined
instrument panel.
The trip computer display in the combined instru-
ment panel can be shifted to another option at
any time during the journey. One of the options
means that no trip computer is shown.
Heading combinations Information
Battery status Trip meter T1 + Meter reading Distance to empty battery
•
Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.
Average Trip meter T1 + Meter reading Average speed
•
Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
119
Heading combinations Information
Instantaneous Trip meter T2 + Meter reading Distance to empty tank
•
Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.
Instantaneous Meter reading
kmh<>mph
A
kmh<>mph - see section Reverse digital speed display (p. 116).
No trip computer information. This option extinguishes all three trip computer displays and it also indicates
the beginning/end of the loop.
A
Only certain markets.
Resetting the trip computer
Trip meter
1. Turn the thumbwheel and stop at the head-
ing combination with the trip meter to be
reset.
2.
One long press on RESET resets the value
for the selected heading.
Average speed and average consumption
1.
Press OK to open the combined instrument
panel's menu.
2.
Browse to the
Trip computer reset menu
option with the thumbwheel and confirm with
OK.
3. Choose to reset average consumption, aver-
age speed or to reset both. Confirm the
selection with OK.
4.
Finish by pressing RESET.
Functions in the combined instrument
panel's menu
The combined instrument panel's menu includes
setting options for trip computer. Open the menu
to check/adjust the functions in the table below.
1. To ensure that no control is in the middle of
a sequence - reset them first with
two presses on RESET.
2.
Press OK.
3. Browse through the functions with the
thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK.
4.
Finish by pressing twice on RESET after
completed checking/adjustment.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
120
Functions Information
Trip computer reset
•
Average
•
Average speed
Reset the value of average fuel consumption and average speed.
Note that this function does not reset both trip meters T1 and T2.
Messages
For more information, see Messages - handling (p. 114).
Themes
Select the theme for the appearance of the combined instrument panel (p. 68).
Settings*
Select
Auto On or Off.
For more information, see General information about heaters (p. 146).
Contrast mode/Colour mode
Adjusting the combined instrument panel's brightness and colour intensity.
Preconditioning
•
Direct start
•
- Symbol Timer 1 - leads to the menu for selecting time.
•
- Symbol Timer 2 - leads to the menu for selecting time.
For a description of programming the timer, see Timer - setting (p. 142).
Service status
Shows the number of months and mileage to next service.
Oil level
A
For more information, see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 364).
A
Certain engines.
Related information
•
Trip computer (p. 116)
•
Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 121)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
121
Trip computer - trip statistics*
Trip statistics from the trip computer can be
shown in the centre console's screen and pro-
vide a graphic overview of fuel and electricity
consumption.
Function
–
Open the menu system MY CAR (p. 115)
and select
Trip statistics in order to see the
bar chart.
Trip statistics
21
Fuel and electricity consumption are shown in
separate graphs. Electricity consumption is "net"
consumption, i.e. energy consumed minus regen-
erated energy created during braking.
Each bar symbolises 1 km or 10 km driven dis-
tance, depending on the scale selected - the bar
at the far right shows the value for the current kil-
ometre or 10 km.
Using the TUNE control, the scale for the bars
can be changed between 1 km and 10 km - the
cursor on the far right changes position between
up and down in relation to the scale selected.
Settings
Different settings can be made for trip statistics
in the menu system MY CAR -
Trip statistics.
•
Reset when vehicle has been off for
minimum 4h - highlight the box by select-
ing ENTER and go back out of the menu by
selecting EXIT. With this option selected, all
statistics are deleted automatically after fin-
ishing driving and the car has been stationary
for more than 4 hours. Trip statistics start
again from zero the next time the engine is
started.
•
Start new trip - ENTER is used to delete all
previous statistics, go back out of the menu
by selecting EXIT. If a new driving cycle shall
be started before 4 hours have elapsed then
the current period must first be deleted man-
ually with this option.
See also information on Eco guide (p. 73).
Related information
•
Trip computer (p. 116)
21
The figure is schematic - layout may vary depending on car model or updated software.
CLIMATE CONTROL
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
124
General information on climate
control
The car is equipped with electronic climate con-
trol (p. 130). The climate control system cools
or heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the
passenger compartment.
When the climate control system is activated it is
recommended that the panel's air vents are fully
open in order to obtain the most efficient air con-
ditioning possible.
If there is no heat from the coolant then the elec-
trically-driven heater is used primarily. In colder
weather the car's fuel-driven heater can also be
started.
The engine block heater, fuel-driven heater and
electrically-driven heater are used as heat
sources during driving. The heat source(s) used
depends on the prevailing conditions, e.g. ambi-
ent temperature.
During driving the car automatically starts the
systems needed to maintain comfort inside the
passenger compartment - except in drive mode
(p. 270) PURE, when climate comfort is depriori-
tised, e.g. AC and certain electrically-driven
sources are switched off.
The climate in the car's passenger compartment
can be preconditioned (p. 138) (acclimatised)
before departure, in both hot and cold climates.
NOTE
Air conditioning (AC) (p. 134) can be
switched off, but to ensure the best possible
climate comfort in the passenger compart-
ment, and to prevent the windows from mist-
ing, it should always be switched on.
To bear in mind
•
To ensure that the air conditioning works
optimally, the side windows, and sunroof*
should be closed.
•
Global opening (p. 180) opens/closes all
side windows simultaneously and can be
used for example to quickly air the car during
hot weather.
•
Remove ice and snow from the climate con-
trol system air intake (the grille between the
bonnet and the windscreen).
•
When running at idling speed, precondition-
ing or charging the hybrid battery (p. 308) in
hot weather, condensation from the air con-
ditioning may drip under the car. This is nor-
mal.
•
When the engine requires full power, e.g. for
full acceleration, the air conditioning can be
temporarily switched off. There may then be
a temporary increase in temperature in the
passenger compartment.
•
Remove misting on the insides of the win-
dows primarily by using the defroster func-
tion (p. 134). To reduce the risk of misting,
keep the windows clean and use window
cleaner.
Related information
•
Actual temperature (p. 125)
•
Menu settings - climate control (p. 127)
•
Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 130)
•
Air distribution in the passenger compart-
ment (p. 127)
•
Air quality (p. 125)
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
125
Actual temperature
The temperature you select in the passenger
compartment corresponds to the physical expe-
rience with reference to factors such as ambient
temperature, air speed, humidity and solar radia-
tion etc. in and around the car at the time.
The system includes a sun sensor (p. 125) which
detects on which side the sun is shining into the
passenger compartment. This means that the
temperature can differ between the right and left-
hand air vents despite the controls being set for
the same temperature on both sides.
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 124)
•
Temperature control in the passenger com-
partment (p. 133)
Sensors - climate control
The climate control system has a number of sen-
sors to help control the temperature (p. 125) in
the car.
•
The sun sensor is located on the top side of
the dashboard.
•
The temperature sensor for the passenger
compartment is located below the climate
control panel.
•
The outside temperature sensor is located in
the door mirror.
•
The humidity sensor* is located by the inte-
rior rearview mirror.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with cloth-
ing or other objects.
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 124)
Air quality
The interior in a passenger compartment is
designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even
for people with contact allergies and for asthma
sufferers.
•
Passenger compartment filter (p. 126)
•
Material in the passenger compartment
(p. 127)
•
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)
(p. 126)*
•
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) (p. 126)*
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 124)
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
126
Air quality - passenger
compartment filter
All air entering the car's passenger compartment
is cleaned with a filter.
The filter must be replaced at regular intervals.
Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the rec-
ommended replacement intervals. If the car is
used in a severely contaminated environment, it
may be necessary to replace the filter more often.
NOTE
There are different types of passenger com-
partment filter. Make sure that the correct fil-
ter is fitted.
Related information
•
Air quality (p. 125)
Air quality - Clean Zone Interior
Package (CZIP)*
CZIP comprises a series of modifications that
keep the passenger compartment even clearer
from allergy and asthma-inducing substances.
The following is included:
•
An enhanced fan function that means that
the fan starts when the car is opened with
the remote control key. The fan fills the pas-
senger compartment with fresh air. The func-
tion starts when required and is disengaged
automatically after a time or when one of the
passenger compartment doors is opened.
The amount of time the fan runs is reduced
gradually due to reduced need up until the
car is 4 years old.
•
The air quality system IAQS (p. 126) is a fully
automatic system that cleans the air in the
passenger compartment from contaminants
such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous
oxides and ground-level ozone.
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 124)
•
Air quality (p. 125)
Air quality - IAQS*
The air quality system IAQS separates gases
and particles to reduce the levels of odours and
pollution in the passenger compartment.
If the outside air is contaminated then the air
intake is closed and the air is recirculated.
It is possible to activate/deactivate the function
in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of
the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 115).
NOTE
The air quality sensor must always be enabled
to ensure the best air in the passenger com-
partment.
In a cold climate recirculation is limited so as
to prevent misting.
In the event of misting, the air quality sensor
should be disengaged, and the defroster
functions for the windscreen and side win-
dows, as well as the rear window, should be
used.
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 124)
•
Air quality (p. 125)
•
Air quality - Clean Zone Interior Package
(CZIP)* (p. 126)
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
127
Air quality - material
Tested materials have been developed in order
to minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger
compartment and to contribute to making the
passenger compartment easier to keep clean.
The carpets in both the passenger compartment
and the cargo area are removable and easy to
remove and clean. Use cleaning agents and car
care products recommended by Volvo to clean
the interior (p. 402).
Related information
•
Air quality (p. 125)
Menu settings - climate control
It is possible to activate/deactivate or change
the default settings for six of the climate control
system's functions via the centre console.
•
Fan level during automatic climate control
(p. 133).
•
Recirculation timer (p. 135).
•
Automatic start of rear window defroster
(p. 108).
•
Interior air quality system* (p. 126).
•
Automatic start of seat heating driver
(p. 131).
•
Automatic start of steering wheel heating
(p. 90).
More information is available in the description of
the menu system (p. 115).
The climate control system's functions can be
reset in the menu system MY CAR to the default
settings. For a description of the menu system,
see MY CAR (p. 115).
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 124)
Air distribution in the passenger
compartment
The incoming air is divided between a number of
different vents in the passenger compartment.
Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO mode.
If necessary it can be controlled manually; see
the air distribution table (p. 136).
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
128
Air vents in the dashboard
Open
Closed
Lateral airflow
Vertical airflow
Aim the outer vents at the side windows to
remove misting.
Air vents in the door pillars
Closed
Open
Lateral airflow
Vertical airflow
Aim the vents at the windows to remove misting
in cold weather.
Aim the vents into the passenger compartment to
maintain a comfortable climate in the rear seat in
hot weather.
NOTE
Remember that small children may be sensi-
tive to air flows and draughts.
Air distribution
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - ventilation floor
The figure consists of three buttons. When press-
ing the buttons the corresponding figure is illumi-
nated in the screen (see following figure) and an
arrow in front of each part of the figure shows
the air distribution that is selected. For more
information, see the air distribution table
(p. 136).
CLIMATE CONTROL
130
Electronic climate control - ECC
ECC (Electronic Climate Control) maintains the
temperature selected in the passenger compart-
ment and can be set separately for the driver's
side and passenger side.
The auto function is used to automatically con-
trol temperature, air conditioning, fan speed,
recirculation and air distribution.
Temperature control (p. 133), left-hand side
Electrically heated front seat (p. 131), left
side
Max. defroster (p. 134)
Fan (p. 132)
Air distribution (p. 127) - ventilation floor
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Rear window and door mirror defrosters
(p. 108)
Electrically heated front seat (p. 131), right
side
Temperature control (p. 133), right-hand
side
Recirculation (p. 135)
AUTO - Automatic climate control (p. 133)
AC - Air conditioning on/off (p. 134)
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 124)
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
131
Heated front seats*
The front seat heating has three positions for
increasing the comfort for driver and passenger
when it is cold.
Current heat level is shown in the centre console display
screen.
Press the button repeatedly to
change between the different
levels or to deactivate the func-
tion.
There are three heat levels that give different
heating outputs:
•
Highest heat level - three orange fields illu-
minate in the centre console's screen (see
figure above).
•
Lower heat level - two orange fields illumi-
nate in the screen.
•
Lowest heat level - one orange field illumi-
nates in the screen.
•
Switch off the heat - no field illuminates.
WARNING
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase in
temperature due to a lack of sensation or who
otherwise have problems operating the con-
trols for the heated seats. Otherwise they may
suffer burn injuries.
Automatic start of driver's seat heating
With the automatic start of the driver's seat heat-
ing activated, the driver's seat will have the high-
est heat level when the engine is started.
Automatic start takes place when the car is cold
and the ambient temperature is lower than
approx. +10 °C.
It is possible to activate/deactivate the function
in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of
the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 115).
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 124)
•
Heated rear seat* (p. 132)
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
132
Heated rear seat*
The heating for the rear seat's
1
outer positions
has three positions for increasing the comfort for
passengers when it is cold.
Current heat level is shown in the pushbutton's lamps.
Press the button repeatedly to change between
the different levels or to deactivate the function.
There are three heat levels that give different
heating outputs:
•
Highest heat level - three lamps illuminate.
•
Lower heat level - two lamps illuminate.
•
Lowest heat level - one lamp illuminates.
•
Switch off the heat - no lamp illuminates.
WARNING
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase in
temperature due to a lack of sensation or who
otherwise have problems operating the con-
trols for the heated seats. Otherwise they may
suffer burn injuries.
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 124)
•
Heated front seats* (p. 131)
Fan
The fan should always be activated in order to
avoid misting on the windows.
NOTE
If the fan is fully switched off then the air con-
ditioning is not engaged - which can cause a
risk of misting on the windows.
Fan knob
Turn the knob to increase or
decrease fan speed. If AUTO is
selected, then the fan speed is
regulated automatically
(p. 133) - the fan speed previ-
ously set is disengaged.
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 124)
•
Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 130)
1
Heated rear seat is not included if you choose to add integrated child seat (p. 52).
CLIMATE CONTROL
133
Auto-regulation
The auto function automatically regulates tem-
perature (p. 133), air conditioning (p. 134), fan
speed (p. 132), recirculation (p. 135) and air
distribution (p. 127).
If you select one or more man-
ual functions, the other func-
tions continue to be controlled
automatically. All manual set-
tings are disengaged when
AUTO is pressed. The display
screen shows
AUTO
CLIMATE.
Fan speed in automatic mode can be set in the
menu system MY CAR. For a description of the
menu system, see MY CAR (p. 115).
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 124)
Temperature control in the
passenger compartment
When the car is started, the most recent tem-
perature setting is resumed.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by
selecting a higher or lower temperature than
the actual desired temperature.
Current temperature for each side is shown in the centre
console's display screen.
The temperature can be
adjusted with the knob - sepa-
rately for the driver's side and
the passenger side.
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 124)
•
Actual temperature (p. 125)
•
Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 130)
CLIMATE CONTROL
134
Air conditioning
The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies
incoming air as required.
In drive mode (p. 270) PURE
the AC is preset not to start.
When the lamp in the AC but-
ton illuminates, the air condi-
tioning is controlled by the sys-
tem's automatic function.
When the lamp in the AC button is switched off
the air conditioning is disconnected. Other func-
tions are still controlled automatically. When the
max. defroster function (p. 134) is activated, the
air conditioning is switched on automatically so
that the air is dehumidified at the maximum set-
ting.
Demisting and defrosting the
windscreen
Max. defroster is used to quickly remove misting
and ice from the windscreen and side windows.
Air flowing to the windows. The
light in the defroster button illu-
minates when the function is
active.
The following also takes place when the function
is active in order to provide maximum dehumidifi-
cation in the passenger compartment:
•
the air conditioning is automatically engaged
•
recirculation and the air quality system are
automatically disengaged.
NOTE
The noise level increases as the fan is operat-
ing at max.
When the defroster is switched off the climate
control returns to the previous settings.
In drive mode PURE, activation of the defroster
function may cause the internal combustion
engine to start and change to drive mode
(p. 270) HYBRID.
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 124)
CLIMATE CONTROL
135
Air distribution - recirculation
Select recirculation to shut out bad air, exhaust
gases etc. from the passenger compartment, i.e.
no outside air is taken into the car when this
function is activated.
When recirculation is engaged
the orange lamp in the button
illuminates.
IMPORTANT
If the air in the car is recirculated for too long
then there is a risk of misting on the insides
of the windows.
Timer
With the timer function activated the system will
exit manually activated recirculation mode
according to a time that depends on the outside
temperature. This reduces the risk of ice, misting
and bad air.
It is possible to activate/deactivate the function
in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of
the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 115).
NOTE
When max. defroster is selected, recirculation
is always deactivated.
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 124)
•
Air distribution in the passenger compart-
ment (p. 127)
•
Air distribution - table (p. 136)
CLIMATE CONTROL
136
Air distribution - table
Three buttons are used to select the distribution
(p. 127) of the air.
Air distribution Use
Air to windows. Some air flows from the air vents. The air is not recircula-
ted. Air conditioning is always engaged.
to remove ice and misting quickly.
Air to windscreen, via defroster vent, and side windows. Some air flows
from the air vents.
to avoid misting and icing in a cold and humid climate (to
achieve this the fan level must not be too low).
Airflow to windows and from dashboard air vents. to ensure good comfort in warm, dry weather.
Airflow to the head and chest from dashboard air vents. to ensure efficient cooling in warm weather.
CLIMATE CONTROL
137
Air distribution Use
Air to the floor and windows. Some air flows from the dashboard air
vents.
to ensure comfortable conditions and good demisting in cold
or humid weather.
Air to floor and from dashboard air vents. in sunny weather with cool outside temperatures.
Air to floor. Some air flows to the dashboard air vents and windows. to direct heat or cold to the floor.
Airflow to windows, from dashboard air vents and to the floor. to provide cooling along the floor in hot, dry weather or warm-
ing upwards in cold weather.
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 124)
•
Air distribution - recirculation (p. 135)
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
138
General information about
preconditioning
The climate in the car's passenger compartment
can be preconditioned (acclimatised) before
departure, in both hot and cold climates.
In different cases, the preconditioning uses the
car's fuel-driven and electrically-driven heaters
and the car's AC system:
•
In a cold climate the fuel-driven heater heats
both the engine and the passenger compart-
ment - the electrically-driven heater only
heats the passenger compartment before
departure.
•
In a hot climate the AC system cools the
passenger compartment.
Preconditioning the car reduces wear.
During preconditioning in warm weather, conden-
sation from the air conditioning may drip under
the car. This is normal.
NOTE
During preconditioning of the passenger
compartment, the car works to reach comfort
temperature and not the temperature set in
the climate control system.
NOTE
The compressor can operate and cool the
hybrid battery even when passenger compart-
ment cooling is not selected or required. The
compressor emits noise.
NOTE
The car's doors and windows should be
closed during the preconditioning of the pas-
senger compartment.
Options for preconditioning
Select from the following:
•
parking inside (p. 139)
•
parking outside (p. 139).
Preconditioning can then be activated:
•
directly (p. 140) via the information display,
remote control key* or mobile*
•
with timer (p. 142).
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you activate precon-
ditioning via the timer, and then have the car
connected to the mains power circuit.
Connection to the mains power circuit
The car can be preconditioned both when con-
nected (p. 308) and not connected* to the mains
power circuit.
When the car is plugged into the mains
power circuit
2
•
Heating/cooling can last up to 50 minutes.
•
Seat and steering wheel heating can be acti-
vated during preconditioning.
When the car is not plugged into the mains
power circuit*
•
Heating can last up to 50 minutes.
•
Cooling takes place for 2-3 minutes.
During preconditioning, the electrically-driven
heater and AC system use power from the hybrid
battery. If the car is not connected to the mains
power circuit during preconditioning then the
mileage for electric operation is reduced accord-
ingly.
2
A charging station which is not always active, e.g. because of a timer, may cause loss of function for preconditioning.
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
139
Preconditioning - parking inside
With the
Indoor parking option the electrically-
driven heater is activated during preconditioning
(p. 138).
If you select the Indoor parking set-
ting then the fuel-driven heater is
deactivated during preconditioning.
This heating will have a slightly lower
performance than the Outdoor parking setting
in outside temperatures lower than 5 °C.
NOTE
The car must be connected to the mains
power circuit before the electrically-driven
heater can be activated.
WARNING
Do not use the fuel-driven auxiliary heater
indoors in unventilated areas. Exhaust fumes
are given off.
1.
Press OK to access the menu.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Preconditioning and select with OK.
3.
If the setting
Indoor parking has already
been made then the symbol for this is shown
in the display, in which case continue from
point 7.
4.
If
Outdoor parking is selected then the
symbol for this (p. 139) is shown instead.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to the symbol
and select with OK.
5.
Scroll forward in the next menu to
Indoor
parking and select with OK.
6.
Go back in the menu with RESET.
7. Select whether or not seat heating and
steering wheel heating
3
should be activated.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to
and
select with OK.
8.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Driver seat or
Passenger seat and select with the OK
button if they should be activated
4
during
preconditioning.
9.
Exit the menu with RESET.
Related information
•
Preconditioning - direct start (p. 140)
•
Preconditioning - immediate stop (p. 141)
Preconditioning - parking outside
With the
Outdoor parking option, both the
electrically-driven heater and the fuel-driven
heater
5
are activated during preconditioning
(p. 138).
With the Outdoor parking option, in
addition to the electrically-driven
heater, the fuel-driven heater is also
permitted during preconditioning.
WARNING
Do not use the fuel-driven auxiliary heater
indoors in unventilated areas. Exhaust fumes
are given off.
NOTE
The car can be started and driven even when
the fuel-driven auxiliary heater is running.
1.
Press OK to access the menu.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Preconditioning and select with OK.
3.
If the setting
Outdoor parking has already
been made then the symbol for this is shown
in the display, in which case continue from
point 7.
3
Seat heating and steering wheel heating can only be activated when the car is plugged into the mains power circuit.
4
Tick the box to activate.
5
The fuel-driven heater is not activated if the outside temperature exceeds 15 °C.
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
140
4.
If
Indoor parking is selected then the sym-
bol for this (p. 139) is shown instead. Scroll
with the thumbwheel to the symbol and
select with OK.
5.
Scroll forward in the next menu to
Outdoor
parking and select with OK.
6.
Go back in the menu with RESET.
7. Select whether or not seat heating and
steering wheel heating
6
should be activated.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to
and
select with OK.
8.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Driver seat or
Passenger seat and select with the OK
button if they should be activated
6
during
preconditioning.
9.
Exit the menu with RESET.
Related information
•
Preconditioning - direct start (p. 140)
•
Preconditioning - immediate stop (p. 141)
Preconditioning - direct start
Preconditioning of the car can be started
directly.
Direct start can be performed via:
•
information display
•
remote control key*
•
mobile*.
NOTE
In the event of direct start of preconditioning,
Volvo recommends that you activate via the
remote control key or mobile.
Direct start via the information display
1.
Press OK to access the menu.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Preconditioning and select with OK.
3.
Scroll forward in the next menu to
Direct
start in order to activate the preconditioning
and select with OK.
4.
Exit the menu with RESET.
Direct start via the remote control key*
Indicator lamp on remote control key with PCC*.
6
Seat heating and steering wheel heating can only be activated when the car is plugged into the mains power circuit.
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
141
Preconditioning can be activated via the remote
control key:
–
Hold the button for approach lighting
depressed for 2 seconds.
Hazard warning flashers provide information
in accordance with the following:
•
5 short flashes followed by a constant
glow for approx. 3 seconds - the signal
has reached the car and preconditioning
has been activated.
•
5 short flashes - the signal has reached
the car but preconditioning has not been
activated.
•
Hazard warning flashers remain switched
off - the signal has not reached the car.
If the button for information
is depressed
when preconditioning is active then the indicator
lamp will show the status for this - at the same
time the car's lock status (p. 167) is shown.
While the status is being investigated the indica-
tor lamp emits a pair of short flashes followed by
a constant glow if preconditioning is active.
Status is also shown in the trip computer while
preconditioning is in progress.
Direct start via app*
Activation and information on selected settings
are available via the Volvo On Call* app.
Related information
•
Preconditioning - timer (p. 142)
•
Preconditioning - immediate stop (p. 141)
•
Preconditioning - messages (p. 144)
Preconditioning - immediate stop
Preconditioning of the car can be deactivated
directly via the information display.
1.
Press OK to access the menu.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Preconditioning and select with OK.
3.
Scroll forward in the next menu to
Stop in
order to deactivate the preconditioning and
select with OK.
4.
Exit the menu with RESET.
Related information
•
Preconditioning - direct start (p. 140)
•
Preconditioning - timer (p. 142)
•
Preconditioning - messages (p. 144)
CLIMATE CONTROL
142
Preconditioning - timer
Preconditioning (p. 138) timer is connected to
the car's clock.
The time when the car shall be used and accli-
matised is specified with the timer.
Two different times can be selected using the
timer (p. 142). The car's electronics select when
preconditioning shall be activated based on pre-
vailing external climatic conditions.
NOTE
All timer programming will be cleared if the
car's clock is reset.
Related information
•
Timer - starting (p. 143)
•
Timer - switching off (p. 143)
Timer - setting
Two different times can be selected using the
timer. Here time refers to the time when the car
shall be used and acclimatised.
NOTE
All timer programming will be cleared if the
car's clock is reset.
1.
Press OK to access the menu.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel (p. 112) to
Preconditioning and select with OK.
3. Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
4.
Briefly press OK to move to the illuminated
hours setting.
5. Select the required hour using the thumb-
wheel.
6.
Briefly press OK to move to the illuminated
minutes setting.
7. Select the required minute using the thumb-
wheel.
8.
Press OK
7
to confirm the setting.
9.
Go back in the menu structure with RESET.
10. Select the second timer (continued from
point 2) or exit the menu with RESET.
Related information
•
Preconditioning - timer (p. 142)
•
Timer - starting (p. 143)
•
Timer - switching off (p. 143)
7
An further press of OK activates the timer.
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
143
Timer - starting
The time when the car shall be used and accli-
matised is specified with the timer.
When the timer is activated the car's electronics
choose when preconditioning should be acti-
vated based on prevailing outside climatic condi-
tions.
1.
Press OK to access the menu.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Preconditioning and select with OK.
3. Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and activate with OK.
4.
Exit the menu with RESET.
It is also possible to start the timer via the Volvo
On Call* app.
Related information
•
Preconditioning - timer (p. 142)
•
Timer - setting (p. 142)
•
Timer - switching off (p. 143)
•
Menu navigation - combined instrument
panel (p. 112)
Timer - switching off
A timer activated for preconditioning can be
switched off manually.
1.
Press OK to access the menu.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Preconditioning and select with OK.
> If a timer is set then a clock symbol is
shown beside the set time.
3. Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
4. Switch off the timer by pressing:
•
long on OK or
•
short on OK to go forward in the menu.
Then select to stop the timer and confirm
with OK.
5.
Exit the menu with RESET.
A timer activated for preconditioning can also be
deactivated (p. 141) .
Related information
•
Preconditioning - timer (p. 142)
•
Timer - starting (p. 143)
•
Timer - setting (p. 142)
•
Menu navigation - combined instrument
panel (p. 112)
CLIMATE CONTROL
144
Preconditioning - messages
Symbols and messages regarding precondition-
ing (p. 138).
When the fuel-driven heater has been
activated the heat symbol illuminates in
the information display.
When one of the timers has been activated, the
symbol for activated timer illuminates in the dis-
play at the same time as the set time is shown
next to the symbol.
Symbol in the display for activated
timer.
The table shows symbols and display texts that
appear.
Symbol Display Specification
Auto heater ON
The fuel-driven heater is switched on and operating.
The heater's timer is activated after the remote control key has been removed from the ignition switch and
leaving the car - the engine and passenger compartment are heated at the set time.
Fuel operated heater stopped
Battery saving mode
The fuel-driven heater is stopped by the car's electronics in order to facilitate starting the engine.
The starter battery's charge level is too low.
Fuel operated heater stopped
Low fuel level
The fuel-driven heater is stopped.
Setting the heater is not possible due to fuel level being too low - this is in order to facilitate starting the
engine as well as approx. 50 km driving.
Fuel operated heater Service
required
The fuel-driven heater is fully or partially disengaged.
Visit a workshop if the message remains. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
CLIMATE CONTROL
145
Symbol Display Specification
Preconditioning interrupted by
power supply change
The electrically-driven heater or AC system is stopped.
The transfer of energy is interrupted.
Preconditioning stopped due to
malfunction
The electrically-driven heater or AC system is stopped.
Visit a workshop. An authorised workshop is recommended.
Preconditioning stopped Hybrid
battery temperature high
The electrically-driven heater or AC system is stopped.
The hybrid battery is too hot, wait until the temperature has returned to normal.
A display text clears automatically after a time or
after one press on the indicator stalk (p. 112) OK
button.
Related information
•
Messages - handling (p. 114)
CLIMATE CONTROL
146
General information about heaters
The car is equipped with electrically-driven and
fuel-driven heater. The engine needs to be kept
warm in order to reduce the environmental
impact when it is started. These heaters are
used in order to achieve the correct operating
temperature for the engine or to generate suffi-
cient heat in the passenger compartment.
•
Electrically-driven heater (p. 146)
•
Fuel-driven heater (p. 146)
Electrically-driven heater
The car is equipped with electrically-driven and
fuel-driven heater (p. 146).
The electrically-driven heater cannot be con-
trolled manually but is activated automatically
when required.
NOTE
When the electrically-driven heater is in use,
the charging time for the hybrid battery will be
extended. The time required for heating the
car is mainly determined by the outside tem-
perature.
Related information
•
General information about preconditioning
(p. 138)
•
General information about heaters (p. 146)
Fuel-driven heater
The car is equipped with electrically-driven
(p. 146) and fuel-driven heater.
In colder weather, the car's fuel-driven heater can
be activated during warming-up. The heater starts
automatically when extra heat is required and is
switched off automatically when not required.
NOTE
When the fuel-driven auxiliary heater is active,
exhaust fumes may be given off from the
right-hand wheel housing, which is perfectly
normal.
If you do not want the car's fuel-driven heater to
start during preconditioning, activate
Indoor
parking, see Preconditioning - parking inside
(p. 139). However, this may prolong the warming-
up time.
The fuel-driven heater cannot be started during
driving or preconditioning if the outside tempera-
ture exceeds 15 °C. The heater's maximum run-
ning time is 50 minutes during preconditioning.
If the fuel level in the tank is too low then the
fuel-driven heater is prevented from starting, with
inadequate heating as a result.
CLIMATE CONTROL
147
NOTE
Make sure that there is sufficient fuel in the
car's regular fuel tank when driving at temper-
atures below +15 °C.
WARNING
Do not use the fuel-driven auxiliary heater
indoors in unventilated areas. Exhaust fumes
are given off.
Refuelling
Warning label on fuel filler flap.
WARNING
Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch
off the fuel-driven auxiliary heater before star-
ting to refuel.
Check in the combined instrument panel that
the heater is switched off. The heat symbol is
shown when it is operating.
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the
car should point downhill to ensure that there is a
supply of fuel to the fuel-driven heater.
Starter battery and fuel
If the starter battery has insufficient charge or if
the fuel level is too low, the heater will be
switched off automatically and a message is
shown in the combined instrument panel.
Acknowledge the message by pressing the indi-
cator stalk (p. 112) OK button once.
Related information
•
General information about preconditioning
(p. 138)
•
General information about heaters (p. 146)
Fuel-driven heater - auto mode/
deactivation
The fuel-driven heater's automatic start
sequence can be deactivated if required.
NOTE
If the fuel-driven auxiliary heater is deacti-
vated, the diesel engine will start more fre-
quently in order to meet the need for heat in
drive mode PURE or HYBRID, i.e. electrical
operation will be restricted.
1.
Press the indicator stalk (p. 112) OK button
to access the menu.
2.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Settings and
select with OK.
3.
Select one of the alternatives
Auto heater
ON or Auto heater OFF using the thumb-
wheel and confirm with OK.
4.
Exit the menu with RESET.
Related information
•
General information about preconditioning
(p. 138)
•
General information about heaters (p. 146)
•
Fuel-driven heater (p. 146)
LOADING AND STORAGE
LOADING AND STORAGE
150
Storage spaces
Overview of storage spaces in the passenger
compartment.
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
151
Storage compartment in door panel
Storage pocket* on front edge of front seat
cushions
Ticket clip
Glovebox (p. 152)
Storage compartment
Storage compartment, cup holder (p. 152)
Cup holder* in armrest, rear seat
Storage pocket
WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones,
cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc.
in the glove compartment or other compart-
ments. Otherwise they may injure people in
the car in the event of sudden braking or a
collision.
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
152
Tunnel console
The tunnel console is located between the front
seats.
Storage compartment (e.g. for CDs) and
USB*/AUX input under the armrest.
Includes cup holder for driver and passenger.
Related information
•
Storage spaces (p. 150)
Glovebox
The glovebox is located on the passenger side.
The owner's manual and maps can be kept in
here for example. There are also holders for pens
on the inside of the lid. The glovebox can be
locked* (p. 181) using the key blade (p. 169).
Related information
•
Storage spaces (p. 150)
Inlaid mats*
Inlay mats collect e.g. rubbish and slush. Volvo
supplies specially manufactured inlay mats.
WARNING
Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and
check before setting off that the mat by the
driver's seat is firmly affixed and secured in
the pins so that it does not get caught adja-
cent to and under the pedals.
Related information
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 402)
LOADING AND STORAGE
}}
153
Vanity mirror
The vanity mirror is located on the rear of the sun
visor.
Vanity mirror with lighting.
The light illuminates automatically when the cover
is lifted.
Related information
•
Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting
(p. 376)
Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets
The electrical sockets (12 V) are located next to
the cup holder and rear of the tunnel console.
12 V socket in tunnel console, front seat.
12 V socket in tunnel console, rear seat.
The electrical socket can be used for various
accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. TV screens,
music players and mobile phones. For the socket
to supply current, the remote control key must be
in at least key position I (p. 83).
WARNING
Always leave the plug in the socket when the
socket is not in use.
NOTE
Optional equipment and accessories - e.g.
display screens, music players and mobile
phones - which are connected to one of the
passenger compartment's 12V electrical
sockets, could be activated by the climate
control system, even when the remote control
key has been removed or when the car is
locked, for example, when the parking heater
is activated at a preset time.
For this reason remove the plugs from the
electrical sockets for optional equipment or
accessories when not in use because the bat-
tery could be drained in the event of such an
occurrence!
||
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
154
IMPORTANT
Max. socket is 10 A (120 W) if one socket is
used at a time. If both sockets in the tunnel
console are used simultaneously, 7.5 A (90
W) per socket is applicable.
If the compressor for emergency puncture
repair is connected to one of the two sockets,
no other current consumer must be con-
nected to the other one.
NOTE
The compressor for emergency puncture
repair (p. 346) has been tested and approved
by Volvo.
Related information
•
12 V electrical socket - cargo area* (p. 156)
Loading
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight.
The total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories reduces the car's payload by a cor-
responding weight.
For more detailed information on weights, see
Weights (p. 412).
The tailgate is opened via a button on
the lighting panel or the remote control
key, see Locking/unlocking - tailgate
(p. 181).
WARNING
The car’s driving properties change depend-
ing on the weight and positioning of the load.
To bear in mind when loading
•
Position the load firmly against the rear
seat's backrest.
Note that objects must not prevent the function
of the WHIPS system for the front seats if any of
the rear seat's backrests is folded down, see
WHIPS - seating position (p. 42).
•
Centre the load.
•
Heavy objects should be placed as low as
possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on low-
ered backrests.
•
Cover sharp edges with something soft to
avoid damaging the upholstery.
•
Secure all loads to the load retaining eyelets
with straps or web lashings.
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg (44 pounds)
can, in a frontal collision at a speed of
50 km/h (30 mph) carry the impact of an
item weighing 1000 kg (2200 pounds).
WARNING
The protection provided by the inflatable cur-
tain in the headlining may be compromised or
eliminated by high loads.
•
Never load cargo above the backrest.
WARNING
Always secure the load. During heavy braking
the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to
the car's occupants.
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with
something soft.
Switch off the engine and apply the parking
brake when loading/unloading long items.
Otherwise you may accidentally knock the
gear lever or gear selector with the load into a
drive position - and the car could then move
off.
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
155
Related information
•
Load retaining eyelets (p. 156)
•
Safety net* (p. 157)
•
Loading - long load (p. 155)
•
Roof load (p. 155)
Loading - long load
To simplify loading (p. 154) in the cargo area,
the rear seat backrest can be folded down. The
passenger seat
1
backrest can also be folded*
for an extra long load.
Lowering the rear seat backrest
If the rear seat backrest needs to be lowered, see
Seats, rear (p. 87).
Roof load
The load carriers recommended for roof loads
are the ones developed by Volvo. This is in order
to avoid damage to the car and in order to
achieve the maximum possible safety during a
journey.
Carefully follow the installation instructions sup-
plied with the carriers.
•
Check periodically that the load carriers and
load are properly secured. Lash the load
securely with retaining straps.
•
Distribute the load evenly over the load carri-
ers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom.
•
The size of the area exposed to the wind, and
therefore fuel consumption, increase with the
size of the load.
•
Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy
braking and hard cornering.
WARNING
The car's centre of gravity and driving charac-
teristics are altered by roof loads.
For information about the maximum permitted
load on the roof, including load carriers and
any space box, see Weights (p. 412).
Related information
•
Loading (p. 154)
1
Only applies to comfort seats.
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
156
Load retaining eyelets
The folding load retaining eyelets are used to
fasten straps in order to anchor items in the
cargo area.
WARNING
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which pro-
trude may cause injury under violent braking.
Always secure large and heavy objects with a
seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
Related information
•
Loading (p. 154)
12 V electrical socket - cargo area*
The electrical socket can be used for various
accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. screens,
music players and mobile phones.
Lower the cover to access the electrical socket.
•
The socket also provides voltage when the
remote control key is not in the ignition
switch.
IMPORTANT
Max. power takeoff is 10 A (120 W).
NOTE
Remember that using the electrical socket
with the engine switched off involves the risk
of discharging the car's starter battery.
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo. For information on the use
of Volvo's recommended temporary emer-
gency puncture repair (TMK), see Emergency
puncture repair (p. 346).
Related information
•
Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets (p. 153)
LOADING AND STORAGE
}}
* Option/accessory.
157
Safety net*
2
A safety net prevents loads from being thrown
forward in the passenger compartment in the
event of sudden braking.
Attaching
For safety reasons, the safety net must always be
correctly fastened and secured.
The net is made of a strong nylon fabric and can
be secured two different locations in the car:
•
Rear fitting - Behind the rear seat backrest
•
Front fitting - Behind the front seat back-
rests.
WARNING
Loads in the luggage compartment must be
anchored well, and also using a correctly fit-
ted safety net.
Rear fitting
1. Fold out the safety net. Make sure that the
safety net's storage pockets are turned
backwards.
2. Hook one of the net's retaining hooks into
the rear roof mounting.
Hook the net's other retaining hook into the
roof mounting on the opposite side.
Take care to press forward the net's retaining
hooks for each respective roof mounting's
front end position.
3. Hook the hook into the load retaining eyelets
on both sides and tension the cam lock by
pressing down the tongue and tensioning
the strap.
2
Standard in certain markets.
||
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
158
Front fitting
1. Fold out the safety net. Make sure that the
safety net's storage pockets are turned
backwards.
2. Place the seats as far forward as possible.
3. Hook one of the net's retaining hooks into
the front roof mounting.
Hook the net's other retaining hook into the
roof mounting on the opposite side.
Take care to press forward the net's retaining
hooks for each respective roof mounting's
front end position.
4. Hook the hook into the eyelet on the seat rail
on both sides and tension the cam lock by
pressing down the tongue and tensioning
the strap.
Related information
•
Loading (p. 154)
•
Safety grille* (p. 158)
Safety grille*
A safety grille prevents loads or pets from being
thrown forward in the passenger compartment in
the event of sudden braking.
Folding up
Take hold of the bottom of the safety grille and
pull back/up.
IMPORTANT
The protective grille cannot be folded up or
down when a cargo cover is fitted.
Fitting/removal
The safety grille is normally permanently installed
in the car because it can easily be folded up in
the roof and so be out of the way if a longer
cargo area is required. However, if desired, the
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
159
safety grille can be dismantled and removed from
the car.
For information about the tools required and
methods for fitting/removal, see the installation
instructions that were included with the initial
purchase.
For safety reasons, the safety grille must always
be correctly fastened and secured when being
refitted.
Related information
•
Safety net* (p. 157)
•
Loading (p. 154)
•
Load retaining eyelets (p. 156)
Cargo cover*
3
Pull the cargo cover over the load and hook it
into the recesses at the cargo area's rear posts.
IMPORTANT
The protective grille cannot be folded up or
down when the cargo cover is fitted.
Attaching the cargo cover
Move one end piece of the cover into the
recess on the side panel.
Move the other end piece into the corres-
ponding recess.
Press both sides in. A "click" should be audi-
ble and the red marking should disappear.
> Check that both end pieces are locked.
Removing the cargo cover
1. Press in one end piece button and lift it out.
2. Carefully angle the cover up/out and the
other end piece loosens automatically.
Lowering the cargo cover's rear sealing
disc
In its rolled-in position, the cargo cover's rear
sealing disc protrudes horizontally into the cargo
area when it is fitted.
–
Pull the sealing disc back gently, free from
its support shelves, and lower.
Related information
•
Loading (p. 154)
•
Loading - long load (p. 155)
3
Standard in certain markets.
LOCKS AND ALARM
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
162
Remote control key
Amongst other things, the remote control key is
used for locking/unlocking and starting the
engine.
There are two variants of remote control key -
Remote control key in basic version and Remote
control key with PCC (Personal Car
Communicator)*.
Functionality
Basic
A
with
PCC
B
Locking/unlocking and
detachable key blade
x x
Keyless locking/unlock-
ing
x
Keyless engine starting x
Information button and
indicator lamps
x
A
5-button key
B
6-button key
Remote control key with PCC has extended func-
tionality compared with the remote control key in
the basic version - e.g. support for keyless star-
ting and locking/unlocking (Keyless Drive
(p. 173)) as well as certain unique functions
(p. 167).
All remote control keys have a detachable key
blade (p. 169) made of metal. The visible section
is available in two versions so that it is possible to
distinguish between the remote control keys.
More remote control keys can be ordered - but
not variants other than the one supplied with the
car. Up to six keys can be programmed and used
for one single car.
The car is supplied with two remote control keys.
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
Remember to switch off the supply to the
power windows and sunroof by removing the
remote control key if the driver leaves the car.
Related information
•
Remote control key - functions (p. 166)
Remote control key - losing
If you lose a remote control key then a new one
can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
The remaining remote control keys must be
taken to the Volvo workshop. The code of the
missing remote control key must be erased from
the system as a theft prevention measure.
The current number of keys registered to the car
can be checked in the menu system MY CAR.
For a description of the menu system, see MY
CAR (p. 115).
Related information
•
Remote control key - functions (p. 166)
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
163
Remote control key -
personalisation*
The key memory in the remote control key
(p. 162) means that certain settings in the car
can be individually adapted for different people.
The key memory function is available in combina-
tion with, for example, power* driver's seat.
Settings for door mirrors (p. 107), driver's seat,
steering force (p. 190) and the combined instru-
ment panel's theme, contrast and colour mode
(p. 69) can be stored in the memory, depending
on the car's equipment level.
The function
1
can be activated/deactivated in the
menu system MY CAR. For a description of the
menu system, see MY CAR (p. 115).
When the function is activated, the settings are
automatically linked to the key memory. This
means that a change in a setting will automati-
cally be saved to the specific remote control key's
memory.
Storing settings
Proceed as follows in order to store the settings
and use the key memory in the remote control
key:
1. Unlock the car with the remote control key in
whose memory the setting
2
shall be stored.
2. Make sure that the key memory function is
activated in the menu system MY CAR.
3. Make the desired settings for e.g. the seat
and the door mirrors.
4. The settings are stored in the current remote
control key's memory.
The next time the car is unlocked with the same
remote control key, the positions that are stored
in the key memory will be set automatically - pro-
viding that they have been changed since the last
time the current remote control key was used.
Emergency stop
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press one
of the setting buttons for the seat or memory
buttons in order to stop the seat.
Restarting to reach the seat position stored in
the key memory is performed by pressing the
unlock button on the remote control key. The
driver's door must then be open.
WARNING
Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do
not play with the controls. Check that there
are no objects in front of, behind or under the
seat during adjustment. Make sure that none
of the passengers in the rear seat is in danger
of becoming trapped.
Changing settings
If several people each with a remote control key
approach the car, then the settings for e.g. seat
and door mirrors are implemented for the person
whose remote control key unlocks the driver's
door.
If the driver's door has been opened by person A
with remote control key A, but person B with
remote control key B shall drive, then the settings
can be changed as follows:
•
Standing by the driver's door, or sitting
behind the steering wheel, person B presses
the button for unlocking on his/her remote
control key, see Remote control key - func-
tions (p. 166).
•
Select one of three possible memories for
seat adjustment with seat button 1-3, see
Seats, front - electrically operated* (p. 85).
•
Adjust seat and door mirrors manually, see
Seats, front - electrically operated* (p. 85)
and Door mirrors (p. 107).
1
Called
Car key memory in MY CAR.
2
This setting does not affect settings that have been stored in the power seat's memory function.
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
164
Reactivation of settings
When the car is locked or after 30 minutes if the
car is left unlocked, the key memory will be deac-
tivated and a standard driver profile will be set. To
reactivate the key memory for the current remote
control key, the following is required.
For cars without keyless start and lock
system
The settings that are stored in the key memory
are activated if the car is unlocked by pressing
the remote control key's unlock button.
For cars with keyless start and lock system
The key memory is activated if:
1. The car is unlocked either by pressing the
remote control key's unlock button or via
keyless unlocking.
2. If the car is unlocked, a key scan is made
when the driver's door is opened. If a unique
remote control key is found, its stored set-
tings will be activated. If the car is locked,
see the previous point.
Related information
•
Remote control key with PCC* - unique func-
tions (p. 167)
Locking/unlocking - indicator
When the car is locked or unlocked using the
remote control key (p. 162) the direction indica-
tors confirm that locking/unlocking was correctly
performed.
•
Locking - one flash and the door mirrors are
folded
3
in.
•
Unlocking - two flashes and the door mirrors
are folded
3
out.
After locking the indication is only given if all
locks are activated once the doors have been
closed.
Selecting the function
Different options for indicating locking/unlocking
with light can be set in the car's menu system
MY CAR. For a description of the menu system,
see MY CAR (p. 115).
Related information
•
Keyless drive* (p. 173)
•
Lock indicator (p. 164)
•
Alarm indicator* (p. 186)
Lock indicator
A flashing LED by the windscreen verifies that
the car is locked.
Same LED as alarm indicator (p. 186).
NOTE
Cars that are not equipped with alarm also
have this indicator.
Related information
•
Locking/unlocking - indicator (p. 164)
3
Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
165
Immobiliser
The electronic immobiliser is a theft protection
system that prevents an unauthorised person
from starting the car.
Each remote control key (p. 162) has a unique
code. The car can only be started with the correct
remote control key with the correct code.
The following error messages in the combined
instrument panel's information display are related
to the electronic immobiliser:
Message Specification
Insert car
key
Error when reading the remote
control key during starting -
Remove the key from the ignition
switch, press it in again and
make a new start attempt.
Car key
not found
Error reading the remote control
key during starting - Try to start
again.
If the error persists: Insert the
remote key into the ignition
switch and try to start again.
Immobi-
liser Try
to start
again
Error in immobiliser system dur-
ing starting. If the error persists:
Contact a workshop - an author-
ised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
For starting the car, see Starting the engine
(p. 266).
Related information
•
Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking
system* (p. 165)
Remote-controlled immobiliser with
tracking system*
Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking sys-
tem
4
makes it possible to track and locate the
car, and to remotely activate the immobiliser.
Contact your nearest Volvo dealer for more infor-
mation and assistance with activating the system.
Related information
•
Remote control key (p. 162)
•
Immobiliser (p. 165)
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
166
Remote control key - functions
The remote control key in basic version has
functions such as locking and unlocking the
doors.
Functions
Remote control key in basic version.
Locking
Unlocking
Approach light duration
Tailgate
Panic function
Remote control key with PCC*( Personal Car
Communicator).
Information
Function buttons
Locking – Locks the doors and tailgate
while the alarm is activated.
Press and hold to close all the windows and sun-
roof* simultaneously. For more information, see
Global opening (p. 180).
WARNING
If the sunroof and windows are closed using
the remote control key, check that nobody's
hands are trapped.
Unlocking – Unlocks the doors and tailgate
while the alarm is deactivated.
Press and hold to open all windows simultane-
ously. For more information, see Global opening
(p. 180).
The function can be changed from unlocking all
doors simultaneously, to unlocking the driver's
door only with one press of the button and, after
a further press of the button - within ten seconds
- unlocking the remaining doors.
The function can be changed in the menu system
MY CAR. For a description of the menu system,
see MY CAR (p. 115).
Approach light duration – Used to switch
on the car's lighting at a distance. For more infor-
mation, see Approach lighting (p. 102).
The button can also be used for activating pre-
conditioning (p. 140).
Tailgate (p. 181) - Unlocks and disarms
the alarm for the tailgate only.
Panic function – Used to attract attention
in an emergency.
Press and hold the button for at least 3 seconds
or press it twice within 3 seconds to activate the
direction indicators and the horn.
The function can be turned off with the same
button once it has been active for at least 5 sec-
4
Only certain markets and in combination with Volvo On Call*.
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
167
onds. Otherwise the function switches off auto-
matically after approx. 3 minutes.
Related information
•
Remote control key (p. 162)
•
Remote control key with PCC* - unique func-
tions (p. 167)
•
Locking/unlocking - from the outside
(p. 178)
Remote control key - range
Remote control key functions (in its basic ver-
sion) have a range of approx. 20 metres from
the car.
If the car does not verify a button being pressed -
move closer and try again.
NOTE
The remote control key functions may be dis-
rupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings,
topographical conditions, etc. The car can
always be locked/unlocked with the key blade
(p. 170).
If the remote control key is removed from the car
when the engine is running or key position I or II
(p. 82) is active, and all doors are closed, then a
warning message is shown in the information dis-
play in the combined instrument panel and a
short audio reminder signal sounds at the same
time.
The message extinguishes when the remote con-
trol key is returned to the car, followed by a press
of the OK button, or when all doors are closed.
Related information
•
Remote control key (p. 162)
•
Remote control key - functions (p. 166)
Remote control key with PCC* -
unique functions
A remote control key with PCC (Personal Car
Communicator) has enhanced functionality com-
pared with a remote control key in basic version
(p. 162) in the form of an information button and
indicator lamps.
Remote control key with PCC.
Information button
Indicator lamps
Using the information button enables access to
certain information from the car via the indicator
lamps.
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
168
Using the information button
–
Press the information button .
> All indicator lamps flash for approximately
7 seconds and the light travels around on
the remote control key. This indicates that
information from the car is being scanned.
If any of the other buttons are pressed
during this time then the reading is inter-
rupted.
NOTE
If none of the indicator lamps illuminates
with repeated use of the information button
and in different locations (as well as after 7
seconds and after the light has travelled
around on the PCC), contact a workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Indicator lamps display information in accordance
with the following illustration:
Green continuous light – the car is locked.
Yellow continuous light – the car is unlocked.
Red continuous light – the alarm has been
triggered since the car was locked.
Red light flashing alternately in both indicator
lamps – The alarm was triggered less than 5
minutes ago.
Related information
•
Remote control key with PCC* - range
(p. 168)
Remote control key with PCC* -
range
The range of a remote control key with PCC
(Personal Car Communicator) for locking,
unlocking the doors and tailgate is approx. 20
metres from the car - the other functions are up
to approx. 100 metres.
If the car does not verify a button being pressed -
move closer and try again.
NOTE
The information button function may be dis-
rupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings,
topographical conditions, etc.
Outside the remote control key's range
If the remote control key is too far away from the
car for the information to be read then the status
the car was last left in is shown, without the light
in the indicator lamps travelling around on the
remote control key.
If several remote control keys are used for the
car then it is only the one last used for locking/
unlocking that shows the correct status.
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
169
NOTE
If no indicator lamps illuminate when the
information button is used within range then
this may be because the last communication
between the remote control key and the car
was disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions, etc.
Related information
•
Keyless Drive* - remote control key range
(p. 174)
•
Remote control key - range (p. 167)
Detachable key blade
A remote control key contains a detachable key
blade of metal with which some functions can
be activated and some operations carried out.
The key blade's unique code is provided by
authorised Volvo workshops, which are recom-
mended when ordering new key blades.
Key blade functions
Using the remote control key's detachable key
blade:
•
the left-hand front door is unlocked manually
if central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control key, see Detachable key
blade - unlocking doors (p. 170).
•
the rear doors' mechanical child safety locks
can be activated/deactivated (p. 184).
•
the right-hand front door and the rear doors
can be locked manually (p. 178), e.g. in the
event of power failure.
•
access to the glovebox and cargo area (pri-
vacy locking (p. 171)*) can be blocked.
•
the airbag for front passenger seat
(PACOS*) can be activated/deactivated
(p. 38).
Related information
•
Remote control key - functions (p. 166)
•
Remote control key (p. 162)
Detachable key blade - detaching/
attaching
Detaching/attaching the detachable key blade
(p. 169) is carried out as follows:
Removing the key blade
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
At the same time pull the key blade straight
out backwards.
Attaching the key blade
Carefully refit the key blade into its location in the
remote control key (p. 162).
1. Hold the remote control key with the slot
pointed up and lower the key blade into its
slot.
2. Lightly press the key blade. You should hear
a "click" when the key blade is locked in.
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
170
Related information
•
Detachable key blade - unlocking doors
(p. 170)
•
Child safety locks - manual activation
(p. 184)
•
Passenger airbag - activating/deactivating*
(p. 38)
Detachable key blade - unlocking
doors
The detachable key blade (p. 169) can be used
if central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control key (p. 162), e.g. if the key's bat-
tery has run out.
If central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control key - e.g. if the batteries are dis-
charged - then the left-hand front door is
unlocked as follows:
1. Unlock the left-hand front door with the key
blade in the door handle's lock cylinder. For
illustration and more information, see Keyless
Drive* - unlocking with the key blade
(p. 176).
NOTE
When the door has been unlocked using the
key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig-
gered.
2. Deactivate the alarm by inserting the remote
control key in the ignition switch.
For cars with keyless start and lock system, see
Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the key blade
(p. 176).
Related information
•
Remote control key (p. 162)
•
Remote control key - replacing the battery
(p. 172)
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
171
Privacy locking*
Privacy locking is intended for when the car is
left for service, with a hotel parking valet or simi-
lar. The glovebox is then locked and the tailgate
lock is disconnected from the central locking -
the tailgate cannot be opened with either the
central locking button in the front doors or the
remote control key (p. 162).
G017869
Active locks for remote control key with key blade.
G017870
Active locks for remote control key, without key blade
and privacy locking activated.
This means that the remote control key without
key blade can only be used to activate/deactivate
the alarm (p. 185), to unlock the doors and to
start the car.
The remote control key without key blade can
then be handed over to the service or hotel staff -
the loose key blade is retained by the car owner.
NOTE
Do not forget to pull out the cargo cover
(p. 159) over the cargo area before closing
the tailgate.
Activate/deactivate
Activating privacy locking.
To activate privacy locking:
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock cyl-
inder.
Turn the key blade 180 degrees clockwise.
Pull out the key blade. The combined instru-
ment panel's information display shows a
message at the same time.
The glovebox is then locked and the tailgate can
no longer be unlocked with the remote control
key or the central locking button.
LOCKS AND ALARM
172
NOTE
Do not reinsert the key blade into the remote
control key, but keep it in a safe place
instead.
•
Deactivation takes place in reverse order.
For information on locking the glovebox only, see
Locking/unlocking - glovebox (p. 181).
Remote control key - replacing the
battery
The battery
5
for the remote control key may need
to be replaced.
The battery for the remote control key should be
replaced if:
•
the information symbol in the combined
instrument panel illuminates and the display
shows
Car key battery low See manual
and/or
•
the locks repeatedly do not react to signals
from the remote control key within 20 metres
from the car.
Opening
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
At the same time pull the key blade
straight out backwards.
Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the hole
behind the spring-loaded catch and gently
prize the remote control key up.
5
Remote control key with PCC has two batteries.
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
173
NOTE
Turn the remote control key over with the but-
tons facing up, this is to avoid the batteries
falling out when it is opened.
IMPORTANT
Avoid touching new batteries and their con-
tact surfaces with your fingers as this may
impair their function.
Battery replacement
Closely study how the battery/batteries are
secured on the inside of the cover, with
regard to their (+) and (–) sides.
Remote control key (one battery)
1. Carefully prize out the battery.
2.
Install a new one with the (+) side down.
Remote control key with PCC* (two
batteries)
1. Carefully prize out the batteries.
2.
First install one new one with the (+) side up.
3. Position the white plastic tab in between and
finally install a second new battery with the
(+) side down.
Battery type
Use batteries with the designation CR2430, 3V -
one in the remote control key, two in the remote
control key with PCC.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the batteries to be
used in the remote control key/PCC fulfil UN
Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, sub-
section 38.3. Batteries fitted in the factory or
replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop
fulfil the above criteria.
Assembly
1. Press the remote control key together.
2. Hold the remote control key with the slot
pointed up and lower the key blade into its
slot.
3. Lightly press the key blade. You should hear
a "click" when the key blade is locked in.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that exhausted batteries are dis-
posed of in a manner which is kind to the
environment.
Related information
•
Remote control key (p. 162)
•
Remote control key - functions (p. 166)
Keyless drive*
Cars equipped with Keyless Drive have a star-
ting and locking system that can be operated
keylessly.
With the keyless start and lock system the car
can be started, locked and unlocked without the
remote control key (p. 162)
6
inserted in the igni-
tion switch. It is enough to have the remote con-
trol key with you in a pocket. The system makes it
easier and more convenient to e.g. open the car
when your hands are full.
Both of the remote control keys included with the
car have keyless functionality. It is possible to
order more remote control keys.
The car's electrical system can be set to three
different levels - key position 0, I and II (p. 83) -
with the remote control key.
Related information
•
Keyless Drive* - remote control key range
(p. 174)
•
Keyless drive* - secure handling of the
remote control key (p. 174)
•
Keyless Drive* - interference to remote con-
trol key function (p. 175)
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
174
Keyless Drive* - remote control key
range
In order to unlock the doors or tailgate automati-
cally without pressing a button on the remote
control key
7
, a remote control key must be within
approx. 1.5 metres from the car's door handle or
tailgate.
The person who wishes to lock or unlock a door
must have the remote control key with him or her.
It is not possible to lock or unlock a door if the
remote control key is on the opposite side of the
car.
The red rings in the above figure indicate the
range covered by the system's antennas.
If all remote control keys are removed from the
car when the engine is running or key position I
or II (p. 83) is active, and if all doors are closed,
then a warning message is shown in the informa-
tion display in the combined instrument panel
and an audio reminder signal sounds at the same
time.
When the remote control key has been returned
to the car, the warning message goes off and the
audible reminder ceases once either/or:
•
a door has been opened and closed
•
the remote control key has been inserted in
the ignition switch
•
The OK button has been pressed.
Related information
•
Keyless drive* (p. 173)
•
Keyless Drive* - antenna location (p. 177)
Keyless drive* - secure handling of
the remote control key
It is important to handle the car's remote control
keys with great care.
If one of the remote control keys
8
has been left
in the car then the keyless functions are deacti-
vated in case the car is e.g. locked with the other
remote control key that belongs to the car. This
prevents unauthorised entry.
The next time the car is unlocked with the other
remote control key the forgotten remote control
key is reactivated again.
IMPORTANT
Avoid leaving the remote control key with
PCC behind in the car. If someone breaks into
your car and takes the remote control key, it
will e.g. be possible to start the car by press-
ing the remote control key in the ignition
switch and then pressing the START/STOP
ENGINE button.
Related information
•
Keyless drive* (p. 173)
6
Only applies to Remote Control Key with PCC.
7
Applies to remote control key with PCC (Personal Car Communicator).
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
175
Keyless Drive* - interference to
remote control key function
Electromagnetic fields and screening can inter-
fere with the remote control key's keyless func-
tions (p. 173).
NOTE
Do not place/store the PCC near a mobile
phone or metal object - no closer than 10-15
cm.
If interference is experienced nonetheless, use
the remote control key and the key blade like a
remote control key in basic version, see Remote
control key - functions (p. 166).
Related information
•
Remote control key - replacing the battery
(p. 172)
•
Keyless drive* - secure handling of the
remote control key (p. 174)
•
Keyless Drive* - remote control key range
(p. 174)
Keyless Drive* - locking
Cars equipped with keyless start and lock sys-
tem have a touch-sensitive area on the outside
handle of the doors and a rubberised button
next to the tailgate's rubberised pressure plate
for locking/unlocking.
The touch-sensitive area on the outer door handles and
the rubberised button next to the tailgate's rubberised
pressure plate.
Lock the doors and the tailgate with one long
press on any of the door handles' touch-sensitive
areas or press the smaller of the tailgate's two
rubberised buttons - the lock indicator (p. 164) in
the windscreen confirms that locking has been
completed by starting to flash.
All doors and the tailgate must be closed before
the car can be locked - otherwise the car is not
locked.
NOTE
In cars with automatic gearbox selectors, the
gear selector must be set to the P position;
otherwise the car can be neither locked nor
alarmed.
NOTE
Be aware that the system may be activated in
connection with car washing if the remote
control key is in range.
Related information
•
Keyless drive* (p. 173)
•
Alarm indicator* (p. 186)
8
Applies to remote control key with PCC (Personal Car Communicator).
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
176
Keyless drive* - unlocking
Unlocking takes place when a hand grasps a
door handle or the tailgate's rubberised pressure
plate is actuated - open the door or tailgate as
normal.
NOTE
The door handles normally register a hand
that takes hold of the handle, but with thick
gloves on or after a very quick hand move-
ment a second attempt may be required, or
with the glove taken off.
Related information
•
Keyless drive* (p. 173)
•
Keyless Drive* - locking (p. 175)
Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the
key blade
If central locking cannot be unlocked with the
remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are dis-
charged, then the left-hand front door can be
opened using the detachable key blade.
Hole for key blade - to loosen the cover.
To access the lock cylinder, the door handle's
plastic cover must be removed - this is also done
with the key blade:
1. Press the key blade approx. 1 cm straight up
into the hole on the underside of the door
handle/cover - do not prize.
> The plastic cover loosens automatically by
means of the torque when the blade is
pushed straight up and into the opening.
2. Then insert the key blade in the lock cylinder
and unlock the door.
3. Refit the plastic cover after unlocking.
NOTE
When the driver's door is unlocked using the
key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig-
gered. It is switched off by inserting the PCC
in the ignition switch, see Alarm* - remote
control key not working (p. 187).
Related information
•
Keyless drive* (p. 173)
•
Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching
(p. 169)
•
Alarm* (p. 185)
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
177
Keyless Drive* - lock settings
Lock settings for cars equipped with keyless
start and lock system can be adapted by indicat-
ing in the menu system MY CAR which doors
are to be unlocked.
For a description of the menu system, see MY
CAR (p. 115).
Related information
•
Keyless drive* (p. 173)
Keyless Drive* - antenna location
Cars equipped with keyless start and lock sys-
tem have a number of built-in antennas posi-
tioned at different locations in the car.
Rear bumper, centre
Door handle, left rear
Cargo area, central and furthest in under the
floor
Door handle, right rear
Centre console, under the rear section
Centre console, under the front section.
WARNING
People with pacemaker operations should not
come closer than 22 cm to the keyless sys-
tem's antennae with their pacemaker. This is
to prevent interference between the pace-
maker and the keyless system.
Related information
•
Keyless drive* (p. 173)
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
178
Locking/unlocking - from the
outside
Locking/unlocking from the outside is carried
out using the remote control key (p. 162). The
remote control key can lock/unlock all doors and
the tailgate simultaneously. Different sequences
for unlocking can be selected, see Remote con-
trol key - functions (p. 166).
In order that the lock sequence can be activated,
the driver's door must be closed - if any of the
other doors or the tailgate is open, then it/they
is/are locked and the alarm is activated only
when it/they are closed. For cars equipped with
keyless locking system* all doors and the tailgate
must be closed.
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key in the car.
If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the remote
control key, the battery may be discharged - lock
or unlock the left-hand front door with the
detachable key blade, see Detachable key blade -
detaching/attaching (p. 169).
NOTE
Remember that the alarm is triggered when
the door is opened after being unlocked with
the key blade - the alarm is switched off when
the remote control key is inserted into the
ignition switch.
WARNING
Be aware of the risk of being locked in the
car when it is locked from the outside using
the remote control key - it is then not possible
to open any of the doors from the inside with
the door controls.
For more information, see Deadlocks*
(p. 183).
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within two minutes of unlocking, all are locked
again automatically. This function reduces the
risk that the car is left unlocked unintentionally.
(For cars with alarm, see Alarm* (p. 185).)
Related information
•
Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 179)
•
Keyless drive* (p. 173)
Manual locking of the door
In certain situations the car must be lockable
manually, e.g. in the event of power failure.
The left-hand front door can be locked with its
lock cylinder and the remote control key's
detachable key blade, see Keyless Drive* -
unlocking with the key blade (p. 176).
Other doors do not have lock cylinders and
instead have lock knobs on each door's end face
which must be re-turned - then they are mechan-
ically locked/blocked against opening from the
outside. The doors can still be opened from the
inside.
Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up with
child safety locks (p. 184).
–
Use the remote control key's detachable key
blade to turn the knob, see Detachable key
blade - detaching/attaching (p. 169).
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
179
The door is blocked against opening from
the outside.
The door can be opened from both the out-
side and the inside.
NOTE
•
A door's knob control only locks that par-
ticular door - not all doors simultaneously.
•
A manually locked rear door with an acti-
vated manual child safety lock cannot be
opened from either the outside or the
inside, see Child safety locks - manual
activation (p. 184). A rear door that is
locked in this way can only be unlocked
with the remote control key or central
locking button.
Related information
•
Remote control key - replacing the battery
(p. 172)
Locking/unlocking - from the inside
All of the doors and the tailgate can be locked or
unlocked simultaneously using the central lock-
ing button on the driver's door and passenger
door*.
Central locking
Central locking.
•
Press one side
of the button to lock -
the other side
to unlock.
Press and hold the button
to also open all
side windows simultaneously*.
Unlocking
A door can be unlocked from the inside in two
different ways:
•
Press the central locking button
.
A long press also opens all the side windows*
simultaneously (see also Global opening
(p. 180)).
•
Pull the door handle and open the door - the
door is unlocked and opened in one opera-
tion.
Lamp in lock button
Central locking is available in two variants - the
lamp in the central locking button for the driver's
door has different meanings dependent on the
variant.
With central locking button only in the driver's
door, other doors have no button:
•
Illuminated lamp means that all doors are
locked.
With central locking button on both front doors
and electric lock button in each rear door:
•
Illuminated lamp means that only that partic-
ular door is locked. When all buttons are illu-
minated all doors are locked.
Locking
•
Press the central locking button
- all
closed doors are locked.
A long press also closes all side windows and
sunroof simultaneously (see also Global opening
(p. 180)).
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
180
Lock button* rear doors
The button's lamp illuminates when the door is locked.
The rear door lock buttons only lock their respec-
tive rear door.
To unlock the door:
•
Pull the door handle - the door is unlocked
and opened.
Automatic locking
The doors and tailgate are locked automatically
when the car starts to move.
The function can be activated/deactivated in the
menu system MY CAR. For a description of the
menu system, see MY CAR (p. 115).
Related information
•
Locking/unlocking - from the outside
(p. 178)
•
Alarm* (p. 185)
•
Remote control key - functions (p. 166)
Global opening
The global opening function opens or closes all
side windows simultaneously and can be used
for example to quickly air the car during hot
weather.
Central locking button
A long press on the symbol in the central
locking button or on the remote control key
opens all side windows simultaneously. The
same procedure on the
symbol closes all
side windows simultaneously.
Related information
•
Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 179)
•
Power windows (p. 105)
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
181
Locking/unlocking - glovebox
The glovebox (p. 152) can only be locked/
unlocked using the remote control key's detach-
able key blade.
For information on the key blade, see Detachable
key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 169).
Locking the glovebox:
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock cyl-
inder in accordance with the illustration
above.
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.
Pull out the key blade.
•
Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order.
For information on privacy locking, see Privacy
locking* (p. 171).
Related information
•
Remote control key (p. 162)
Locking/unlocking - tailgate
The tailgate can be opened, locked and
unlocked in several ways.
Manual opening
Rubber plate with electrical contact.
The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock.
To open:
1. Push down gently on the wider of the two
rubberised pressure plates under the outer
handle - the lock is released.
2. Lift the outside handle in order to fully open
the tailgate.
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
182
IMPORTANT
•
Minimal force is required to release the
rear hatch lock - just gently press the
rubberised panel.
•
Do not place the lift force on the rubber
panel when opening the rear hatch - lift
the handle. Using too much force may
damage the electrical contacts on the
rubber panel.
Unlocking with the remote control key
The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed* and
the tailgate unlocked on its own by using the
remote control key's
button.
The lock indicator (p. 164) on the instrument
panel stops flashing in order to show that not all
of the car is locked and the alarm's* level and
movement sensors and the sensors for opening
the tailgate are disconnected.
The doors remain locked and armed.
•
The tailgate is unlocked, but remains closed -
press lightly on the rubberised pressure plate
under the outer handle and lift the tailgate.
If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes
then it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed.
Unlocking the car from inside
Unlocking, tailgate
To unlock the tailgate:
–
Press the button (1) on the headlamp control
panel.
> The tailgate is unlocked and can be
opened within 2 minutes (if the car is
locked from the inside).
Locking with the remote control key
–
Press the remote control key's button for
locking
, see Remote control key - func-
tions (p. 166).
> The lock indicator on the instrument panel
starts flashing, which means that the car
is locked and the alarm* has been acti-
vated.
Related information
•
Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 179)
•
Locking/unlocking - from the outside
(p. 178)
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
183
Deadlocks*
Deadlocks
9
means that all door handles are
mechanically disengaged, which prevents doors
being opened from both inside and outside.
The deadlocks are activated with the remote con-
trol key (p. 162) and are set after an approx. ten
seconds delay after the doors have been locked.
NOTE
If a door is opened within the delay time then
the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is
deactivated.
The car can only be unlocked with the remote
control key when the deadlocks function is acti-
vated. The front left door can also be unlocked
with the detachable key blade (p. 169). In addi-
tion, it is possible to unlock and open the doors
and tailgate on cars equipped with keyless start
and lock system* by touching door handles or the
handle on the tailgate.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car with-
out first deactivating the deadlocks in order to
avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.
Temporary deactivation
Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
MY CAR
OK MENU
TUNE knob control
EXIT
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
doors must be locked from the outside, then the
deadlocks function can be temporarily switched
off. This takes place the menu system MY CAR.
For a description of the menu system, see MY
CAR (p. 115).
NOTE
•
Remember that the alarm is activated
when the car is locked.
•
If any of the doors are opened from the
inside then the alarm is triggered.
The above applies if the deadlocks have not
been deactivated temporarily.
Related information
•
Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the key blade
(p. 176)
•
Remote control key (p. 162)
9
Only in combination with alarm.
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
184
Child safety locks - manual
activation
The child safety locks prevent children from
being able to open a rear door from the inside.
Activate/deactivate child safety locks
Manual child safety locks. Not to be mixed up with man-
ual door lock (p. 178).
The child safety locks are located on the trailing
edge of the rear doors and are only accessible
when the doors are open.
To activate/deactivate the child safety locks:
–
Use the remote control key's detachable key
blade (p. 169) to turn the knob.
The door is blocked against opening from
the inside.
The door can be opened from both the out-
side and the inside.
WARNING
Each rear door has two knob controls - do not
mix up the child safety locks with manual door
locks.
NOTE
•
A door's knob control only blocks that
particular door - not both rear doors
simultaneously.
•
Cars with an electric child safety lock do
not have a manual child lock.
Related information
•
Child safety locks - electrical activation*
(p. 184)
•
Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 179)
•
Locking/unlocking - from the outside
(p. 178)
Child safety locks - electrical
activation*
Child safety locks with electrical activation pre-
vent children from opening the rear doors or win-
dows from the inside.
Activation
The child safety locks can be activated/deacti-
vated in all key positions (p. 82) higher than 0.
Activation/deactivation can be performed up to
2 minutes after switching off the engine, provided
that no door is opened.
To activate the child safety locks:
Control panel driver's door.
1. Start the engine or choose a key position
higher than 0.
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
185
2. Press the button in the driver's door control
panel.
> The combined instrument panel's informa-
tion display shows the message
Rear
child lock activated and the button's
lamp illuminates - the locks are active.
When the child safety lock is active then the rear:
•
windows can only be opened with the driver's
door control panel
•
doors cannot be opened from inside.
The current setting is stored when the engine is
switched off - if the child safety locks are acti-
vated at engine shutdown, the function will
remain activated the next time the engine is
started.
Related information
•
Child safety locks - manual activation
(p. 184)
•
Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 179)
Alarm*
The alarm is a device that warns in the event of
e.g. a break-in in the car.
Activated alarm is triggered if:
•
a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened
10
•
a movement is detected in the passenger
compartment (if fitted with a movement
detector*)
•
the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with
a tilt detector*)
•
the starter battery's cable is disconnected
•
the siren is disconnected.
If there is a fault in the alarm system then the
information display in the combined instrument
panel shows a message. In which case, contact a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec-
ommended.
NOTE
The movement sensors trigger an alarm in
the event of movement in the passenger
compartment - air currents are also regis-
tered. For this reason the alarm is triggered if
the car is left with a window or the sunroof
open or if the passenger compartment heater
is used.
To avoid this: Close the window/sunroof
when leaving the car. If the car's integrated
passenger compartment heater (or a portable
electric heater) shall be used - direct the air-
flow from the air vents so that they are not
pointing upwards in the passenger compart-
ment. Alternatively, reduced alarm level can
be used, see Reduced alarm level* (p. 187).
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or alter components
in the alarm system yourself. Any such
attempts may affect the terms of the insur-
ance.
Arming the alarm
–
Press the remote control key lock button.
Deactivate the alarm
–
Press the remote control key unlock button.
10
Applies to certain markets.
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
186
Deactivating a triggered alarm
–
Press the remote control key unlock button
or insert the remote control key in the igni-
tion switch.
Related information
•
Alarm indicator* (p. 186)
•
Alarm* - automatic re-arming (p. 186)
•
Alarm* - remote control key not working
(p. 187)
Alarm indicator*
The alarm indicator shows alarm system
(p. 185) status.
Same LED as lock indicator (p. 164).
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the
alarm system's status:
•
LED not lit – Alarm not armed
•
The LED flashes once every other second –
Alarm is armed
•
The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the
alarm (and until the remote control key is
inserted in the ignition switch and key posi-
tion I is selected) – Alarm has been trig-
gered.
Alarm* - automatic re-arming
Automatic re-arming of the alarm (p. 185) pre-
vents the car being left with the alarm disarmed
unintentionally.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control key
(and the alarm is disarmed) but none of the
doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 minutes,
then the alarm is automatically re-armed. The car
is relocked at the same time.
Related information
•
Reduced alarm level* (p. 187)
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
187
Alarm* - remote control key not
working
If the alarm (p. 185) cannot be deactivated with
the remote control key, e.g. if the key's battery
(p. 172) is discharged - the car can be
unlocked, disarmed and the engine started as
follows:
1. Open the driver's door with the detachable
key blade (p. 176).
> The alarm is triggered, the alarm indicator
(p. 186) flashes rapidly and the siren
sounds.
2. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch.
> The alarm is deactivated and the alarm
indicator goes out.
3. Start the engine.
Alarm signals*
When the alarm (p. 185) is triggered a siren
sounds and all direction indicators flash.
•
A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the
alarm is switched off. The siren has its own
battery and works independently of the car
battery.
•
The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes
or until the alarm is switched off.
Reduced alarm level*
Reduced guard means that the movement and
tilt detectors can be temporarily deactivated.
To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm
(p. 185) - e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or
during transport on a car train or car ferry - tem-
porarily deactivate the movement and tilt detec-
tors.
The procedure is the same as with the temporary
disengaging of deadlocks (p. 183)
11
.
Related information
•
Alarm indicator* (p. 186)
DRIVER SUPPORT
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
190
Adjustable steering force*
Speed related power steering causes the steer-
ing wheel force to increase with the speed of the
car in order to give the driver enhanced sensitiv-
ity.
On motorways the steering feels firmer. Steering
is light and requires no extra effort when parking
and at low speed.
The driver can choose between three different
levels of steering force for road responsiveness
or steering sensitivity in the menu system MY
CAR (p. 115):
•
Once there, search for
Steering force level
and select Low, Medium or High.
This setting is not accessible when the car is
moving.
NOTE
In certain situations the power steering may
become too hot and then needs to be tempo-
rarily cooled - during this time the power
steering operates with reduced power and
turning the steering wheel may then be per-
ceived to be slightly heavier.
In parallel with the temporarily reduced steer-
ing assistance the combined instrument panel
shows a message.
Related information
•
MY CAR (p. 115)
Electronic stability control (ESC) -
general
Stability system ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) helps the driver to avoid skidding and
improves the car's traction.
The activation of the ESC system dur-
ing braking may be noticed as a throb-
bing sound. The car may accelerate
slower than expected when the accel-
erator pedal is depressed.
WARNING
•
The stability system ESC is supplemen-
tary driver support intended to facilitate
driving and make it safer – it cannot han-
dle all situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
ESC is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgement. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropri-
ate speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
The ESC system consists of the following func-
tions:
•
Active Yaw Control
•
Spin Control
•
Traction control system
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
191
•
Engine drag control - EDC
•
Corner Traction Control - CTC
•
Trailer Stability Assist - TSA
Active Yaw Control
The function checks the driving and brake force
of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the
car.
Spin Control
The function prevents the driving wheels from
spinning against the road surface during acceler-
ation.
Traction control system
The function is active at low speed and transfers
power from the driving wheel that is spinning to
the one that is not.
Engine drag control - EDC
EDC (Engine Drag Control) prevents involuntary
wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or engine
braking when driving in low gears on slippery
road surfaces.
Involuntary wheel locking while driving can,
amongst other things, impair the driver's ability to
steer the car.
Corner Traction Control - CTC*
CTC compensates for understeer and allows
higher than normal acceleration in a bend without
wheelspin on the inner wheel, e.g. on an arcing
motorway entrance road to quickly reach the pre-
vailing traffic speed.
Trailer Stability Assist* - TSA
1
Trailer stability assist (p. 318) function is to sta-
bilise the car and trailer combination if it begins
to snake. For more information, see Driving with a
trailer* (p. 312).
NOTE
The function is deactivated if the driver
selects Sport mode.
Related information
•
Electronic stability control (ESC) - operation
(p. 191)
•
Electronic stability control (ESC) - symbols
and messages (p. 193)
Electronic stability control (ESC) -
operation
Selection of level - Sport mode
The ESC system is always activated - it cannot be
deactivated.
However, the driver can select
the Sport mode, which allows
for a more active driving experi-
ence.
Sport mode is selected in the
menu system MY CAR. For a
description of the menu system, see MY CAR
(p. 115).
In Sport mode the system detects whether the
accelerator pedal, steering wheel movements and
cornering are more active than in normal driving
and then allows controlled skidding with the rear
section up to a certain level before it intervenes
and stabilises the car.
If, for example, the driver stops a controlled skid
by releasing the accelerator pedal, then the ESC
system intervenes and stabilises the car.
With Sport mode, maximum traction is also
obtained if the car has become stuck, or when
driving on a loose surface - e.g. sand or deep
snow.
1
Trailer Stability Assist is included in the installation of Volvo genuine towbar.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
192
Sport mode is indicated in the com-
bined instrument panel by means of
this symbol illuminating with a constant
glow until the driver deselects the
function or until the engine is switched off - after
the next time the engine is started the ESC sys-
tem is back in its normal mode again.
Related information
•
Electronic stability control (ESC) - general
(p. 190)
•
Electronic stability control (ESC) - symbols
and messages (p. 193)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
193
Electronic stability control (ESC) -
symbols and messages
Table
Symbol Message Specification
ESC Temporarily OFF
ESC system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake disc temperature - the function is reactivated
automatically when the brakes have cooled.
ESC Service required
ESC system disengaged.
•
Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
and
"Message"
There is a text message in the combined instrument panel (p. 68) - Read it!
Constant glow for
2 seconds.
System check when the engine is started.
Flashing light. ESC system is being activated.
Constant glow.
Sport mode is activated.
NOTE: The ESC system is not deactivated in this mode - it is partially reduced.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
195
Speed limiter*
A Speed Limiter (Speed Limiter) can be regar-
ded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regu-
lates the speed using the accelerator pedal but
is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre-
selected/set speed by the speed limiter.
Overview
Steering wheel keypad and combined instrument panel.
Speed limiter - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored speed
is resumed.
Standby mode.
Activate and adjust the max. speed.
Selected speed.
Speed limiter active.
Related information
•
Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 195)
•
Speed limiter* - temporary deactivation and
standby mode (p. 196)
•
Speed limiter* - alarm for speed exceeded
(p. 197)
•
Speed limiter* - deactivation (p. 197)
Speed limiter* - getting started
Switch on and activate
When the speed limiter is active, its symbol (6) is
shown in combination with a mark (5) by the set
maximum speed in the combined instrument
panel.
Selection and storage of the highest possible
speed in the memory can be made both during a
journey and while stationary.
While driving
1.
Press the steering wheel button
to switch
on the speed limiter.
> The symbol (6) for speed limiter illumi-
nates in the combined instrument panel.
2. When the car is moving at the desired high-
est possible speed: Press one of the steering
wheel buttons
or until the combined
instrument panel shows a mark (5) by the
desired maximum speed.
> The speed limiter is then active and the
selected max. speed is stored in the
memory.
When stationary
1.
Press the steering wheel button
to switch
on the speed limiter.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
196
2.
Scroll with the
button until the combined
instrument panel shows a mark (5) by the
desired maximum speed.
> The speed limiter is then active and the
selected max. speed is stored in the
memory.
Related information
•
Speed limiter* (p. 195)
Speed limiter* - changing speed
Changing the stored speed
Stored max. speed is changed with short or long
presses on the
or steering wheel button.
To adjust +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph):
•
Use short presses - each press gives
+/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph).
To adjust +/- 1 km/h (+/- 1 mph):
•
Hold down the button and release it at the
required max. speed.
Last press made is stored in the memory.
Related information
•
Speed limiter* (p. 195)
Speed limiter* - temporary
deactivation and standby mode
A Speed Limiter (Speed Limiter) can be regar-
ded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regu-
lates the speed using the accelerator pedal but
is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre-
selected/set speed by the speed limiter.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
To temporarily deactivate the speed limiter and
set it in standby mode:
–
Press .
> The mark (5) in the combined instrument
panel changes colour from GREEN to
WHITE and the driver can temporarily
exceed the set maximum speed.
The speed limiter is reactivated with one
press on
. The mark (5) then changes
colour from WHITE to GREEN and the
car's maximum speed is limited once
again.
Temporary deactivation with the
accelerator pedal
The speed limiter can also be set in standby
mode with the accelerator pedal, e.g. for rapidly
accelerating the car out of a situation:
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
197
–
Depress the accelerator pedal fully.
> The combined instrument panel shows
the stored maximum speed with a col-
oured mark (5) and the driver can tempo-
rarily exceed the set maximum speed -
the mark (5) changes colour during this
time from GREEN to WHITE.
The speed limiter is automatically reacti-
vated after the release of the accelerator
pedal and the car's speed is slowed down
to below the selected/stored maximum
speed - the display's mark (5) changes
colour from WHITE to GREEN and the
car's maximum speed is again limited.
Related information
•
Speed limiter* (p. 195)
•
Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 195)
•
Speed limiter* - changing speed (p. 196)
•
Speed limiter* - deactivation (p. 197)
•
Speed limiter* - alarm for speed exceeded
(p. 197)
Speed limiter* - alarm for speed
exceeded
A Speed Limiter (Speed Limiter) can be regar-
ded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regu-
lates the speed using the accelerator pedal but
is prevented by the speed limiter from acciden-
tally exceeding a speed that is selected/set in
advance.
On a steep downhill gradient the speed limiter's
engine braking effect may be inadequate and the
selected maximum speed is exceeded. The driver
is alerted about this with an acoustic signal.
The signal is active until the driver has slowed to
below the selected maximum speed.
NOTE
The alarm is only activated after 5 seconds if
the speed has been exceeded by at least
3 km/h (approx. 2 mph), provided that neither
of the
or buttons has been depressed
during the last half minute.
Related information
•
Speed limiter* (p. 195)
•
Speed limiter* - changing speed (p. 196)
•
Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 195)
•
Speed limiter* - temporary deactivation and
standby mode (p. 196)
•
Speed limiter* - deactivation (p. 197)
Speed limiter* - deactivation
A Speed Limiter (Speed Limiter) can be regar-
ded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regu-
lates the speed using the accelerator pedal but
is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre-
selected/set speed by the speed limiter.
To deactivate the speed limiter:
–
Press the steering wheel button .
> The combined instrument panel's symbol
for speed limiter (6) and the selection of
the set speed (5) both extinguish - the
set/stored speed is thus cleared and can-
not then be resumed with the
button.
The driver can then use the accelerator
pedal to choose a speed without limita-
tion.
Related information
•
Speed limiter* (p. 195)
•
Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 195)
•
Speed limiter* - temporary deactivation and
standby mode (p. 196)
•
Speed limiter* - alarm for speed exceeded
(p. 197)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
198
Cruise control*
The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps
the driver maintain an even speed, resulting in a
more relaxed driving on motorways and long,
straight roads in regular traffic flows.
Overview
The steering wheel buttons and combined instrument
panel in cars without speed limiter
2
.
The steering wheel buttons and combined instrument
panel in cars with speed limiter
2
.
Cruise control - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored speed
is resumed.
Standby mode.
Activate and adjust the speed.
Selected speed (GREY = Standby mode).
Cruise control active - WHITE symbol (GREY
= Standby mode).
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene
when the cruise control is not maintaining a
suitable speed and/or suitable distance.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility
for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.
Related information
•
Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 199)
•
Cruise control* temporary deactivation and
standby mode (p. 199)
•
Cruise control* - resume set speed (p. 200)
•
Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 200)
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
2
A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
199
Cruise control* - managing speed
It is possible to activate, set and change the
stored speed.
Activating and setting the speed
To start the cruise control:
•
Press the steering wheel button for CRUISE
(without speed limiter) or
(with speed
limiter).
> The cruise control symbol (6) in the com-
bined instrument panel illuminates - cruise
control is in standby mode.
To activate cruise control:
•
At the required speed - press the steering
wheel button
or .
> The current speed is stored in memory and
the combined instrument panel's marking (5)
illuminates at the selected speed and the
symbol (6) changes from GREY to WHITE -
the car then follows the stored speed.
NOTE
Cruise Control cannot be enabled at speeds
below 30 km/h (20 mph).
Changing the stored speed
Stored speed is changed with short or long
presses on the
or steering wheel button.
To adjust 5 km/h (5 mph):
•
Use short presses - each press gives 5 km/h
(5 mph).
To adjust 1 km/h (1 mph):
•
Hold down the button and release it at the
required speed.
Last press made is stored in the memory.
If speed is increased using the accelerator pedal
prior to pressing the
/ button, then it is the
car's current speed when the button is pressed
that is stored.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the cruise control setting - the car returns to the
last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is
released.
NOTE
If any of the Cruise Control buttons are held
depressed for several minutes then it is
blocked and deactivated. To be able to reacti-
vate Cruise Control, the car must be stopped
and the engine restarted.
Related information
•
Cruise control* (p. 198)
Cruise control* temporary
deactivation and standby mode
The function can be temporarily deactivated and
set in standby mode.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
To temporarily disengage cruise control and set it
in standby mode:
•
Press the steering wheel button
.
> The combined instrument panel's
marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour
from WHITE to GREY - cruise control is tem-
porarily disengaged.
Standby mode due to driver
intervention
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and
automatically set in standby mode if:
•
the foot brake is used
•
the gear lever/selector is moved to N posi-
tion
•
the driver maintains speed higher than the
stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
The driver must then regulate the speed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
200
Automatic standby mode
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set
in standby mode if:
•
wheels lose traction
•
engine speed is too low/high
•
speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph).
The driver must then regulate the speed.
Related information
•
Cruise control* (p. 198)
•
Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 199)
•
Cruise control* - resume set speed (p. 200)
•
Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 200)
Cruise control* - resume set speed
The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps
the driver to maintain an even speed.
After temporary deactivation and standby
mode (p. 199) it is possible to resume the set
speed.
To reactivate the cruise control from standby
mode:
•
Press the steering wheel button
.
> The combined instrument panel's
marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour
from GREY to WHITE - the car then follows
the last stored speed.
NOTE
A marked speed increase may occur once the
speed has been resumed by selecting the
button.
Related information
•
Cruise control* (p. 198)
•
Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 199)
•
Cruise control* temporary deactivation and
standby mode (p. 199)
•
Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 200)
Cruise control* - deactivate
How it is deactivated is described here.
Cruise control is switched off with the steering
wheel button (1) or by switching off the engine -
the set/stored speed is thus cleared and cannot
then be resumed with the button.
Related information
•
Cruise control* (p. 198)
•
Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 199)
•
Cruise control* temporary deactivation and
standby mode (p. 199)
•
Cruise control* - resume set speed (p. 200)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
201
Distance Warning*
The Distance Warning function (Distance Alert)
warns the driver if the time interval to the vehicle
ahead becomes too short.
Distance Warning is active at speeds above
30 km/h (20 mph) and only reacts to vehicles
driving in front of the car, in the same direction.
No distance information is provided for oncoming,
slow or stationary vehicles.
Orange-coloured warning lamp
3
.
An orange-coloured warning lamp in the wind-
screen illuminates with a constant glow if the dis-
tance to the vehicle in front is shorter than the
set time interval.
NOTE
Distance warning is deactivated during the
time the adaptive cruise control is active.
WARNING
Distance warning only reacts if the time win-
dow to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the
preset value – the speed of the driver's vehi-
cle is not affected.
Operation
Press the button in the centre console to switch
the function on or off. The function is switched on
if one lamp is illuminated in the button.
Some combinations of the selected equipment
leave no vacant space for a button in the centre
console - in which case, the function is operated
in the car's menu system MY CAR (p. 115) -
once there, search for the
Distance Alert func-
tion.
Set time interval
Controls and symbol for time interval.
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Time interval - On.
3
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
202
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be selected
and shown in the combined
instrument panel as 1-5 hori-
zontal lines - the more lines the
longer the time interval. One
line corresponds to approxi-
mately 1 second to the vehicle in front, 5 lines
approximately 3 seconds.
The same symbol is also shown when Adaptive
cruise control (p. 205) is activated.
NOTE
The higher the speed the longer the calcula-
ted distance in metres for a given time inter-
val.
The set time interval is also used by the func-
tion adaptive cruise control (p. 205).
Only use the time intervals permitted by local
traffic regulations.
Related information
•
Distance Warning* - limitations (p. 202)
•
Distance Warning* - symbols and messages
(p. 203)
Distance Warning* - limitations
This function, which uses the same radar sensor
as Adaptive cruise control (p. 204) and Collision
warning with auto brake (p. 229), has certain lim-
itations.
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections or strong varia-
tions in light intensity, as well as wearing sun-
glasses, could mean that the warning light in
the windscreen cannot be seen.
Poor weather or winding roads could affect
the radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles
in front.
The size of other vehicles could also affect
detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This
could mean that the warning lamp illuminates
at a shorter distance than the setting or that
the warning is temporarily absent.
Extremely high speeds can also cause the
lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance than
that set due to limitations in sensor range.
For further information on radar sensor limita-
tions, see Radar sensor - limitations (p. 217) and
(p. 234).
Related information
•
Distance Warning* (p. 201)
•
Distance Warning* - symbols and messages
(p. 203)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
203
Distance Warning* - symbols and
messages
The function has certain symbols and messages
that can be shown in the combined instrument
panel if the function is reduced due to its limita-
tions.
Symbol
A
Message Specification
Radar blocked See
manual
Distance Warning temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event of heavy rain or if slush has collected
in front of the radar sensor.
Read about radar sensor limitations (p. 217).
Collision warning
Service required
Distance Warning and Collision Warning with Auto Brake fully or partially disengaged.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A
Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.
Related information
•
Distance Warning* (p. 201)
•
Distance Warning* - limitations (p. 202)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
204
Adaptive cruise control - ACC*
The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an
even speed combined with a pre-selected time
interval to the vehicle ahead.
The adaptive cruise control provides a more
relaxing driving experience on long journeys on
motorways and long straight main roads in
smooth traffic flows.
The driver sets the desired speed (p. 207) and
time interval (p. 209) to the car in front. When
the radar detector detects a slower vehicle in
front of the car, the speed is automatically adap-
ted to that. When the road is clear again the car
returns to the selected speed.
If the adaptive cruise control is switched off or
set to standby mode (p. 209) and the car comes
too close to a vehicle in front, then the driver is
warned instead by the Distance Warning (p. 201)
function about the short distance.
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene
when the adaptive cruise control is not main-
taining a suitable speed or suitable distance.
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle all
traffic, weather and road conditions.
Read all the sections about the adaptive
cruise control in the owner's manual in order
to learn about its limitations, of which the
driver should be aware before it is used.
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the correct distance and speed,
even when the adaptive cruise control is
being used.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of adaptive cruise control com-
ponents must only be performed at a work-
shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec-
ommended.
For a limited time after the service, the ACC
function can have a somewhat limited range.
The system is calibrated whilst driving and full
function returns automatically.
Automatic gearbox
Cars with automatic gearbox have enhanced
functionality with the adaptive cruise control's
Queue assistance (p. 211) function.
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - managing speed
(p. 207)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - set time interval
(p. 209)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - temporary deacti-
vation, and standby mode (p. 209)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking another
vehicle (p. 210)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate (p. 211)
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue assistance
(p. 211)
•
Radar sensor (p. 217)
•
Radar sensor - limitations (p. 217)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing and
action (p. 214)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and mes-
sages (p. 215)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
205
Adaptive cruise control* - function
Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise con-
trol system and a coordinated spacing system.
Function overview
Function overview
4
.
Warning lamp - braking by driver required
Steering wheel keypad (p. 206)
Radar sensor (p. 217)
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoid-
ance system. The driver must intervene if the
system does not detect a vehicle in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake for
humans or animals, and not for small vehicles
such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for low
trailers, oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles
and objects.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at junc-
tions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water
or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in
poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip
roads.
Distance to the vehicle ahead (p. 209) is meas-
ured primarily by a radar sensor (p. 217). The
cruise control function regulates the speed with
acceleration and braking. It is normal for the
brakes to emit a low sound when they are being
used by the adaptive cruise control.
The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the
vehicle ahead in the same lane according to what
the driver set for time interval (p. 209). If the
radar sensor cannot see any vehicle in front then
the car will instead maintain the speed set and
stored by the driver. This also takes place if the
speed of the vehicle in front exceeds the stored
speed.
The adaptive cruise control aims to control the
speed in a smooth way. In situations that demand
sudden braking the driver must brake himself/
herself. This applies with large differences in
speed, or if the vehicle in front brakes heavily.
Due to limitations in the radar sensor (p. 217)
braking may come unexpectedly or not at all.
The adaptive cruise control can be activated to
follow another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h
5
(20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph). If the
speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph) or if the
engine speed becomes too low, the cruise con-
trol is set in standby mode (p. 209) at which
automatic braking ceases - the driver must then
take over himself/herself to maintain a safe dis-
tance to the vehicle in front.
Warning lamp - braking by driver
required
Adaptive cruise control has a braking capacity
that is equivalent to approx. 40% of the car's
braking capacity.
4
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may differ depending on car model.
5
Queue Assist (p. 211) (in cars with automatic gearbox) can operate in the range 0-200 km/h (0-125 mph).
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
206
Audio-visual warning signal in the event of a collision
risk
6
.
If the car needs to be braked more heavily than
the adaptive cruise control capacity and the driver
does not brake, then the warning lamp and warn-
ing sound from the Collision warning system
(p. 229) are used in order to alert the driver that
immediate intervention is required.
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con-
trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is
not looking straight ahead may make the vis-
ual warning signal in the windscreen difficult
to recognise.
WARNING
The adaptive cruise control only warns of
vehicles which its radar unit has detected -
hence a warning may not be given, or it may
be given with a certain delay.
•
Never wait for a warning. Apply the
brakes when the situation requires.
Steep roads and/or heavy load
Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is
primarily intended for use when driving on level
road surfaces. It may have difficulty in keeping
the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when
driving on steep downhill slopes, with a heavy
load or with a trailer - in which case, be extra
attentive and ready to slow down.
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate (p. 211)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking another
vehicle (p. 210)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview
Operation of the adaptive cruise control and
steering wheel keypad varies depending on
whether or not the car is equipped with speed
limiter
7
.
Adaptive cruise control with Speed
limiter
Cruise control - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored speed
is resumed.
Standby mode
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Activate and adjust the speed.
6
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
7
A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
207
Green marking at stored speed (WHITE =
standby mode).
Time distance
ACC is active at the GREEN symbol (WHITE
= standby mode).
Adaptive cruise control without Speed
limiter
Standby mode ceases and the stored speed
is resumed.
Cruise control - On/Off or Standby mode.
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Activate and adjust the speed.
(Not used)
Green marking at stored speed (WHITE =
standby mode).
Time distance
ACC is active at the GREEN symbol (WHITE
= standby mode).
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and mes-
sages (p. 215)
Adaptive cruise control* - managing
speed
Adaptive cruise control with Speed limiter
8
.
Adaptive cruise control without Speed limiter
8
.
To start the ACC:
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
208
•
Press the steering wheel button
- a simi-
lar WHITE symbol illuminates in the com-
bined instrument panel (8) which shows that
the adaptive cruise control is in standby
mode (p. 209).
To activate ACC:
•
At the required speed - press the steering
wheel button
or .
> The current speed is stored in the memory,
the combined instrument panel shows a
"magnifying glass" (6) around the stored
speed for a second or so and its marking
changes from WHITE to GREEN.
When this symbol changes colour from
WHITE to GREEN, the ACC is active
and the car maintains the stored
speed.
Only when the symbol shows
an image of another vehicle is
the distance to the vehicle in
front controlled by the ACC.
At the same time a speed
range is marked:
•
the higher speed with GREEN marking is the
pre-programmed speed
•
the lower speed is the speed of the vehicle
in front.
Changing the stored speed
Stored speed is changed with short or long
presses on the
or steering wheel button.
To adjust +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph):
•
Use short presses - each press gives
+/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph).
To adjust +/- 1 km/h (+/- 1 mph):
•
Hold down the button and release it at the
required speed.
Last press made is stored in the memory.
If speed is increased using the accelerator pedal
prior to pressing the
/ button, then it is the
car's current speed when the button is pressed
that is stored.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
NOTE
If any of the adaptive cruise control buttons
are held depressed for several minutes then
the function is blocked and deactivated. To be
able to reactivate it, the car must be stopped
and the engine restarted.
In certain situations it cannot be reactivated -
in which case, the combined instrument panel
(p. 215) shows
Adaptive cruise control
unavailable.
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)
8
An explanation of the illustration's figures is given in the section "Adaptive cruise control - overview" (p. 206).
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
209
Adaptive cruise control* - set time
interval
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be selected
and shown in the combined
instrument panel as 1-5 hori-
zontal lines - the more lines the
longer the time interval. One
line corresponds to approxi-
mately 1 second to the vehicle in front, 5 lines
approximately 3 seconds.
To set/change the time distance:
•
Turn the thumbwheel on the steering wheel
keypad (p. 206) (or use the
/ buttons
for cars without Speed limiter).
At low speed, when the distances are short, the
adaptive cruise control increases the time interval
slightly.
The adaptive cruise control allows the time inter-
val to vary noticeably in certain situations in order
to allow the car to follow the vehicle in front
smoothly and comfortably.
Note that a short time interval only allows the
driver a short time to react and take action if any
unforeseen traffic problem should arise.
The same symbol is also shown when Distance
Warning (p. 201) function is activated.
NOTE
•
The higher the speed the longer the cal-
culated distance in metres for a given
time interval.
•
Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations.
•
If the adaptive cruise control does not
seem to respond with a speed increase
when activated, it may be because the
time window to the vehicle ahead is
shorter than the set time window.
Read more how speed is handled (p. 207).
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate (p. 211)
Adaptive cruise control* - temporary
deactivation, and standby mode
The adaptive cruise control can be temporarily
deactivated and set in standby mode.
Temporary deactivation/standby mode
- with speed limiter
To temporarily disengage the adaptive cruise
control and set it in standby mode:
•
Press the steering wheel button
This symbol and the stored speed's
marking then change colour from
GREEN to WHITE.
Temporary deactivation/standby mode
- without speed limiter
To temporarily disengage the adaptive cruise
control and set it in standby mode:
•
Press the steering wheel button
Standby mode due to driver
intervention
The adaptive cruise control is temporarily disen-
gaged and set automatically in standby mode if:
•
the foot brake is used
•
the gear selector is moved to N position
(automatic gearbox)
•
the driver maintains speed higher than the
stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
The driver must then regulate the speed.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
210
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Automatic standby mode
The adaptive cruise control is dependent on
other systems, e.g. Stability system ESC (p. 190).
If any of these systems stops working, the adap-
tive cruise control is deactivated automatically.
In the event of automatic deactivation a signal will
sound and the message
Adaptive cruise
control cancelled is shown in the combined
instrument panel. The driver must then intervene
and adapt the speed and distance to the vehicle
ahead.
An automatic deactivation can be due to:
•
the driver opens the door
•
the driver takes off his seatbelt
•
engine speed is too low/high
•
speed has fallen below 30 km/h
9
(20 mph)
•
wheels lose traction
•
brake temperature is high
•
the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet snow
or heavy rain (radar waves blocked).
Resume set speed
Adaptive cruise control in standby mode is reacti-
vated with one press on the steering wheel but-
ton
- the speed is then set to the last stored
speed.
NOTE
A pronounced increase in speed may occur
after the cruise control has been reactivated
with the
button.
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206)
•
Cruise control* (p. 198)
Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking
another vehicle
When the car is following another vehicle and the
driver indicates an impending overtaking
manoeuvre with the direction indicator
10
, the
adaptive cruise control helps to briefly accelerate
the car towards the vehicle in front.
The function is active at speeds above 70 km/h
(43 mph).
WARNING
Be aware that this function can be activated
in more situations than during overtaking, e.g.
when a direction indicator is used to indicate
a change of lane or exit to another road – the
car will then accelerate briefly.
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)
9
Does not apply to a car with Queue assistance - it can go all the way down to 0 km/h.
10
On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
211
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate
Keypad with Speed limiter
The adaptive cruise control is switched off with
the steering wheel button
in the steering
wheel keypad (p. 206) - the set/stored speed is
thus cleared and cannot then be resumed with
the
button.
Keypad without Speed limiter
With a short press on the steering wheel button
the adaptive cruise control is set in standby
mode (p. 209). It is switched off with an addi-
tional short press - the set/stored speed is thus
cleared and cannot then be resumed with the
button.
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and mes-
sages (p. 215)
Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue
assistance
Queue assistance also provides the adaptive
cruise control with enhanced functionality at
speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph).
The adaptive cruise control is supplemented by
the queue assistance function (also called
"Queue Assist").
Queue assistance has the following functions:
•
Extended speed range - also at lower than
30 km/h (20 mph) and at stationary
•
Change of target
•
Automatic braking ceases when stationary
•
Automatic activation parking brake.
Note that the lowest programmable speed for the
adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h (20 mph) -
even though it is capable of following another
vehicle down to 0 km/h, a speed lower than
30 km/h (20 mph) cannot be selected/stored.
Extended speed range
NOTE
In order to activate the adaptive cruise control,
the driver's door must be closed and the
driver must be wearing the seatbelt.
The adaptive cruise control can follow another
vehicle within the range 0-200 km/h
(0-125 mph).
NOTE
A vehicle in front must be within a reasonable
distance in order to enable activation of the
adaptive cruise control at a speed lower than
30 km/h (20 mph).
For shorter stops in connection with inching in
slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is automati-
cally resumed if the stops do not exceed about
3 seconds - if it takes longer before the car in
front starts moving again then the Adaptive
cruise control is set in standby mode with auto-
matic braking. The driver must then reactivate it
in one of the following ways:
•
Press the steering wheel button
...or...
•
Depress the accelerator pedal.
> The adaptive cruise control will then resume
following the vehicle in front.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
212
NOTE
The Queue Assist function can hold the car
stationary for a maximum of 4 minutes - then
the parking brake is applied and the adaptive
cruise control is disengaged.
•
The parking brake must be released
before the adaptive cruise control can be
reactivated.
Change of target
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there
may be stationary traffic in front.
When the adaptive cruise control is following
another vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h
(20 mph) and the target is changed from a mov-
ing vehicle to a stationary vehicle, the adaptive
cruise control will brake for the stationary vehicle.
WARNING
When the adaptive cruise control is following
a vehicle in front at speeds in excess of
30 km/h (20 mph) and the target is changed
from a vehicle in front to a stationary vehicle,
the adaptive cruise control will ignore the sta-
tionary vehicle and instead select the stored
speed.
•
The driver must intervene him/herself and
brake.
Automatic standby mode with change
of target
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged and set
in standby mode:
•
when the speed is below 5 km/h (5 mph)
and the adaptive cruise control is uncertain
whether the target object is a stationary vehi-
cle or some other object, e.g. a speed bump.
•
when the speed is below 5 km/h (5 mph)
and the vehicle in front turns off so the adap-
tive cruise control no longer has a vehicle to
follow.
Termination of automatic braking at a
standstill
In certain situations, queue assistance stops
automatic braking at a standstill. This means that
the brakes are released and the car may start to
roll - the driver must therefore intervene and
brake the car himself/herself in order to maintain
its position.
Queue assistance releases the foot brake and
sets the adaptive cruise control in standby mode
in the following situations:
•
the driver puts his/her foot on the brake
pedal
•
the parking brake is applied
•
the gear selector is moved to P, N or R posi-
tion
•
the driver sets the adaptive cruise control in
standby mode.
Automatic activation parking brake
In certain situations queue assistance applies the
parking brake in order to keep the car remaining
stationary.
This takes place if:
•
the driver opens the door or takes off his/her
seatbelt
•
ESC is changed from Normal to Sport
mode
•
Queue assistance has held the car stationary
for more than 4 minutes
•
the engine is switched off
•
the brakes have overheated.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
214
Adaptive cruise control* - fault
tracing and action
If the combined instrument panel shows the mes-
sage
Radar blocked See manual then it
means that the adaptive cruise control's radar
sensor (p. 217) cannot detect other vehicles in
front of the car.
This message indicates that neither of the func-
tions for Distance Alert (p. 201) or Collision
Warning with Auto Brake (p. 229) are working.
The following table presents examples of possi-
ble causes for a message being shown along
with the appropriate action:
Cause Action
The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.
Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals. No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar
signals.
No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy road sur-
face.
The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains. Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no longer
blocked.
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and mes-
sages (p. 215)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
215
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols
and messages
Sometimes the adaptive cruise control may dis-
play a symbol and/or text message. Here are
some examples - follow the recommendation
given if appropriate:
Symbol Message Specification
The symbol is GREEN The car maintains the stored speed.
The symbol is WHITE Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode.
Standard cruise control is selected manually.
Set ESC to Normal to ena-
ble Cruise
The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated until the Stability system (ESC) (p. 190) has been set in Nor-
mal mode.
Adaptive cruise control can-
celled
The adaptive cruise control has been deactivated - the driver has to regulate the speed himself.
Adaptive cruise control
unavailable
The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated.
This could be due to:
•
brake temperature is high
•
the radar sensor is blocked by e.g. wet snow or rain.
Radar blocked See manual
The adaptive cruise control is temporarily disengaged.
•
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if
slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Read about radar sensor limitations (p. 217).
Adaptive cruise control
Service required
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged.
•
Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
216
Symbol Message Specification
Press brake to hold vehicle
+ acoustic alarm
A
The car is stationary and the cruise control will release the foot brake to allow the parking brake to take over
and hold the car, but a fault in the parking brake means the car will shortly begin to roll.
•
The driver must brake himself/herself. The message remains and the alarm sounds until the driver depres-
ses the brake pedal or uses the accelerator pedal.
Below 30 km/h Lead vehicle
required
A
Shown in the event of attempts to activate the adaptive cruise control at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph)
without a vehicle in front within the activation distance.
A
Only with Queue Assist.
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
217
Radar sensor
The function of the radar sensor is to detect cars
or larger vehicles in the same direction, in the
same lane.
The radar sensor is used by the following func-
tions:
•
Distance Warning*
•
Adaptive cruise control*
•
Collision Warning System with Auto Brake
and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection*
IMPORTANT
In the event of visible damage to the car's
grille, or if you suspect that the radar sensor
may be damaged:
•
Contact a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
The function may completely or partially dis-
appear - or malfunction - if the grille, the
radar sensor or its bracket is damaged or has
loosened.
Modification of the radar sensor could result in it
being illegal to use.
Related information
•
Radar sensor - limitations (p. 217)
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
•
Collision warning system* (p. 229)
•
Distance Warning* (p. 201)
Radar sensor - limitations
A radar sensor (p. 217) has certain limitations -
due to its limited field of vision for example.
The capacity of the adaptive cruise control to
detect a vehicle in front is significantly reduced if:
•
the speed of vehicles in front is significantly
different from your own speed
•
its radar sensor becomes blocked - e.g. in
heavy rain or slush, or if other objects have
collected in front of the radar sensor.
NOTE
Keep the area in front of the radar sensor
clean - see subheading "Maintenance"
(p. 233).
Field of vision
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In
some situations another vehicle is not detected,
or the detection is made later than expected.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
218
ACC field of vision.
Sometimes the radar sensor is late at detect-
ing vehicles at close distances - e.g. a vehicle
that drives in between the car and vehicles in
front.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehi-
cles not driving in the centre of the lane can
remain undetected.
In bends the radar sensor may detect the
wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle from
view.
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene
when the adaptive cruise control is not main-
taining a suitable speed or suitable distance.
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle all
traffic, weather and road conditions.
Read all the sections about the adaptive
cruise control in the owner's manual in order
to learn about its limitations, of which the
driver should be aware before it is used.
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the correct distance and speed,
even when the adaptive cruise control is
being used.
WARNING
Accessories or other objects such as auxiliary
lamps must not be fitted in front of the grille.
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoid-
ance system. The driver must intervene if the
system does not detect a vehicle in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake for
humans or animals, and not for small vehicles
such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for
oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and
objects.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at junc-
tions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water
or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in
poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip
roads.
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
•
Collision warning system* (p. 229)
•
Distance Warning* (p. 201)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
219
Type approval - radar system
Type approval for the car's radar units can be
seen in the following table.
Market
ACC
A
BLIS
B
Symbol Type approval
Brazil
✓
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário, isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra
interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo e não pode causar
interferência a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
Modelo: L2C0038TR
1071-10-3451
EAN: 07897843800248
✓
Modelo: L2C0055TR
1500-15-8065
EAN: 07897843840978
Europe
✓ ✓
Hereby, Delphi Electronics & Safety declares that L2C0038TR / L2C0055TR are in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive
1999/5/EC.
The Declaration of Conformity may be consulted at Delphi Electronics & Safety / 2151 E.
Lincoln Road / Kokomo, Indiana 46902 USA
The United Arab Emi-
rates
✓
TRA
REGISTERED No: 0018923/09
DEALER No: DA37380/15
✓
TRA
REGISTERED No: ER37357/15
DEALER No: DA37380/15
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
220
Market
ACC
A
BLIS
B
Symbol Type approval
Indonesia
✓
14785/POSTEL/2010 1982
✓
38806/SDPPI/2015 4927
Jordan
✓
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2009/87
Equipment type: Low Power Device (LPD)
✓
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2015/3
Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)
Korea
✓
Certification No.
DPH-L2C0038TR
✓
Certification No.
MSIP-CMI-DPH-L2C0055TR
Morocco
✓
AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numero d'agrement : MR 4838 ANRT 2009
Date d'agrement : 22/05/2009
✓
AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC
NUMÉRO D’AGRÉMENT: MR 9929 ANRT 2014
DATE D’AGRÉMENT: 26/12/2014
Moldavia
✓ ✓
1024
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
222
City Safety™
City Safety™ is a function for helping the driver
to avoid a collision when driving in queues,
amongst other things, when changes in the traf-
fic ahead, combined with a lapse in attention,
could lead to an incident.
The City Safety™ function is active at speeds
below 50 km/h (30 mph) and it helps the driver
by automatically braking the car in the event of
imminent risk of collision with vehicles in front,
should the driver not react in time by braking
and/or steering away.
City Safety™ is activated in situations where the
driver should have started braking earlier, which
is why it cannot help the driver in every situation.
City Safety™ is designed to be activated as late
as possible in order to avoid unnecessary inter-
vention.
City Safety™ must not be used as an excuse for
the driver to change his/her driving style. If the
driver solely relies on City Safety™ to do the
braking, there might be a risk of a collision
sooner or later.
The driver or passengers normally only notice City
Safety™ if a situation arises where the car is
extremely close to being in a collision.
If the car is also equipped with Collision Warning
with Auto Brake (p. 229)* these two systems
complement each other.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance and replacement of City
Safety™ components must only be per-
formed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
WARNING
City Safety™ does not engage in all driving
situations or traffic, weather or road condi-
tions.
City Safety™ does not react to vehicles driv-
ing in a different direction from the car, to
small vehicles and motorcycles or to humans
and animals.
City Safety™ can prevent collision at a speed
difference of less than 15 km/h (9 mph) - at
a higher speed difference, it is only possible
to reduce collision speed. In order to obtain
full brake function, the driver must depress
the brake pedal.
Never wait for City Safety™ to engage. The
driver always bears responsibility for maintain-
ing the proper distance and speed.
Related information
•
City Safety™ - limitations (p. 224)
•
City Safety™ - function (p. 223)
•
City Safety™ - operation (p. 223)
•
City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 226)
•
City Safety™ - symbols and messages
(p. 228)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
223
City Safety™ - function
City Safety detects the traffic in front of the car
with a laser sensor fitted in the top edge of the
windscreen. If there is an imminent risk of colli-
sion, City Safety will automatically brake the car,
which may be experienced as heavy braking.
Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window
11
.
If the speed difference is 4-15 km/h (3-9 mph)
in relation to the vehicle in front then City Safety
can completely avoid a collision.
City Safety activates a short, sharp braking proce-
dure and stops the car in normal circumstances,
just behind the vehicle in front. For most drivers
this is well outside normal driving style and may
be experienced as being uncomfortable.
If the difference in speed between the vehicles is
greater than 15 km/h (9 mph) then City Safety
may not avoid the collision on its own - to obtain
full brake force, the driver must depress the
brake pedal and this could then make it possible
to avoid a collision, even at speed differences
above 15 km/h (9 mph).
When the function is activated and brakes, the
combined instrument panel shows a text mes-
sage to the effect that the function is/has been
active.
NOTE
When City Safety brakes, the brake lights
come on.
Related information
•
City Safety™ - limitations (p. 224)
•
City Safety™ (p. 222)
•
City Safety™ - operation (p. 223)
•
City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 226)
•
City Safety™ - symbols and messages
(p. 228)
City Safety™ - operation
City Safety™ is a function for helping the driver
to avoid a collision when driving in queues,
amongst other things, when changes in the traf-
fic ahead, combined with a lapse in attention,
could lead to an incident.
On and Off
NOTE
The City Safety™ function is activated auto-
matically when the engine is started.
In certain situations, it may advisable to disable
City Safety™, e.g. where leafy branches could
sweep over the bonnet and/or windscreen.
City Safety™ handled in the menu system MY
CAR (p. 115) and after starting the engine the
function can be deactivated as follows:
•
Search in MY CAR for
Driver support
system and select the Off option at City
Safety.
However, the function will be enabled the
next time the engine is started, regardless of
whether the system was enabled or disabled
when the engine was switched off.
11
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
224
WARNING
The laser sensor also transmits laser light
when City Safety™ is disabled manually.
Related information
•
City Safety™ (p. 222)
•
City Safety™ - limitations (p. 224)
•
City Safety™ - function (p. 223)
•
City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 226)
•
City Safety™ - symbols and messages
(p. 228)
•
MY CAR (p. 115)
City Safety™ - limitations
The sensor in City Safety is designed to detect
cars and other large vehicles in front of the car
irrespective of whether it is day or night.
However, the function does have some limita-
tions.
The sensor's limitations mean that City Safety
has poorer functionality - or none at all - in e.g.
heavy snowfall or rain, dense fog, dust storms or
white-out situations. Misting, dirt, ice or snow on
the windscreen may also disrupt the function.
Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for pro-
jecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary
lamps and bull bars that are higher than the bon-
net limit the function.
The laser beam from the sensor in City Safety
measures how the light is reflected. The sensor
cannot detect objects with low reflection capacity.
The rear sections of the vehicle generally reflect
the light sufficiently thanks to the number plate
and rear light reflectors.
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is
extended, which may reduce the capacity of City
Safety to avoid a collision. In such situations the
ABS
12
and ESC
13
systems will provide best pos-
sible braking force with maintained stability.
When your own car is reversing, City Safety is
temporarily deactivated.
City Safety is not activated at low speeds - below
4 km/h (3 mph), which is why the system does
not intervene in situations where a vehicle in front
is being approached very slowly, e.g. when park-
ing.
Driver commands are always prioritised, which is
why City Safety does not intervene in situations
where the driver is steering or accelerating in a
clear manner, even if a collision is unavoidable.
When City Safety has prevented a collision with a
stationary object the car remains stationary for a
maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car is braked for
a vehicle in front that is moving, then speed is
reduced to the same speed as that maintained by
the vehicle in front.
On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops
when City Safety has stopped the car, unless the
driver manages to depress the clutch pedal
beforehand.
12
(Anti-lock Braking System) - Anti-lock braking system.
13
(Electronic Stability Control) - Stability system.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
225
NOTE
•
Keep the windscreen surface in front of
the laser sensor free from ice, snow and
dirt (see the illustration for sensor loca-
tion (p. 223)).
•
Do not affix or mount anything on the
windscreen in front of the laser sensor.
•
Remove ice and snow from the bonnet -
snow and ice must not exceed a height
of 5 cm.
Fault tracing and action
If the message Windscreen sensors blocked
See manual is shown in the combined instru-
ment panel it indicates that the laser sensor is
blocked and cannot detect vehicles in front of the
car. This means in turn that City Safety is not
operational.
The
Windscreen sensors blocked See
manual message is not shown for all situations
in which the laser sensor is blocked. The driver
must therefore be diligent about keeping the
windscreen and area in front of the laser sensor
clean.
The following table presents possible causes for
the message being shown, along with sugges-
tions for appropriate action.
Cause Action
The windscreen surface
in front of the laser sen-
sor is dirty or covered
with ice or snow.
Clean the wind-
screen surface in
front of the sensor
from dirt, ice and
snow.
The laser sensor field of
vision is blocked.
Remove the block-
ing object.
IMPORTANT
If there are cracks, scratches or stone chips in
the windscreen in front of either of the laser
sensor's "windows" and they cover a surface
of approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm (or larger), then a
workshop must be contacted for replacement
of the windscreen (see the illustration for
sensor location (p. 223)) - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Failure to take action may result in reduced
performance for City Safety™.
To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or
reduced operation for City Safety™, the fol-
lowing also applies:
•
Volvo recommends that you do not repair
cracks, scratches or stone chips in the
area in front of the laser sensor - instead,
the whole windscreen should be
replaced.
•
Before replacing a windscreen, contact
an authorised Volvo workshop to verify
that the correct windscreen is ordered
and fitted.
•
The same type or Volvo-approved wind-
screen wipers must be fitted during
replacement.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
226
Related information
•
City Safety™ (p. 222)
•
City Safety™ - function (p. 223)
•
City Safety™ - operation (p. 223)
City Safety™ - laser sensor
The City Safety™ function includes a sensor
which transmits laser light (see illustration
(p. 223) for sensor location). Contact a qualified
workshop in the event of a fault or if the laser
sensor needs servicing - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended. It is absolutely
essential to follow the prescribed instructions
when handling the laser sensor.
The following two labels relate to the laser sen-
sor:
The upper label in the figure describes the laser
beam's classification:
•
Laser radiation - Do not look into the laser
beam with optical instruments - Class 1M
laser product.
The lower label in the figure describes the laser
beam's physical data:
•
IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies
with FDA (U.S. Food Administration) stand-
ards for laser product design with the excep-
tion of deviations in accordance with "Laser
Notice No. 50" from 26 July 2001.
Radiation data for the laser sensor
The following table specifies the laser sensor's
physical data.
Maximum pulse energy
2.64 µJ
Maximum average output 45 mW
Pulse duration 33 ns
Divergence (horizontal x vertical) 28° × 12°
DRIVER SUPPORT
227
WARNING
If any of these instructions are not followed
then there is a risk of eye injury!
•
Never look into the laser sensor (which
emits spreading invisible laser radiation)
at a distance of 100 mm or closer with
magnifying optics such as a magnifying
glass, microscope, lens or similar optical
instruments.
•
Testing, repair, removal, adjustment
and/or replacement of the laser sensor's
spare parts must only be carried out by a
qualified workshop - we recommend an
authorised Volvo workshop.
•
To avoid exposure to harmful radiation, do
not carry out any readjustments or main-
tenance other than those specified here.
•
The repairer must follow specially drawn
up workshop information for the laser
sensor.
•
Do not remove the laser sensor (this
includes removing the lenses). A removed
laser sensor does not fulfil laser class 3B
as per standard IEC 60825-1. Laser
class 3B is not eye-safe and therefore
entails a risk of injury.
•
The laser sensor's connector must be
unplugged before removal from the wind-
screen.
•
The laser sensor must be fitted onto the
windscreen before the sensor's connec-
tor is plugged in.
•
The laser sensor transmits a laser light
when the remote control key is in key
position II (p. 83) even if the engine is
switched off.
Related information
•
City Safety™ (p. 222)
•
City Safety™ - limitations (p. 224)
•
City Safety™ - function (p. 223)
•
City Safety™ - operation (p. 223)
•
City Safety™ - symbols and messages
(p. 228)
DRIVER SUPPORT
228
City Safety™ - symbols and
messages
In conjunction with automatic braking by the City
Safety™ (p. 222) system, one or more symbols
may illuminate in the combined instrument panel
and a text message may be shown. A text mes-
sage can be acknowledged by briefly pressing
the OK button on the direction indicator stalk.
Symbol Message Meaning/Action
Auto braking by City Safety
City Safety™ is braking or has automatically braked.
Windscreen sensors blocked See manual
The laser sensor is temporarily non-operational because something is blocking it.
•
Remove the object blocking the sensor and/or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor.
Read about laser sensor limitations (p. 224).
City Safety Service required
City Safety™ is not operational.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
City Safety™ (p. 222)
•
City Safety™ - limitations (p. 224)
•
City Safety™ - function (p. 223)
•
City Safety™ - operation (p. 223)
•
City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 226)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
229
Collision warning system*
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist
and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the
driver when there is a risk of colliding with a
pedestrian, cyclist or vehicle in front that are sta-
tionary or moving in the same direction.
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist
and Pedestrian Detection" is activated in situa-
tions where the driver should have started brak-
ing earlier, which is why it cannot help the driver
in every situation.
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist
and Pedestrian Detection" is designed to be acti-
vated as late as possible in order to avoid unnec-
essary intervention.
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist
and Pedestrian Detection" can prevent a collision
or reduce collision speed.
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist
and Pedestrian Detection" must not be used as
an excuse for the driver to change his/her driving
style. If the driver solely relies on Collision Warn-
ing with Auto Brake to do the braking, there
might be a risk of a collision sooner or later.
Two system levels
Depending on how the car is equipped, the "Col-
lision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and
Pedestrian Detection" function may appear in
two variants:
Level 1
The driver is merely warned
14
of occurring obsta-
cles by means of visual and acoustic signals - no
automatic braking intervenes, the driver must
himself brake.
Level 2
The driver is warned of occurring obstacles by
means of visual and acoustic signals - the car is
braked automatically if the driver himself does not
act within a reasonable time.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of the internal components of
the "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" must only
be performed at a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Collision warning system* - function (p. 230)
•
Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians (p. 232)
•
Collision warning system* - detection of
cyclists (p. 231)
•
Collision warning system* - operation
(p. 233)
•
Collision warning system* - limitations
(p. 235)
•
Collision warning system* - camera sensor
limitations (p. 236)
•
Collision warning system* - symbols and
messages (p. 238)
14
No warning for cyclists with "Level 1".
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
230
Collision warning system* - function
Function overview
15
.
Audio-visual warning signal in the event of a
collision risk.
Radar sensor
16
Camera sensor
Collision Warning with Auto Brake executes
three steps in the following order:
1.
Collision warning
2.
Brake support
16
3.
Auto Brake
16
The collision warning system and City Safety™
(p. 222) complement each other.
1 - Collision warning
The driver is first warned of a potentially immi-
nent collision.
The collision warning system can detect pedes-
trians, cyclists or vehicles that are stationary or
moving in the same direction as your car and are
located in front of you.
If there is a risk of collision with a pedestrian,
cyclist or a vehicle then the driver's attention is
attracted with a flashing red warning signal (1)
and an acoustic signal.
2 - Brake support
16
If the risk of collision has increased further after
the collision warning then the brake support is
activated.
This means that the brake system is prepared for
rapid braking by applying the brakes lightly, which
may feel like a slight jolt.
If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently
quickly then full brake function is implemented.
Brake support also reinforces the driver's braking
if the system considers that the braking is not
sufficient to avoid a collision.
3 - Auto Brake
16
The automatic brake function is activated last.
If in this situation the driver has not yet started to
take evasive action and the risk of collision is
imminent then the automatic braking function is
deployed - this takes place irrespective of
whether or not the driver brakes. Braking then
takes place with full brake force in order to
reduce collision speed, or with limited brake force
if it is sufficient to avoid a collision. For cyclists,
the warning and full brake intervention may come
very late or simultaneously.
15
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
16
With system Level 2 only.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
231
WARNING
The collision warning system does not
engage in all driving situations or traffic,
weather or road conditions. The collision
warning system does not react to vehicles or
cyclists driving in another direction to the car
or to animals.
Warning only activated in the event of a high
risk for collision. This section "Function" and
the section "Limitations" inform about limita-
tions that the driver must be aware of before
using the Collision Warning system with Auto
Brake.
Warnings and brake interventions for pedes-
trians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle
speeds above 80 km/h (50 mph).
Warnings and brake interventions for pedes-
trians and cyclists do not work in darkness
and tunnels - not even when streetlights are
lit.
The auto-brake function can prevent a colli-
sion or reduce collision speed. To ensure full
brake performance, the driver should always
depress the brake pedal - even when the car
auto-brakes.
Never wait for a collision warning. The driver is
always responsible that the correct distance
and speed are maintained - even when the
collision warning system with auto-brake is
used.
Related information
•
Collision warning system* (p. 229)
Collision warning system* -
detection of cyclists
The function only "sees" cyclists from behind, who are
travelling in the same direction.
Optimum examples of what the system interprets as a
cyclist - with clear body and bicycle contours, directly
from behind and in the car's centre line.
Optimal performance of the system requires that
the system function that detects a cyclist
receives as unambiguous information as possible
about the body and bicycle contours - this implies
the opportunity to identify the bicycle, head, arms,
shoulders, legs, upper and lower body combined
with a normal human pattern of movement.
If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle are
not visible to the function's camera then the sys-
tem cannot detect a cyclist.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
232
•
For the function to be able to detect a cyclist,
he/she must be an adult and riding an "adult
bicycle".
•
The bicycle must be equipped with a highly
visible and approved
17
rearward-facing red
reflector, fitted at least 70 cm above the
roadway.
•
The function can only detect cyclists directly
from behind and who are travelling in the
same direction - not at an angle from behind,
not from the side.
•
Cyclists travelling on the left or right-hand
edge of the car's imagined/extended side
lines may be detected late or not at all.
•
The function's capacity to detect cyclists at
dusk and dawn is limited - just like the
human eye.
•
The function's capacity to detect cyclists is
deactivated when driving in darkness and
tunnels - even when streetlights are lit.
•
For optimum bicycle detection, the City
Safety™ function must be activated, see City
Safety™ (p. 222).
WARNING
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Cyclist
Detection is a means of assistance.
The function cannot detect:
•
all cyclists in all situations and does not
see partially obscured cyclists, for exam-
ple.
•
cyclists in clothing that obscures the con-
tours of the body or who are approaching
from the side.
•
bicycles that have no rearward-facing red
reflector.
•
bicycles loaded with large objects.
The driver is always responsible that the vehi-
cle is driven properly and with a safety dis-
tance adapted to the speed.
Related information
•
Collision warning system* (p. 229)
Collision warning system* -
detection of pedestrians
Optimal examples of what the system regards as pedes-
trians with clear body contours.
Optimal performance of the system requires that
the system function that detects pedestrians
receives as unambiguous information as possible
about the contours of the body - this implies the
opportunity to identify the head, arms, shoulders,
legs, upper and lower body combined with a nor-
mal human pattern of movement.
If large parts of the body are not visible to the
function's camera then the system cannot detect
a pedestrian.
17
The reflector must fulfil the recommendations and conditions of the traffic authority in the market in question.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
233
•
In order for a pedestrian to be detected
he/she must appear full-length and have a
height of at least 80 cm.
•
The camera sensor's ability to see pedes-
trians at dusk and dawn is limited - just like
the human eye.
•
The camera sensor's capacity to detect
pedestrians is deactivated when driving in
darkness and tunnels - even when street-
lights are lit.
WARNING
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is a means
of assistance. The function cannot detect all
pedestrians in all situations and does not see,
for example:
•
partially obscured pedestrians, people in
clothing that hides their body contour or
pedestrians shorter than 80 cm.
•
pedestrians who are carrying larger
objects.
The driver is always responsible that the vehi-
cle is driven properly and with a safety dis-
tance adapted to the speed.
Related information
•
Collision warning system* (p. 229)
Collision warning system* -
operation
Warning signals On and Off
1. Acoustic and visual warning signal in the event of a
collision risk
18
.
You can select whether the collision warning sys-
tem's acoustic and visual warning signals should
be switched on or off.
When starting the engine, the setting that was
selected when the engine was switched off is
obtained automatically.
NOTE
The Brake Support and Auto Brake functions
are always enabled - they cannot be deacti-
vated.
Settings for the collision warning system are
made via the centre console's screen and the
menu system MY CAR, see (p. 115).
Light and acoustic signals
When the collision warning system's light and
acoustic warnings are activated, the warning lamp
(no. [1] in previous illustration) is tested each
time the engine is started by briefly illuminating
the warning lamp's separate points of light.
After starting the engine, both the light and
acoustic signals can be switched off:
•
Search for
Collision warning in Driver
support system in the menu system MY
CAR (p. 115) - and there select to uncheck
the function.
Acoustic signal
After starting the engine the warning sound can
be activated/deactivated separately:
•
Search for
Warning sound in Collision
warning in the menu system MY CAR
(p. 115) - and there select On or Off.
Following which, the collision warning system is
only indicated with a light signal.
18
The illustration is schematic - car model and details may differ.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
234
Set warning distance
The warning distance regulates the distance at
which the visual and acoustic warnings are
deployed.
•
Search for
Warning distance in Collision
warning in the menu system MY CAR
(p. 115) - and there select Long, Normal or
Short.
The warning distance determines the system's
sensitivity. Warning distance
Long provides an
earlier warning. First test with Long and if this
setting produces too many warnings, which could
be perceived as irritating in certain situations,
then change to warning distance Normal.
Only use warning distance Short in exceptional
cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.
NOTE
When the adaptive cruise control is in use the
warning lamp and warning sound will be used
by the cruise control even if the collision
warning system is switched off.
The collision warning system warns the driver
in the event of a risk of a collision, but the
function cannot shorten driver reaction time.
In order for the collision warning system to be
effective - always drive with Distance Warning
(p. 201) set at time interval 4–5.
NOTE
Even if the warning distance has been set to
Long warnings could be perceived as being
late in certain situations, e.g. when there are
large differences in speed or if vehicles in
front brake heavily.
WARNING
No automatic system can guarantee 100 %
correct function in all situations. Therefore,
never test Collision Warning with Auto Brake
by driving at people or vehicles - this may
cause severe damage and injury and risk lives.
Checking settings
The current settings can be controlled via the
centre console's screen and the menu system
(p. 115) MY CAR.
Maintenance
Camera and radar sensor
19
.
For the sensors to work correctly, they must be
kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be cleaned
regularly with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will
reduce their function and may prevent meas-
urement.
Related information
•
Collision warning system* (p. 229)
19
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
235
Collision warning system* -
limitations
The function has certain limitations - for example,
it is not active until 4 km/h (3 mph).
The collision warning system's visual warning sig-
nal (see (1) in the illustration (p. 230)) may be
difficult to notice in the event of strong sunlight,
reflections, when sunglasses are being worn or if
the driver is not looking straight ahead. The warn-
ing sound should therefore always be activated.
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is
extended, which may reduce the capacity to avoid
a collision. In such situations the ABS and ESC
(p. 190) systems will provide best possible brak-
ing force with maintained stability.
NOTE
The visual warning signal can be temporarily
disengaged in the event of high passenger
compartment temperature caused by strong
sunlight for example. If this occurs then the
warning sound is activated even if it is deacti-
vated in the menu system.
•
Warnings may not appear if the distance
to the vehicle in front is small or if steer-
ing wheel and pedal movements are
large, e.g. a very active driving style.
WARNING
Warnings and brake interventions could be
implemented late or not at all if the traffic sit-
uation or external influences mean that the
radar or camera sensor cannot detect a
pedestrian, a vehicle or a cyclist in front cor-
rectly.
The sensor system has a limited range for
pedestrians and cyclists
20
- the system can
give effective warnings and brake interven-
tions for them at vehicle speeds up to
50 km/h (30 mph). For stationary or slow-
moving vehicles, warnings and brake interven-
tions are effective at vehicle speeds up to
70 km/h (43 mph).
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving vehi-
cles could be disengaged due to darkness or
poor visibility.
Warnings and brake interventions for pedes-
trians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle
speeds exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).
The collision warning system uses the same
radar sensors as the Adaptive cruise control
(p. 204). Read more about radar sensor limita-
tions (p. 217).
If warnings are perceived as being too frequent
or disturbing then the warning distance can be
reduced (p. 233). This would lead to the system
warning at a later stage, which reduces the total
number of warnings.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily
deactivated with reverse gear engaged.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not acti-
vated at low speeds - below 4 km/h (3 mph),
which is why the system does not intervene in sit-
uations where the car is approaching a vehicle in
front very slowly, e.g. when parking.
In situations where the driver demonstrates
active, aware driving behaviour, a collision warn-
ing may be postponed slightly in order to keep
unnecessary warnings to a minimum.
When Auto Brake has prevented a collision with
a stationary object the car remains stationary for
a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car is braked
for a vehicle in front that is moving, then speed is
reduced to the same speed as that maintained by
the vehicle in front.
On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops
when Auto Brake has stopped the car, unless the
driver manages to depress the clutch pedal
beforehand.
Related information
•
Collision warning system* (p. 229)
20
For cyclists, the warning and full brake intervention may come very late or simultaneously.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
236
Collision warning system* - camera
sensor limitations
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist
and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the
driver when there is a risk of colliding with a
pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are
stationary or moving in the same direction.
The function uses the car's camera sensor,
which has certain limitations.
The car’s camera sensor is also used - as well as
by Collision Warning with Auto Brake - by the
functions:
•
Active main beam (p. 95)
•
Road sign information (p. 244)
•
Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 249)
•
Lane assistance (p. 252)
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the
camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist and
dirt.
Do not stick or attach anything to the wind-
screen in front of the camera sensor as this
may reduce effectiveness or cause one or
more of the systems dependent on the cam-
era to stop working.
The camera sensors have limitations similar to
the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in darkness,
heavy snowfall or rain and in thick fog for exam-
ple. Under such conditions the functions of cam-
era-dependent systems could be significantly
reduced or temporarily disengaged.
Strong oncoming light, reflections in the carriage-
way, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty road
surfaces or unclear lane markings could also sig-
nificantly reduce camera sensor function when it
is used to scan the carriageway and detect
pedestrians and other vehicles.
The field of vision of the camera sensor is limited,
which is why pedestrians, cyclists and vehicles
cannot be detected in some situations, or they
are detected later than anticipated.
During very high temperatures the camera is
temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes
after the engine is started in order to protect
camera functionality.
Fault tracing and action
If the display shows the message Windscreen
sensors blocked See manual then this means
that the camera sensor is blocked and cannot
detect pedestrians, cyclists, vehicles or road
markings in front of the car.
At the same time, this means that - besides Colli-
sion Warning with Auto Brake - the following
functions will not have full functionality either:
•
Active main beam
•
Driver Alert Control
•
Lane Keeping Aid
•
Road sign information
The following table presents possible causes for
a message being shown along with the appropri-
ate action.
Cause Action
The windscreen sur-
face in front of the
camera is dirty or cov-
ered with ice or snow.
Clean the windscreen
surface in front of the
camera from dirt, ice
and snow.
Thick fog, heavy rain
or snow means that
the camera does not
work sufficiently well.
No action. At times
the camera does not
work during heavy rain
or snowfall.
The windscreen sur-
face in front of the
camera has been
cleaned but the mes-
sage remains.
Wait. It may take sev-
eral minutes for the
camera to measure
the visibility.
Dirt has appeared
between the inside of
the windscreen and
the camera.
Visit a workshop to
have the windscreen
inside the camera
cover cleaned - an
authorised Volvo
workshop is recom-
mended.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
238
Collision warning system* - symbols
and messages
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist
and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the
driver when there is a risk of colliding with a
pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are
stationary or moving in the same direction.
Symbol
A
Message Specification
Collision warning sys-
tem OFF
Collision warning system switched off.
Shown when the engine is started.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
Collision warning sys-
tem Unavailable
The collision warning system cannot be activated.
Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
Auto Braking was acti-
vated
Auto Brake has been active.
The message clears after one press of the OK button.
Windscreen sensors
blocked See manual
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
•
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 236).
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
239
Symbol
A
Message Specification
Radar blocked See
manual
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if slush
has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Read about radar sensor limitations (p. 217).
Collision warning Serv-
ice required
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A
Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.
Related information
•
Collision warning system* (p. 229)
•
Collision warning system* - function (p. 230)
•
Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians (p. 232)
•
Collision warning system* - detection of
cyclists (p. 231)
•
Collision warning system* - operation
(p. 233)
•
Collision warning system* - limitations
(p. 235)
•
Collision warning system* - camera sensor
limitations (p. 236)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
240
BLIS*
BLIS (Blind Spot Information) is a function
designed for providing support for the driver
when driving in dense traffic on roads with sev-
eral lanes in the same direction.
BLIS is a driver's aid intended to provide a warn-
ing about:
•
vehicles in the car's blind spot
•
rapidly approaching vehicles in the left and
right-hand lanes closest to the car.
The BLIS function CTA (p. 242) (Cross Traffic
Alert) is a driver's aid intended to provide a warn-
ing about:
•
crossing traffic when the car is reversed.
WARNING
BLIS is a supplementary aid and does not
work in all situations.
BLIS is no substitute for a safe driving style
and the use of rearview and door mirrors.
BLIS can never replace the driver's responsi-
bility and attention - it is always the driver's
responsibility to change lanes in a safe man-
ner.
Overview
BLIS lamp location
21
.
Indicator lamp
BLIS symbol
NOTE
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car
where the system has detected the vehicle. If
the car is overtaken on both sides at the
same time then both lamps illuminate.
Maintenance
The sensors for the BLIS functions are located
inside the rear wing/bumper on each corner of
the car.
Keep this surface clean - also on the left-hand side.
•
To ensure optimal functionality the areas in
front of the sensors must be kept clean.
Related information
•
BLIS* - operation (p. 241)
•
BLIS - symbols and messages (p. 244)
•
CTA* (p. 242)
21
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
241
BLIS* - operation
BLIS (Blind Spot Information) is a function
designed for providing support for the driver
when driving in dense traffic on roads with sev-
eral lanes in the same direction.
Activate/deactivate BLIS
BLIS is activated when the engine is started. This
is confirmed by the indicator lamps in the door
panels flashing once.
Button for activating/deactivating.
The BLIS function can be deactivated/activated
by pressing the BLIS button on the centre con-
sole.
Some combinations of the selected equipment
leave no vacant space for a button in the centre
console - in which case the function is handled
by the car's menu system MY CAR (p. 115).
When BLIS is deactivated/activated the lamp in
the button extinguishes/illuminates and the com-
bined instrument panel confirms the change with
a text message. The door panel indicator lamps
flash once upon activation.
To extinguish the message:
•
Press the left stalk switch OK button.
or
•
Wait approx. 5 seconds - the message extin-
guishes.
When BLIS operates
Principle for BLIS: 1. Zone in blind spot. 2. Zone for rap-
idly approaching vehicle.
The BLIS function is active at speeds above
10 km/h (6 mph).
The system is designed to react when:
•
the driver's vehicle is overtaken by other
vehicles
•
the driver's vehicle is rapidly caught up by
another vehicle.
When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a
quickly approaching vehicle in zone 2, the door
panel BLIS lamp illuminates with a constant glow.
If the driver activates the direction indicator on
the same side as the warning in this situation
then the BLIS lamp will change from a constant
glow to flashing with a more intense light.
WARNING
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is being
reversed.
Limitations
•
Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can
reduce functionality and make it impossible
to provide warnings. BLIS cannot detect haz-
ards if it is covered.
•
Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the
area of the sensors.
•
BLIS is deactivated when a trailer is con-
nected to the car's electrical system.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
242
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' com-
ponents or repainting the bumpers must only
be performed by a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
BLIS* (p. 240)
•
BLIS - symbols and messages (p. 244)
CTA*
The BLIS function CTA (Cross Traffic Alert) is a
driver aid intended to warn about crossing traffic
when the car is reversing. CTA is a supplement
to BLIS (p. 240).
Activate/deactivate CTA
CTA is activated when the engine is started. This
is confirmed by the indicator lamps for BLIS in
the door panels flashing once.
On/Off for parking assistance and CTA sensors.
The CTA function can be deactivated/activated
separately with the Parking assistance (p. 256)
On/Off button. The BLIS lamps flash once on
reactivation.
However, the BLIS function remains activated
after the CTA has been deactivated.
WARNING
CTA is a supplementary aid and does not
work in all situations.
CTA is no substitute for a safe driving style
and the use of rearview and door mirrors.
CTA can never replace the driver's responsi-
bility and attention - it is always the driver's
responsibility to reverse in a safe manner.
When CTA operates
Principle for CTA.
CTA supplements the BLIS function by being
able to see crossing traffic from the side during
reversing, such as when reversing out of a park-
ing space.
CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles. In
favourable conditions, it may also be able to
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
243
detect smaller objects, such as cyclists and
pedestrians.
CTA is only active during reversing and is acti-
vated automatically when the gearbox's reverse
position is selected.
•
If CTA detects something approaching from
the side, an acoustic warning signal sounds.
The signal comes from either the left or the
right-hand speaker, depending on the direc-
tion from which the object is approaching.
•
CTA also warns by illuminating the BLIS
lamps.
•
An additional warning is provided in the form
of an illuminated icon in the display screen's
PAS graphics (p. 256).
Limitations
CTA does not perform optimally in all situations,
but has a certain limitation - for example, the CTA
sensors cannot "see" through other parked vehi-
cles or obstructing objects.
Here are some examples of when CTA's "field of
vision" may be limited from the beginning and
approaching vehicles cannot therefore be
detected until they are very close:
The car is parked deep inside a parking slot.
Blind CTA sector.
Sector where CTA can detect/"see".
In an angled parking slot CTA can be completely "blind"
on one side.
However, when the driver is slowly reversing the
car, the angle is changed in relation to the vehi-
cle/object that is blocking, at which the blind
sector rapidly decreases.
Examples of further limitations:
•
Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can
reduce functionality and make it impossible
to provide warnings. CTA cannot detect haz-
ards if it is covered.
•
CTA is deactivated when a trailer is con-
nected to the car’s electrical system.
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' com-
ponents or repainting the bumpers must only
be performed by a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Maintenance
The sensors for the BLIS and CTA functions are
located inside the rear wing/bumper on each
corner of the car.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
244
Keep this surface clean - also on the left-hand side.
•
To ensure optimal functionality the areas in
front of the sensors must be kept clean.
•
Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the
area of the sensors.
Related information
•
BLIS* (p. 240)
•
BLIS - symbols and messages (p. 244)
BLIS - symbols and messages
In situations where the BLIS (Blind Spot
Information) (p. 240) and CTA (Cross Traffic
Alert) (p. 242) functions fail or are interrupted,
the combined instrument panel may show a sym-
bol, supplemented by an explanatory message.
Follow any recommendation given.
Message examples:
Message Specification
CTA OFF
CTA is manually switched off -
BLIS is active.
BLIS and
CTA OFF
Trailer
attached
BLIS and CTA are temporarily
non-operational because a
trailer is connected to the
car's electrical system.
BLIS and
CTA Service
required
BLIS and CTA are non-opera-
tional.
•
Visit a workshop if the
message remains - an
authorised Volvo work-
shop is recommended.
A text message can be acknowledged by briefly
pressing the OK button on the direction indicator
stalk.
Related information
•
BLIS* (p. 240)
Road Sign Information (RSI)*
The Road Sign Information function (RSI – Road
Sign Information) helps the driver to remember
which speed-related road signs the car has
passed.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
245
Examples of readable speed related signs
22
.
The RSI function gives information on current
speed, e.g. that a motorway or road is starting/
ending and when overtaking is prohibited.
If both a sign for motorway/road for motorised
traffic and a sign showing the maximum permit-
ted speed are passed, RSI decides to show the
sign symbol for maximum permitted speed.
WARNING
•
The Road Sign Information function is
supplementary driver support intended to
facilitate driving and make it safer – it
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
•
Road Sign Information is not a substitute
for the driver's attention and judgement.
The driver is always responsible for
ensuring the car is driven in a safe man-
ner, at the appropriate speed, with an
appropriate distance to other vehicles,
and in accordance with current traffic
rules and regulations.
RSI On/Off
The function for Road Sign Information is select-
able - the driver can select On or Off.
Activate RSI as follows:
1. Search and locate the function in the menu
system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115).
2.
Highlight
Road sign information by press-
ing the OK/MENU button once and go back
out with EXIT.
Related information
•
Road Sign Information (RSI)* - operation
(p. 246)
•
Road Sign Information (RSI)* - limitations
(p. 248)
22
Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
246
Road Sign Information (RSI)* -
operation
The Road Sign Information function (RSI
23
) reg-
isters and shows road signs in different ways
depending on the sign and the situation.
Recorded speed information
24
.
When RSI has recorded a road sign with an
imposed speed, the combined instrument panel
displays the sign as a symbol.
Together with the symbol for
the current speed limit, a sign
24
showing that overtaking is pro-
hibited may also be displayed
where appropriate.
End of speed limit or motorway
When RSI detects an "indirect speed sign" that
means end of current speed limit - e.g. at end of
motorway - a symbol with the corresponding road
sign is shown in the combined instrument panel.
Examples of indirect speed sign
24
are:
End of all restrictions.
End of motorway.
The symbol in the combined instrument panel
extinguishes after 10-30 seconds and remains
extinguished until the next speed-related sign is
passed.
Changed speed limit
On passing a direct speed sign when the speed
limit changes, a symbol with the corresponding
road sign is shown in the combined instrument
panel.
Example of a direct speed
sign
24
.
The symbol in the combined instrument panel
extinguishes after approx. 5 minutes and remains
extinguished until the next speed-related sign is
passed.
Sensus Navigation
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation,
speed information is read from the navigation
unit in the following cases:
•
On detection of signs that indirectly indicate
a speed limit, such as motorway, dual car-
riageway and city limit signs.
•
If a previously detected speed sign is
assumed not to apply any longer, but no new
sign has been detected.
23
Road Sign Information
24
Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
247
Additional signs
Examples of additional signs
24
.
Sometimes different speed limits are signposted
for the same road - an additional sign then indi-
cates the circumstances under which the differ-
ent speeds apply. The road section may be par-
ticularly susceptible to accidents in rain and/or
fog, for example.
An additional sign relating to rain is displayed
only if the windscreen wipers are in use.
The speed applicable on an exit
is indicated in certain markets
by means of an additional sign
containing an arrow.
Speed signs linked to this type
of additional sign are displayed
only if the driver is using the direction indicator.
Some speeds are applicable
only after e.g. a specific dis-
tance or at a certain time of
day. The driver's attention is
drawn to the situation by
means of a symbol for an addi-
tional sign under the symbol
showing speed.
A symbol for additional sign in
the form of an empty frame
under the combined instrument
panel's speed symbol
24
means
that RSI has detected an addi-
tional sign with supplementary
information for the current
speed limit.
Speed Alert On/Off
The Speed Limit Warning subfunction for RSI
is selectable - the driver can select On or Off.
The speed warning is given in
the form of the combined
instrument panel's symbol
24
for
maximum permitted speed
temporarily flashing when the
speed is exceeded by 5 km/h
(5 mph) or more.
Activate Speed alert as follows:
1. Search and locate the function in the menu
system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115).
2.
Highlight
Speed alert by pressing the OK/
MENU button once and go back out with
EXIT.
Related information
•
Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 244)
•
Road Sign Information (RSI)* - limitations
(p. 248)
•
MY CAR (p. 115)
24
Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
248
Road Sign Information (RSI)* -
limitations
The Road Sign Information (RSI
25
) function may
have limitations in certain situations.
The camera sensor for RSI has limitations just
like the human eye. Find out more about this in
the section on the camera sensor limitations
(p. 236)).
Signs which indirectly provide information on a
prevailing speed limit, e.g. name signs for towns/
districts, are not recorded by RSI.
Examples of factors that can reduce RSI are as
follows:
•
Faded signs
•
Signs positioned on bends
•
Rotated or damaged signs
•
Signs positioned high above the roadway
•
Fully/partially obscured or poorly positioned
signs
•
signs completely or partly covered with frost,
snow and/or dirt
•
digital road maps
26
are out-of-date, inaccu-
rate or have no speed information
27
.
Related information
•
Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 244)
•
Road Sign Information (RSI)* - operation
(p. 246)
Driver Alert System*
The Driver Alert System is intended to assist dri-
vers whose driving ability is deteriorating or who
are inadvertently leaving the lane they are driving
on.
The Driver Alert System consists of different
functions which can either be switched on at the
same time or individually:
•
Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 250).
•
Lane Departure Warning - LDW (p. 252).
A switched-on function is set in standby mode
and is not activated automatically until speed
exceeds 65 km/h (40 mph).
The function is deactivated again when speed
decreases to below 60 km/h (37 mph).
Both functions use a camera which is dependent
on the lane having side markings painted on
each side.
WARNING
Driver Alert System does not work in all situa-
tions but is designed merely as a supplemen-
tary aid.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility
for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.
25
Road Sign Information
26
In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation.
27
Map data with speed information does not exist for all areas.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
249
Related information
•
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 249)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 252)
Driver Alert Control (DAC)*
The DAC function is intended to attract the driv-
er's attention when he/she starts to drive less
consistently, e.g. if he/she becomes distracted
or starts to fall asleep.
The objective for DAC is to detect slowly deterio-
rating driving ability and it is primarily intended for
major roads. The function is not intended for city
traffic.
A camera detects the side markings painted on
the carriageway and compares the section of the
road with the driver's steering wheel movements.
The driver is alerted if the vehicle does not follow
the carriageway evenly.
In some cases driving ability is not affected
despite driver fatigue. In which case there may
not be any warning issued for the driver. For this
reason it is always important to stop and take a
break in the event of any signs of driver fatigue,
irrespective of whether or not DAC issues a
warning.
NOTE
The function must not be used to extend a
period of driving. Always plan breaks at regu-
lar intervals, and make sure you are well
rested.
Limitation
In some cases the system may issue a warning
despite driving ability not deteriorating, for exam-
ple:
•
in strong side winds
•
on rutted road surfaces.
NOTE
The camera sensor has certain limitations
(p. 236).
Related information
•
Driver Alert System* (p. 248)
•
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation
(p. 250)
•
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and
messages (p. 251)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
250
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* -
operation
Settings are made from the centre console dis-
play screen and its menu system.
On/Off
The Driver Alert function can be set in standby
mode via the menu system MY CAR (p. 115):
•
Checked box - function activated.
•
Unchecked box - the function is deactivated.
Function
Driver Alert is activated when speed exceeds
65 km/h (40 mph) and remains active as long as
the speed is above 60 km/h (37 mph).
If the vehicle is being driven erratically,
the driver is notified by an acoustic sig-
nal plus the text message
Driver Alert
Time for a break - the linked symbol
is illuminated in the combined instrument panel
at the same time. The warning is repeated after a
time if driving ability does not improve.
The warning symbol can go off:
•
Press the left stalk switch OK button.
WARNING
An alarm from Driver Alert Control should be
taken very seriously, as a sleepy driver is often
not aware of his/her own condition.
If the alarm sounds or you feel fatigued:
•
Stop the car safely as soon as possible
and rest.
Studies have shown that it is just as danger-
ous to drive while tired as it is to drive under
the influence of alcohol or other stimulants.
Related information
•
Driver Alert System* (p. 248)
•
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 249)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
251
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* -
symbols and messages
DAC (p. 249) can show symbols and text mes-
sages on the combined instrument panel or in
the centre console's display screen in different
situations.
Here are some examples:
Symbol
A
Message Specification
Driver Alert Time for a break
The vehicle has been driven inconsistently - the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.
Windscreen sensors blocked See
manual
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
•
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 236).
Driver Alert system Service required
The system is disengaged.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A
Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.
Related information
•
Driver Alert System* (p. 248)
•
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 249)
•
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation
(p. 250)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
252
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*
The purpose of Lane Departure Warning (Lane
Departure Warning) is to help the driver to
reduce the risk of the vehicle accidentally leaving
its own lane in certain situations on motorways
and similar major routes.
Principle for LDW
(The figure is schematic - not model specific.)
A camera reads the side lines of the road/lane.
If the car crosses one of the side lines the driver
is alerted with an acoustic signal.
NOTE
The driver is only warned once each time the
wheels cross a line. So there is no acoustic
alarm when there is a line between the car's
wheels.
WARNING
Lane assistance is merely a driver aid and
does not engage in all driving situations or
traffic, weather or road conditions.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility
for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely
and that applicable laws and road traffic regu-
lations are followed.
Related information
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function
(p. 252)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - operation
(p. 253)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limitations
(p. 254)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols
and messages (p. 255)
•
Driver Alert System* (p. 248)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) -
function
Certain settings can be made for the Lane
Departure Warning (Lane Departure Warning)
function.
Off & On
Press the centre console's button to activate or
deactivate the function. The button's lamp illumi-
nates when the function is switched on.
This function is complemented in the combined
instrument panel with intuitive graphics in differ-
ent situations.
Personal preferences
Settings are made from the centre console's
screen via the menu system in MY CAR. For a
description of the menu system, see MY CAR
(p. 115).
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
253
Select from the options:
•
On at startup - The function is set in
standby mode each time the engine is
started. Otherwise the same value as when
the engine was switched off is obtained.
•
Increased sensitivity - The sensitivity
increases, an alarm is triggered earlier and
fewer limitations apply.
Related information
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 252)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) -
operation
Lane Departure Warning (Lane Departure
Warning) is complemented in the combined
instrument panel with intuitive graphics in differ-
ent situations. Here are some examples:
LDW function side lines.
•
The LDW symbol has WHITE side lines - the
function is active and detects/"sees" one
side line, or both.
•
The LDW symbol has GREY side lines - the
function is active but detects neither left nor
right side line.
or
•
The LDW symbol has GREY side lines - the
function is in standby mode because the
speed is below 65 km/h (40 mph).
•
The LDW symbol has no side lines - the
function is deactivated.
Related information
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 252)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
254
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) -
limitations
Lane Departure Warning (Lane Departure
Warning) camera sensor has limitations in a sim-
ilar way to the human eye.
For more information, read about camera sensor
limitations (p. 236).
NOTE
There are some situations where LDW does
not give any warning, such as:
•
Direction indicators are switched on
•
The driver has his/her foot on the brake
pedal
28
•
In the event of rapid depression of the
accelerator pedal
28
•
In the event of rapid steering wheel
movements
28
•
If turning is so sharp that the car rolls.
Related information
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 252)
28
When "
Increased sensitivity" is selected a warning is still given, see Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function (p. 252).
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
255
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) -
symbols and messages
In situations where there is no Lane assistance
function, a symbol may be shown in the com-
bined instrument panel in combination with an
explanatory message - follow the recommenda-
tion given if appropriate.
Message examples:
Symbol Message Specification
Lane Departure Warning ON/Lane Depar-
ture Warning OFF
The function is switched on/off.
Shown at switch-on/off.
The text disappears after approx. 5 seconds.
Windscreen sensors blocked See manual
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
•
Clean the windscreen in front of the camera sensor.
Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 236).
Driver Alert system Service required
The system is disengaged.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 252)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
256
Park Assist*
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.
An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the
centre console's screen indicate the distance to
the detected obstacle.
Parking assistance sound level can be adjusted
during the ongoing acoustic signal using the cen-
tre console's VOL knob. The sound level can also
be adjusted in the audio settings menu, which is
accessed by pressing SOUND or in the car's
menu system (p. 115) MY CAR
29
.
Parking assistance is available in two variants:
•
Rear only
•
Both front and rear.
NOTE
When a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, the protrusion of the towbar
is included when the function measures the
parking space.
WARNING
•
The Park Assist function is supplemen-
tary driver support intended to facilitate
driving and make it safer – it cannot han-
dle all situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The parking sensors have blind spots
where obstacles cannot be detected.
•
Be particularly aware of people and ani-
mals near the car.
•
The Park Assist system is not a substitute
for the driver's attention and judgement.
The driver is always responsible for
ensuring the car is driven in a safe man-
ner, at the appropriate speed, with an
appropriate distance to other vehicles,
and in accordance with current traffic
rules and regulations.
Related information
•
Park assist syst* - function (p. 256)
•
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 258)
•
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 257)
•
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 259)
•
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 259)
•
Park assist camera* (p. 260)
Park assist syst* - function
The parking assistance system is automatically
activated when the engine is started - the
switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If parking
assistance is switched off with the button, the
lamp goes out.
On/Off for parking assistance and CTA*.
If the car is equipped with CTA (p. 242) the indi-
cator lamps flash for BLIS (p. 240) once, then
parking assistance is activated using the button.
29
Depending on the audio and media system.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
257
Display screen view - showing an obstacle left front and
right rear.
The centre console's display screen shows an
overview of the relationship between the car and
detected obstacle.
Marked sectors show which of the four sensor(s)
detected an obstacle. The closer to the car sym-
bol a selected sector box is, the shorter the dis-
tance between the car and a detected obstacle.
The frequency of the signal increases the shorter
the distance to an obstacle, in front of or behind
the car. Other sound from the audio system is
muted automatically.
When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is
constant and the active sensor's field nearest the
car is filled in. If the detected obstacle is within
the distance for the constant tone both behind
and in front of the car, then the tone sounds
alternately from the loudspeakers.
IMPORTANT
Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or low
barriers may be in the "signal shadow" and
are then temporarily not detected by the sen-
sors - the pulsating tone may then unexpect-
edly stop instead of changing over to the
expected constant tone.
The sensors cannot detect high objects, such
as projecting loading docks.
•
In such situations, pay extra attention and
manoeuvre/reposition the car particularly
slowly or stop the current parking
manoeuvre - there may be a high risk of
damage to vehicles or other objects since
information from the sensors is not
always reliable in such situations.
Related information
•
Park Assist* (p. 256)
•
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 258)
•
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 257)
•
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 259)
•
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 259)
•
Park assist camera* (p. 260)
Park assist syst* - backward
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.
An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the
centre console's screen indicate the distance to
the detected obstacle.
The distance covered to the rear of the car is
about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for obsta-
cles behind comes from one of the rear loud-
speakers.
Rear parking assistance is activated when
reverse gear is engaged.
When reversing with e.g. a trailer on the towbar,
rear parking assistance is switched off automati-
cally - otherwise the sensors would react to the
trailer.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
258
NOTE
When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike car-
rier on the towbar - without Volvo genuine
trailer wiring - parking assistance may need to
be switched off manually in order that the
sensors do not react to them.
Related information
•
Park Assist* (p. 256)
•
Park assist syst* - function (p. 256)
•
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 258)
•
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 259)
•
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 259)
•
Park assist camera* (p. 260)
Park assist syst* - forward
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.
An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the
centre console's screen indicate distance to
detected obstacles.
The parking assistance system is automatically
activated when the engine is started - the
switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If parking
assistance is switched off with the button, the
lamp goes out.
The distance covered in front of the car is about
0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for obstacles in
front comes from one of the front loudspeakers.
The front parking assistance system is active up
to 10 km/h (6 mph).
If the Parking Assistance System is deactivated
because the car is moving too quickly - 11 km/h
(7 mph) or above - the function is reactivated
when the speed falls below 10 km/h (6 mph).
NOTE
Parking assistance is deactivated when the
parking brake is applied or P mode is
selected in a car with an automatic gearbox.
IMPORTANT
When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember
that these must not obscure the sensors - the
auxiliary lamps may then be perceived as an
obstacle.
Related information
•
Park Assist* (p. 256)
•
Park assist syst* - function (p. 256)
•
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 257)
•
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 259)
•
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 259)
•
Park assist camera* (p. 260)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
259
Park assist syst* - fault indication
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.
An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the
centre console's screen indicate the distance to
the detected obstacle.
If the combined instrument panel's
information symbol illuminates with
constant glow and the text message
Park Assist System Service required is
shown then parking assistance is disengaged.
IMPORTANT
In certain conditions the parking assistance
system may produce incorrect warning sig-
nals that are caused by external sound
sources with the same ultrasonic frequencies
that the system works with.
Examples of such sources include horns, wet
tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, exhaust
noises from motorcycles, etc.
Related information
•
Park Assist* (p. 256)
•
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 259)
•
Park assist syst* - function (p. 256)
•
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 258)
•
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 257)
•
Park assist camera* (p. 260)
Park assist syst* - cleaning the
sensors
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.
An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the
centre console's screen indicate the distance to
the detected obstacle.
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure
that they work properly. Clean them with water
and car shampoo.
Sensor location, front.
Sensor location, rear.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
cause incorrect warning signals, reduced or
no function.
Related information
•
Park Assist* (p. 256)
•
Park assist syst* - function (p. 256)
•
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 258)
•
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 257)
•
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 259)
•
Park assist camera* (p. 260)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
260
Park assist camera*
Parking camera is an auxiliary system, which is
activated when the reverse gear is selected.
The camera image is shown on the centre con-
sole's screen.
NOTE
When a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, the protrusion of the towbar
is included when the function measures the
parking space.
WARNING
•
The parking camera function is supple-
mentary driver support intended to facili-
tate driving and make it safer – it cannot
handle all situations in all traffic, weather
and road conditions.
•
The parking cameras have blind spots
where obstacles cannot be detected.
•
Be particularly aware of people and ani-
mals near the car.
•
Objects/obstacles on the display screen
may be closer to the car than they appear
to be on the screen.
•
The parking cameras are not a substitute
for the driver's attention and judgement.
The driver is always responsible for
ensuring the car is driven in a safe man-
ner, at the appropriate speed, with an
appropriate distance to other vehicles,
and in accordance with current traffic
rules and regulations.
Function and operation
Camera location next to the opening handle.
The camera shows what is behind the car and if
something appears from the sides.
The camera shows a wide area behind the car
and part of the bumper and any towbar.
Objects on the screen may appear to tilt slightly -
this is normal.
NOTE
Objects on the display screen may be closer
to the car than they appear to be on the
screen.
If another view is active then the parking camera
system takes over automatically and its camera
image is displayed on the screen.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
261
When reverse gear is selected, two unbroken
lines are shown graphically which illustrate where
the car's rear wheels will roll with the current
steering wheel angle - this facilitates parallel
parking, reversing into tight spaces and for hitch-
ing a trailer. The car's approximate external
dimensions are illustrated by means of dashed
lines. The park assist lines can be deactivated -
see section Settings (p. 263).
If the car is also equipped with Parking assis-
tance sensors (p. 256)* then their information is
shown graphically as coloured areas in order to
illustrate distances to detected obstacles, see
heading "Cars with reversing sensors" later in the
text.
The camera is active approx. 5 seconds after
reverse gear has been disengaged or until the
car's speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph) forward or
35 km/h (22 mph) backward.
Light conditions
The camera image is adjusted automatically
according to prevailing light conditions. Because
of this, the image may vary slightly in brightness
and quality. Poor light conditions can result in a
slightly reduced image quality.
NOTE
Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow and
ice to ensure optimum function. This is partic-
ularly important in poor light.
Park assist lines
Examples of how the park assist lines can be displayed
for the driver.
The lines on the screen are projected as if they
were at ground level behind the car and are
directly related to steering wheel movement,
which shows the driver the path the car will then
take - also when the car is turning.
NOTE
•
When reversing with a trailer which is not
connected electrically to the car, the lines
on the display show the route the car will
take - not the trailer.
•
The screen shows no lines when a trailer
is connected electrically to the car's elec-
trical system.
•
The parking camera is deactivated auto-
matically when towing a trailer if a Volvo
genuine trailer cable is used.
IMPORTANT
Remember, that with the rear camera view
selected, the monitor only displays the area
behind the car. Be aware of the sides and
front of the car when manoeuvring in reverse.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
262
Boundary lines
The system's different lines.
Boundary line, free reversing zone
"Wheel tracks"
The dashed line (1) frames in a zone up to
about 1.5 m back from the bumper. It is also the
limit of the car's most protruding parts, such as
door mirrors and corners - also when the car is
turning.
The wide "wheel tracks" (2) between the side
lines indicate where the wheels will roll and can
extend about 3.2 m back from the bumper if no
obstacle is in the way.
Cars with reversing sensors*
Coloured fields (one per sensor) show distance.
If the car is also equipped with Parking assis-
tance (p. 256) the distance is shown with col-
oured fields for each sensor that registers an
obstacle.
The colour of the areas changes with decreasing
distance to the obstacle - from light yellow to yel-
low, via orange to red.
Colour / paint Distance (metres)
Light yellow 0,7–1,5
Yellow 0,5–0,7
Orange 0,3–0,5
Red 0–0.3
Related information
•
Park assist camera - settings (p. 263)
•
Park assist camera - limitations (p. 263)
•
Park Assist* (p. 256)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
263
Park assist camera - settings
Activate switched-off camera
The camera starts automatically when reverse
gear is selected, but it can also be activated man-
ually as follows:
•
Press CAM - the screen shows the current
camera view.
Change setting
The settings for the parking camera can be
changed when the screen shows a camera view:
1.
Press OK/MENU when a camera view is
shown - the screenchanges to a menu with
various options.
2.
Turn to reach the desired option with TUNE.
3.
Highlight the option by pressing OK/MENU
once and go back out with EXIT.
Towbar
The camera can be used to advantage when
hitching a trailer. A park assist line for the tow-
bar's intended "trajectory" toward the trailer can
be shown on the screen - exactly as for the
"wheel tracks".
A choice can be made between showing the
"wheel tracks" or the towbar's trajectory - both
options cannot be shown simultaneously.
1.
Press OK/MENU when a camera view is
shown.
2.
Turn to reach the
Tow bar trajectory guide
line option with TUNE.
3.
Highlight the option by pressing OK/MENU
once and go back out with EXIT.
Zoom
If precise manoeuvring is required then the cam-
era view can be zoomed in:
•
Press CAM or turn TUNE - repeated press/
turn changes back to the normal view.
If more options are available, they are in a loop
- press/turn until the desired camera view is
shown.
Related information
•
Park assist camera* (p. 260)
•
Park Assist* (p. 256)
Park assist camera - limitations
NOTE
A bike carrier or other accessory mounted on
the rear of the car could obscure the cam-
era's view.
To bear in mind
Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it only
looks like a relatively small part of the image is
obscured, it could be a relatively large sector that
is hidden from view. Obstacles could thereby go
undetected until they are very close to the car.
•
Keep the camera lens free from dirt, ice and
snow.
•
Clean the camera lens regularly with luke-
warm water and car shampoo - take care not
to scratch the lens.
Related information
•
Park assist camera* (p. 260)
•
Park assist camera - settings (p. 263)
•
Park Assist* (p. 256)
STARTING AND DRIVING
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
266
Starting the engine
The engine is started and switched off using the
remote control key and the START/STOP
ENGINE button.
Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/
inserted. and START/STOP ENGINE button.
IMPORTANT
Do not press in the remote control key incor-
rectly turned - hold the end with the detacha-
ble key blade, see Detachable key blade -
detaching/attaching (p. 169).
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch and press it in to its end position.
2.
Depress the brake pedal fully
1
.
3.
Press the START/STOP ENGINE button
and then release it.
When the engine is started the starter motor
works until the engine is started or until its over-
heating protection triggers.
When starting the engine in normal conditions
the car's electric drive motor is prioritised - the
diesel engine remains switched off. This means
that after pressing the START/STOP ENGINE
button the electric motor has "started" and the
car is ready to drive. A started motor is indicated
by the combined instrument panel's indicator
lamps extinguishing and its preset theme illumi-
nating (see Digital combined instrument panel -
overview (p. 69)).
However, there are situations where the diesel
engine is started instead, e.g. in the event of the
temperature being too low or if the hybrid battery
needs charging.
IMPORTANT
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts -
wait for 3 minutes before making a further
attempt. Starting capacity increases if the bat-
tery is allowed to recover.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch after starting the engine or
when the car is being towed.
WARNING
Always remove the remote control key from
the ignition switch when leaving the car, and
make sure that the key position is 0 - in par-
ticular if there are children in the car. For
information on how this works - see Key posi-
tions (p. 82).
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher
than normal for certain engine types during
cold starting. This is done in order that the
emissions system can reach normal operating
temperature as quickly as possible, which
minimises exhaust emissions and protects the
environment.
Keyless starting (Keyless drive)*
Follow steps 2-3 for keyless (p. 173) starting of
the engine.
1
If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the engine.
STARTING AND DRIVING
267
NOTE
A prerequisite for the engine to start is that
one of the car's remote control keys with the
keyless start and lock function is in the pas-
senger compartment or cargo area.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from
the car while driving or during towing.
Related information
•
Switching off the engine (p. 267)
Switching off the engine
The engine is switched off using the START/
STOP ENGINE button.
To stop the engine:
•
Press START/STOP ENGINE - the engine
stops.
If the gear selector is not in P position or if the
car is moving:
•
Press twice on START/STOP ENGINE or
hold the button depressed until the engine
stops.
Related information
•
Key positions (p. 82)
Steering lock
The steering lock makes steering difficult if the
car is e.g. taken unlawfully. A mechanical noise
may be noticed when the steering lock unlocks
or locks.
Function
•
The steering lock is activated when the driv-
er's door is opened after the engine has
been switched off.
•
The steering lock is deactivated when the
remote control key is in the ignition switch
2
and the START/STOP ENGINE button is
depressed.
Related information
•
Starting the engine (p. 266)
•
Key positions (p. 82)
•
Steering wheel (p. 89)
2
In cars with keyless start and lock system it is enough to have a remote control key inside the passenger compartment.
STARTING AND DRIVING
268
Jump starting with another battery
If the starter battery (p. 380) is discharged then
the car can be started with current from another
battery.
When jump starting the car, the following steps
are recommended to avoid short circuits or other
damage:
1. Set the car's electrical system in key position
0, see Key positions - functions at different
levels (p. 83).
IMPORTANT
After key position 0: Wait approx. 2 minutes
before connecting the donor battery, in order
to allow the control system to first set the
necessary parameters.
2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage of
12 V.
3. If the donor battery is installed in another car
- switch off the donor car's engine and make
sure that the two cars do not touch each
other.
4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps
to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).
IMPORTANT
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid
short circuits with other components in the
engine compartment.
5. Open the clips on the front cover of the bat-
tery in your car
and remove the cover.
6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp
onto the car's positive terminal (2).
7. Connect one of the black jump lead's clamps
to the donor battery's negative terminal (3).
8. Connect the other clamp to a grounding
point, e.g. right-hand engine mounting at the
top, the outer screw head (4).
9. Check that the jump lead clamps are affixed
securely so that there are no sparks during
the starting attempt.
10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and allow
it to run a few minutes at a speed slightly
higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
269
11. Start the engine in the car with the dis-
charged battery with the remote control key
inserted and a press the START/STOP
ENGINE button, see Starting the engine
(p. 266).
NOTE
When starting the engine in normal condi-
tions the car's electric drive motor is priori-
tised - the diesel engine remains switched off.
This means that after pressing the START/
STOP ENGINE button the electric motor has
"started" and the car is ready to drive. A
started motor is indicated by the combined
instrument panel's indicator lamps extinguish-
ing and its preset theme illuminating.
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the connections between cable
and car during the starting attempt. There is a
risk of sparks forming.
12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order -
first the black and then the red.
> Make sure that none of the black jump
lead's clamps comes into contact with the
battery's positive terminal or the clamp
connected to the red jump lead.
13. Refit the front cover for the battery in your
car.
WARNING
•
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can
be formed if a jump lead is connected
incorrectly, and this can be enough for
the battery to explode.
•
Do not connect the jump leads to any
fuel system component or any moving
part. Be careful of hot engine parts.
•
The battery contains sulphuric acid, which
can cause serious burns.
•
If sulphuric acid comes into contact with
eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large
quantities of water. If acid splashes into
the eyes - seek medical attention imme-
diately.
•
Never smoke near the battery.
Related information
•
Starting the engine (p. 266)
Drive systems
This Plug-in Hybrid is a so-called parallel hybrid,
which means that it has two separate drive sys-
tems: an electric motor and a diesel engine.
Depending on the driver-selected drive mode
and available electric energy, the two drive sys-
tems can be used either individually or in paral-
lel.
Two drive systems
An advanced control system combines the prop-
erties of both drive systems in order to provide
optimum driving economy.
Hybrid battery
High-voltage generator
3
3
Combined high-voltage generator and starter motor - ISG (Integrated Starter Generator).
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
270
Diesel engine
Electric motor
The electric motor drives the car mostly at low
speeds, the internal combustion engine at higher
speeds, as well as during more active driving.
Both the internal combustion engine and electric
motor can generate motive force directly to the
wheels. The internal combustion engine can also
charge the electric motor's hybrid battery using a
special high-voltage generator.
Related information
•
Drive system - drive modes (p. 270)
•
Energy flow (p. 273)
•
Drive system - symbols and messages
(p. 274)
Drive system - drive modes
Both of the car's drive systems are used either
individually or in parallel. The driver can select
between different drive modes while driving.
Regardless of selected drive mode, the control
system checks that the combination of driveabil-
ity, driving experience, environmental impact and
fuel economy is always optimal in relation to the
selected drive mode.
If a drive mode cannot be activated then the rea-
son is explained with a text message in the com-
bined instrument panel.
NOTE
The drive cannot set the "wrong" drive mode
- if any parameter is not met in a specific sit-
uation, the system will automatically choose
another, more appropriate drive mode.
Controls for drive modes.
WARNING
Do not leave the car in an unventilated area
with activated drive mode and the fuel-driven
engine switched off - automatic engine start
occurs at low energy level in the hybrid bat-
tery, and the exhaust gases could then cause
serious injury to people and animals.
– HYBRID
This option is the car's preset
start mode. The control system
uses both the electric motor
and fuel-driven engine - individ-
ually or in parallel - and calcu-
lates the optimal use with
regard to performance, fuel
consumption and comfort.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
271
The capacity to run solely with the electric motor
in the HYBRID drive mode depends on the hybrid
battery's energy level and, for example, the
requirement for heating/cooling in the passenger
compartment. At high level the capacity for solely
driving with electric operation is same as in
PURE mode, i.e. the car is easy to drive as an
electric car (high electrical power output availa-
ble).
At low energy level (hybrid battery is almost
empty) the battery's energy level must also be
maintained at the same time, leading to the inter-
nal combustion engine starting more often.
To restore the function to run solely on electricity
in HYBRID mode:
•
Charge the hybrid battery from a 230 VAC
socket with the charging cable (see Charg-
ing current (p. 301)) or use the SAVE func-
tion.
– PURE
This option focuses on electric
operation as well as low energy
consumption, and helps the
driver to maximise driving on
the hybrid battery.
Since the mileage in electric operation is con-
nected to the car's total energy consumption,
deductions are made for functions that limit mile-
age, e.g. climate and dynamic performance. To
obtain the maximum possible mileage the air
conditioning (p. 134) is therefore switched off -
however, it can be activated with the AC button if
necessary.
NOTE
In the event of misting, press AC, AUTO or
the defroster button.
Please note
This drive mode can only be selected when the
hybrid battery has a sufficiently high energy level.
The internal combustion engine may start auto-
matically in certain cases, despite the PURE drive
mode being selected, for example:
•
if the speed exceeds 125 km/h (78 mph)
•
if the driver requests more motive force than
electric drive can provide
•
if the hybrid battery's energy level is too low
and it must be charged
•
in the event if system/component limitations,
e.g. low outside temperature, see Energy flow
(p. 273).
Please note
•
The internal combustion engine may even
start when there is a high energy level in the
hybrid battery, such as to raise/lower the
temperature in the passenger compartment.
– POWER
This option sets the car in the
best response and perform-
ance mode, by means of both
the electric motor and fuel-
driven engine being activated
the whole time. The car has
sportier characteristics and
faster response to accelerating.
During active driving, the use of a lower gear is
prioritised, leading to a delayed upshift.
Please note
•
The internal combustion engine runs contin-
uously.
•
The car is driven by both the front and rear
wheels.
•
This drive mode results involves increased
fuel consumption.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
272
– AWD
The mode activates all-wheel
drive, which improves the car's
grip and traction. The mode is
primarily designed for low
speed on slippery road surfa-
ces, but all-wheel drive also has
a stabilising effect at higher
speeds.
Please note
•
The internal combustion engine runs contin-
uously.
•
This drive mode results involves increased
fuel consumption.
– SAVE
This function starts charging
the hybrid battery and ensures
that its energy level does not
fall below a capacity equivalent
to approx. 20 km driving with
electric operation. The idea is
to be able to save this energy
for later when electric operation is more suitable,
e.g. for urban driving.
If the hybrid battery's energy level is low when
pressing the SAVE button then the internal com-
bustion engine will first charge it to a capacity
equivalent to approx. 20 km driving with electric
operation.
Driving with the electric motor saves more fuel at
low speeds than at higher speeds. Therefore,
select SAVE primarily when the hybrid battery's
energy level is high and a planned journey shall
start with a longer distance at higher speeds (e.g.
on motorways) and end with a distance at low
speeds when electric operation is required.
Pressing the SAVE button when the hybrid bat-
tery's energy level is equivalent to more than
approx. 20 km driving with electric operation will
maintain the hybrid battery's current energy level.
Regardless of selected drive mode, charging of
the hybrid battery is activated temporarily in the
background - similar to the SAVE function - then
an automatic DPF (p. 298) regeneration is per-
formed.
Please note
•
This drive mode results involves increased
fuel consumption.
•
After the internal combustion engine has
charged the hybrid battery to the SAVE level,
the control system will stop/start the internal
combustion engine in the same way as at
low energy level in HYBRID mode.
Drive modes in MY CAR
The car's menu system (p. 115) contains brief
descriptions about the car's different drive
modes.
1.
Go to
MY CAR HYBRID Driving
modes
.
2.
There, select between
PURE, HYBRID,
POWER, AWD and SAVE and confirm with
OK.
Start/Stop function
The control system determines when the internal
combustion engine can be stopped and be
switched off as well as for how long. This is
equivalent to the Start/Stop function in conven-
tional cars with fuel-driven engines.
Trip statistics
The car stores the statistics (p. 121) of con-
sumed electricity/fuel in relation to mileage trav-
elled.
Apart from via the trip computer, the trip statistics
can also be accessed via the MY CAR menu sys-
tem:
•
Go to
MY CAR Trip statistics and con-
firm with OK.
Related information
•
Drive systems (p. 269)
•
Drive system - symbols and messages
(p. 274)
•
Energy flow (p. 273)
STARTING AND DRIVING
273
Energy flow
The centre console's screen can graphically dis-
play whether the engine or motor is driving the
car and how the energy is flowing - it shows, for
example, whether the hybrid battery is charging
or providing energy to the electric motor.
The function to display the energy flow is acti-
vated in the menu system MY CAR:
•
Search for
HYBRID Power flow and con-
firm with OK.
Related information
•
Drive systems (p. 269)
STARTING AND DRIVING
274
Drive system - symbols and
messages
In some situations the drive system can display a
message in the combined instrument panel - fol-
low the recommendation given if appropriate.
This symbol illuminates in combination
with a text message and an acoustic
warning signal if an unbelted driver
opens the driver's door with the inter-
nal combustion engine or electric motor running.
The same thing happens if an unbelted driver
starts the engine with the driver's door open.
Here are some examples of messages, their
meaning and suggestions for action:
Message Specification Action
PURE not available due to low hybrid sys-
tem temperature
One or more components in the drive system have not
reached the correct operating temperature.
Drive in HYBRID mode until the message
changes to
PURE available - then press the
PURE button.
PURE not available due to temporary
hybrid system limitations
Temporary system limitation, e.g. operating temperature
not correct.
Drive in HYBRID mode until the message
changes to
PURE available - then press the
PURE button.
PURE not available due to low battery
charge
The hybrid battery's energy level is too low. Drive in SAVE mode until the message changes
to
PURE available or charge the battery with a
charging cable and 230 VAC - then press the
PURE button.
PURE not available when gear lever in
manual position
The gear selector is in manual "+/-" position.
Move the gear selector to the side, to automatic
mode and then press the PURE button.
PURE available
The PURE mode is available again after the previous
limitation.
–
POWER not available due to temporary
hybrid system limitations
Temporary system limitation, e.g. operating temperature
not correct.
–
STARTING AND DRIVING
275
Message Specification Action
SAVE not available due to temporary
hybrid system limitations
Temporary system limitation, e.g. operating temperature
not correct.
–
AWD not available due to temporary
hybrid system limitations
Temporary system limitation, e.g. operating temperature
not correct.
–
Related information
•
Drive systems (p. 269)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
276
Gearboxes
An V60 Twin Engine is driven and operated in
the same way as a car with a conventional inter-
nal combustion engine and automatic gearbox.
With the gear selector in manual gear position
(+/-) the internal combustion engine is perma-
nently in operation. The driver must then change
manually and the car engine brakes when the
accelerator pedal is released, see Automatic
gearbox - Geartronic (p. 277).
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to any drive system com-
ponents, the working temperature of the
gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of over-
heating, a warning symbol is illuminated in the
combined instrument panel in conjunction
with a text message being shown. Follow the
recommendation given in the text message.
Related information
•
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic (p. 277)
Gear shift indicator*
The gear shift indicator notifies the driver when it
is appropriate to engage the next higher or lower
gear.
An essential detail in connection with environ-
mental driving is to drive in the right gear and to
change gear in good time.
An indicator is available as an aid on certain vari-
ants - GSI (Gear Shift Indicator) - which notifies
the driver when it is appropriate to engage the
next higher or lower gear in order to obtain the
lowest possible fuel consumption.
However, taking into consideration characteristics
such as performance and vibration-free running,
it may be advantageous to change gear at a
higher engine speed. The framed number indi-
cates the current gear.
Automatic gearbox
Combined instrument panel "Digital" with gear
shift indicator.
The framed number indicates the current gear.
Related information
•
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic (p. 277)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
277
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic
The Geartronic gearbox has two different gear
modes - Automatic and Manual.
D: Automatic gear positions. +/–: Manual gear positions.
S: Sport mode*
4
.
Combined instrument panel (p. 68) shows the
position of the gear selector using the following
indications:
P, R, N, D, S*, 1, 2, 3 etc.
Gear positions
Automatic gear positions are
indicated on the right of the
combined instrument panel.
(Only one marker is illuminated
at a time - the one showing the
current gear selector position.)
Parking position - P
Select P position when starting the engine or
when the car is parked.
In order to be able to move the gear selector
from the P position, the brake pedal must be
depressed and key position must be II, see Key
positions - functions at different levels (p. 83).
NOTE
When starting the engine there is an auto-
matic function check of the brake system
when the driver depresses the brake pedal to
take the gear selector from the P-position.
During the function check the pedal travel is
slightly longer than during normal braking.
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the P
position is engaged. Also apply the parking brake
(p. 285) when the car is parked.
NOTE
The gear selector must be in P position to
allow the car to be locked and alarmed.
IMPORTANT
The car must be stationary when position P is
selected.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when parking
on a slope - the automatic transmission's P
position is not sufficient to hold the car in all
situation.
Reverse position - R
The car must be stationary when R position is
selected.
Neutral position - N
No gear is engaged and the engine can be
started. Apply the parking brake if the car is sta-
tionary with the gear selector in N position.
In order to be able to move the gear selector
from N to another gear position, the brake pedal
must be depressed and key position must be II,
see Key positions - functions at different levels
(p. 83).
Drive position - D
D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and
down takes place automatically based on the
level of acceleration and speed. The car must be
stationary when the gear selector is moved to D
position from R position.
4
Not possible with the V60 Twin Engine.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
278
Geartronic – Manual gear positions
(+S-)
With the gear selector in manual gear position
"+S-" the internal combustion engine is perma-
nently in operation. The driver must then change
manually and the car engine brakes when the
accelerator pedal is released.
The manual gear position is reached by
moving the lever to the side from posi-
tion D to the end position at "+S-". The
combined instrument panel's symbol
"+S-" changes colour from WHITE to ORANGE
and the digits
1, 2, 3 etc. are shown in a box, cor-
responding to the gear selected at the time.
•
Move the lever forwards towards "+" (plus) to
change up a gear and release the lever,
which returns to its rest position between +
and –.
or
•
Pull the lever back towards "–" (minus) to
change down a gear and release it.
The manual gearshift mode "+S–" can be
selected at any time while driving.
Geartronic automatically shifts down if the driver
allows the speed to decrease lower than a level
suitable for the selected gear, in order to avoid
jerking and stalling.
To return to automatic driving mode:
•
Move the lever to the side to the end position
at D.
Geartronic - Winter mode
It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads if
3rd gear is engaged manually.
1. Depress the brake pedal and move the gear
selector from D position to the end position
at "+S–" - the combined instrument panel
changes indication from
D to the figure 1.
2. Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever for-
ward towards "+" (plus) twice - the display
shifts the indication from
1 to 3.
3. Release the brake and accelerate carefully.
The gearbox "winter mode" means that the car
moves off with a lower engine speed and
reduced engine power on the drive wheels.
Kick-down
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the
way to the floor (beyond the position normally
regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is
immediately engaged. This is known as kick-
down.
If the accelerator is released from the kick-down
position, the gearbox automatically changes up.
Kick-down is used when maximum acceleration
is needed, such as for overtaking.
Safety function
To prevent over-revving the engine, the transmis-
sion's control program has a protective downshift
inhibitor, which prevents the kick-down function.
Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kick-
down which would result in an engine speed high
enough to damage the engine. Nothing happens
if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at
high engine speed – the original gear remains
engaged.
When kick-down is activated the car can change
one or more gears at a time depending on
engine speed. The car changes up when the
engine reaches its maximum speed in order to
prevent damage to the engine.
Towing
If the car has to be towed - see important infor-
mation in the section Towing (p. 319).
Related information
•
Transmission fluid - grade and volume
(p. 419)
•
Gearboxes (p. 276)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
279
Gear selector inhibitor
There are two different types of gear selector
inhibitor - mechanical and automatic.
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor
G021351
M: Manual shifting
5
- "+/-" or "Sport mode"
6
.
The gear selector can be moved forward and
back freely between N and D. Other positions are
locked with a latch that is released with the inhib-
itor button on the gear selector.
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever can
be moved forwards or backwards between P, R,
N and D.
Automatic gear selector inhibitor
The automatic gearbox has special safety sys-
tems:
Parking position (P)
Stationary car with engine running:
•
Keep your foot on the brake pedal when
moving the gear selector to another position.
Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock Parking
position (P)
In order to be able to move the gear selector
from P to other gear positions, the brake pedal
must be depressed and the key position (p. 83)
must be II.
Shiftlock – Neutral (N)
If the gear selector is in N position and the car
has been stationary for at least 3 seconds (irre-
spective of whether the engine is running) then
the gear selector is locked.
In order to be able to move the gear selector
from the N position to another gear position, the
brake pedal must be depressed and the key posi-
tion (p. 83) must be II.
Deactivate automatic gear selector
inhibitor
If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat
starter battery, the gear selector must be moved
from the P position so that the car can be moved.
Lift the rubber mat in the compartment
behind the centre console and locate a hole
7
for the key blade (p. 169) in the bottom of
the compartment.
Search for a spring-loaded button down in
the hole with the key blade; depress the but-
ton with the blade and hold.
Move the gear selector from the P position
and pull up the key blade.
4. Set the rubber mat back in place.
5
The illustration is schematic.
6
Not for V60 Twin Engine.
7
There may be 2 holes - one for the key blade and one that fixes the rubber mat.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
280
Related information
•
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic (p. 277)
Hill start assist (HSA)*
The foot brake can be released before setting
off or reversing uphill - the HSA (Hill Start
Assist) function means that the car does not roll
backwards.
The function means that the pedal pressure in
the brake system remains for several seconds
while the driver's foot is moved from brake pedal
to accelerator pedal.
The temporary braking effect releases after sev-
eral seconds or when the driver accelerates.
Related information
•
Starting the engine (p. 266)
All-wheel drive - (AWD)
Optimal traction is achieved with all-wheel drive.
Use this button on the centre
console to activate all-wheel
drive (AWD – All Wheel Drive),
see Drive system - drive modes
(p. 270). The mode is primarily
intended for use at low speed
in slippery driving conditions.
All-wheel drive also has a stabilising effect at
higher speeds.
To achieve the best possible traction and prevent
wheel spin the motive force is distributed auto-
matically to the wheels with the best grip. Under
normal driving conditions, the majority of power is
transmitted to the front wheels.
Related information
•
Drive system - drive modes (p. 270)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
281
Foot brake
The foot brake is part of the brake system.
The car is equipped with two brake circuits for
safety reasons.
The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted by a
brake servo.
WARNING
The brake servo doesn't operate until after
the engine has been started, see Starting the
engine (p. 266).
If the foot brake is used in a de-energised car
with the electric motor and internal combustion
engine switched off - e.g. if the car is being
towed - then pedal travel is slightly longer and a
higher pedal pressure must be used to brake the
car.
For cars with the Hill start assist (HSA)* (p. 280)*
function, the pedal returns more slowly than
usual to normal position if the car is parked on a
gradient or on an uneven surface.
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy
load the brakes can be relieved by using engine
braking. Engine braking is most efficiently used if
the same gear is used downhill as up.
For more general information on heavy loads on
the car, see Engine oil - adverse driving condi-
tions (p. 415).
Function check when the engine is
started
The car is equipped with a "brake by wire" brake
system. After each engine start, an automatic
function check is made of the brake system when
the driver depresses the brake pedal in order
move the gear selector out of the P position; see
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic (p. 277). In con-
nection with the function check, in some cases,
the information display may show a message and
a symbol, see examples in the table at the end of
this section.
NOTE
During the function check the pedal travel is
slightly longer than during normal braking.
Light braking - hybrid battery charging
The electric motor's engine brake is used during
light braking. The car's kinetic energy is then
converted to electrical energy instead, which is
used to charge the hybrid battery. Battery charg-
ing with engine braking is indicated in the com-
bined instrument panel (p. 69) with animation.
This function is active in the speed range
150-5 km/h (93-3 mph) - for harder braking, as
well as outside the speed range, the braking is
complemented by the hydraulic brake system.
Braking on wet roads
When driving for a long time in heavy rain without
braking, the braking effect may be delayed
slightly when next using the brakes. This may
also be the case after a car wash. It is then nec-
essary to depress the brake harder. For this rea-
son, maintain a greater distance to the traffic
ahead.
Brake the car firmly after driving on wet roads
and after a car wash. The brake discs are then
warmed up, dry more quickly and are protected
against corrosion. Take the prevailing traffic sit-
uation into account when braking.
Braking on salted roads
When driving on salted roads a layer of salt may
form on the brake discs and brake linings. This
may extend braking distance. For this reason,
keep an extra large safety distance to the vehicle
ahead. Also make sure of the following:
•
Brake occasionally to remove any layer of
salt. Make sure that other road users are not
put at risk by the braking.
•
Gently depress the brake pedal when driving
is finished and before the next journey starts.
Maintenance
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible,
follow the Volvo service intervals as specified in
the Service and Warranty Booklet.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
282
New and replaced brake linings and brake discs
do not provide optimal braking effect until they
have been "worn in" a few hundred kilometres.
Compensate for the reduced braking effect by
depressing the brake pedal harder. Volvo recom-
mends only fitting brake linings that are approved
for your Volvo.
IMPORTANT
The wear on the brake system's components
must be checked regularly.
Contact a workshop for information about the
procedure or engage a workshop to carry out
the inspection - an authorised Volvo work-
shop is recommended.
Symbols and messages
Symbol Message Meaning/Action
Constant glow – Check the brake fluid level. If the level is low, fill with brake fluid and check for the cause of the
brake fluid loss.
Constant glow for 2 seconds when the engine is started - automatic function check.
STARTING AND DRIVING
283
Symbol Message Meaning/Action
Fully depress the brake
pedal in order to leave
the P-position
Foot pressure on the brake pedal is too low.
•
Depress the pedal further.
Brake pedal characteris-
tics changed Service
required
May be shown in very cold weather or if the gear selector has been moved from the P position with the brake
pedal insufficiently depressed.
•
Switch off the engine by pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button - start the engine again and depress
the brake pedal.
If the error message remains: Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
WARNING
If and illuminate at the same
time, there may be a fault in the brake system.
If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is nor-
mal at this stage, drive carefully to the nearest
workshop and have the brake system checked
- an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be
investigated.
Related information
•
Parking brake (p. 285)
•
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 284)
•
Foot brake - emergency brake assistance
(p. 284)
•
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system
(p. 284)
STARTING AND DRIVING
284
Foot brake - anti-lock braking
system
The anti-lock braking system, ABS (Anti-lock
Braking System), prevents the wheels from lock-
ing up during braking.
The function allows the steering ability to be
maintained, and it is easier to swerve to avoid a
hazard for example. Vibration may be felt in the
brake pedal when this is engaged and this is nor-
mal.
A short test of the ABS system is made automat-
ically after the engine has been started when the
driver releases the brake pedal. A further auto-
matic test of the ABS system may be made at
low speed. The test may be experienced as pul-
ses in the brake pedal.
Related information
•
Foot brake (p. 281)
•
Parking brake (p. 285)
•
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 284)
•
Foot brake - emergency brake assistance
(p. 284)
Foot brake - emergency brake lights
and automatic hazard warning
flashers
Emergency brake lights are activated to alert
vehicles behind about heavy braking. The func-
tion means that the brake light flashes instead of
- as in normal braking - shining with a constant
glow.
Emergency brake lights are activated at speeds
above 50 km/h (31 mph) in the event of heavy
braking. After the car's speed has been slowed
down to below 10 km/h (6 mph) the brake light
returns from flashing to the normal constant glow
- while at the same time the car's hazard warning
lights (p. 99) are activated. These flash until the
driver accelerates the car to a higher speed again
or switches off the hazard warning lights.
Related information
•
Foot brake (p. 281)
•
Parking brake (p. 285)
•
Foot brake - emergency brake assistance
(p. 284)
•
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system
(p. 284)
Foot brake - emergency brake
assistance
Emergency brake assistance EBA (Emergency
Brake Assist) helps to increase the braking force
and so reduce the braking distance.
EBA detects the driver's braking style and increa-
ses the braking force when necessary. The brake
force can be reinforced up to the level when the
ABS system is engaged. The EBA function is
interrupted when the pressure on the brake pedal
is reduced.
NOTE
When EBA is activated the brake pedal low-
ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold)
the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the
brake pedal is released then all braking
ceases.
Related information
•
Foot brake (p. 281)
•
Parking brake (p. 285)
•
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 284)
•
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system
(p. 284)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
285
Parking brake
The parking brake prevents the car from rolling
away from stationary by means of mechanically
locking/blocking two wheels.
Function
A faint electric motor noise can be heard when
the electrically-controlled parking brake is being
applied. The noise can also be heard during the
automatic function checking of the parking brake.
If the car is stationary when the parking brake is
applied then it only acts on the rear wheels. If it is
applied when the car is moving then the normal
foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts on all four
wheels. Brake function changes over to the rear
wheels when the car is almost stationary.
Low battery voltage
If the battery voltage is too low then the parking
brake can neither be released nor applied. Con-
nect a donor battery if the battery voltage is too
low, see Jump starting with another battery
(p. 268).
Applying the parking brake
Parking brake control - apply.
1. Depress the foot brake pedal firmly.
2.
Press the parking brake control.
>
The combined instrument panel's
symbol starts flashing - once there is a
constant glow the parking brake is
applied.
3. Release the foot brake pedal and make sure
that the car is at a standstill position.
When parking the vehicle put the gear selector in
the P position.
Emergency brake
In an emergency the parking brake can be
applied when the vehicle is in motion by pressing
and holding the parking brake control. The brak-
ing procedure is stopped when the control is
released.
NOTE
An acoustic signal sounds while emergency
braking is active at high speeds.
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked facing uphill:
•
Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
If the car is parked facing downhill:
•
Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when parking
on a slope - leaving the car in gear, or in P if it
has automatic transmission, is not sufficient
to hold the car in all situation.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
286
Disengaging the parking brake
Parking brake control - release.
Releasing manually
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch
8
.
2. Depress the foot brake pedal firmly.
3.
Pull the control.
>
The parking brake releases and the
combined instrument panel's symbol
extinguishes.
Releasing automatically
1. Put the seatbelt on.
2. Start the engine.
3. Depress the foot brake pedal firmly.
4.
Move the gear selector to position D or R
and depress the accelerator.
>
The parking brake releases and the
combined instrument panel's symbol
extinguishes.
NOTE
For safety reasons, the parking brake is only
released automatically if the engine is running
and the driver is wearing a seatbelt. The park-
ing brake is released immediately on cars
with automatic gearbox when the accelerator
pedal is depressed and the gear selector is in
position D or R.
Heavy load uphill
A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the car
to roll backward when the parking brake is
released automatically on a steep incline. Avoid
this by depressing the control while driving off.
Release the control when the engine achieves
traction.
Replacing the brake linings
The rear brake linings must be replaced at a
workshop due to the design of the electric park-
ing brake - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec-
ommended.
Symbols and messages
For information on how the combined instrument
panel's text messages can be shown and
deleted, see Messages - handling (p. 114).
8
For cars with keyless start and lock system: Press START/STOP ENGINE.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
287
Symbol Message Meaning/Action
"Message"
•
Read the combined instrument panel's message.
A flashing symbol indicates that the parking brake is applied.
If the symbol flashes in any other situation then this means that a fault has arisen.
•
Read the combined instrument panel's message.
Handbrake not
fully released
A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released:
•
Try to apply and release the brake.
If the fault persists after a few attempts:
•
Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Note: A warning signal sounds if the journey is continued with this error message.
Handbrake not
applied
A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied:
•
Try to release and apply the brake.
If the fault persists after a few attempts:
•
Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
The message is also illuminated on cars with manual gearbox when the car is driven at low speed with the door open in
order to alert the driver that the parking brake may have been unintentionally disengaged.
Handbrake
Service
required
A fault has arisen:
•
Try to apply and release the brake.
If the fault persists after a few attempts:
•
Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
If the car has to be parked before a possible fault
is rectified then the wheels must be turned as if
parking on a hill and the gear selector must be
set in position P.
A text message can be acknowledged by briefly
pressing the OK button on the direction indicator
stalk.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
289
Economical driving
Drive economically and eco-consciously by driv-
ing smoothly, thinking ahead, and adjusting your
driving style and speed to the prevailing condi-
tions.
Plan for electric operation
It is important to plan carefully when driving in
electric mode in order to achieve the longest
possible driving distance:
Charge
•
Charge the car regularly from the mains
power circuit. Make it a habit to always start
a journey with fully-charged hybrid battery.
•
Find out where the charging stations are
located.
•
If possible, select a parking space with a
charging station.
Precondition
•
Precondition the car before driving if possible
using the charging cable connected to the
mains power circuit.
•
Avoid parking the car in a way that the inte-
rior cools down or overheats while parking.
Park the car in an acclimated garage, for
example.
•
During a short drive after preconditioning of
the passenger compartment, switch off the
ventilation fan if possible.
•
If preconditioning is not possible when it is
cold outside, use seat heating and steering
wheel heating first of all*. Avoid warming up
the whole of the interior which takes energy
from the hybrid battery.
Drive
An energy-saving driving style reduces power
consumption and makes it possible to extend the
range.
•
For lowest energy consumption, activate the
Pure drive mode.
•
Drive at a steady speed and keep a good dis-
tance to other vehicles and objects to mini-
mise braking.
•
Balance the power requirement using the
accelerator pedal. Use the indicator for avail-
able electric motor power in the driver dis-
play, see Eco guide & Hybrid guide (p. 73), in
order to avoid starting the internal combus-
tion engine unnecessarily. The electric motor
is more efficient that the internal combustion
engine, in particular at low speed.
•
During braking - brake gently with the brake
pedal, this recharges the hybrid battery. A
regenerative braking function is integrated in
the brake pedal.
•
When driving in hilly terrain, utilise the engine
braking function. The car engine brakes
when the accelerator pedal is released and
the hybrid battery is recharged.
•
High speed results in increased energy con-
sumption - the wind resistance increases
with speed.
•
Select drive mode
Save at higher speeds
during drives which are longer than the
range of the electricity.
•
Drive with the correct air pressure in the
tyres and check this regularly - select ECO
tyre pressure for best results.
•
Choice of tyres can affect fuel consumption -
seek advice on suitable tyres from a dealer.
•
Remove unnecessary items from the car -
the greater the load the higher the consump-
tion.
•
A roof load and ski box increase air resis-
tance, leading to higher consumption -
remove the load carriers when not in use.
•
Avoid driving with open windows.
•
Do not hold the car stationary on a hill with
the accelerator pedal. Use the foot brake
instead.
WARNING
Remember that the car does not emit any
engine noise when it is only powered by the
electric motor and may therefore be difficult
to notice by children, pedestrians, cyclists and
animals. This applies in particular at low
speeds, such as in car parks.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
290
Outside temperature
The electric motor, electronics and batteries work
best at approx. 25 °C. When the car is connected
to an electrical socket it is conditioned (p. 138)
to its optimal temperature range. If the car is
started in cold weather or goes beyond its per-
mitted temperature range while driving then the
fuel heater starts and, if required, the internal
combustion engine starts automatically so that
heating takes place. The car can be driven elec-
trically but with reduced power if the temperature
becomes too low.
Similarly, the system may need to be cooled
down when driving in hot conditions.
NOTE
If the outside temperature drops extremely
low then the diesel engine will always be run-
ning.
Power consumers
The more power consumers in the car that are
switched on (e.g. stereo, electrically heated win-
dows, door mirrors, seats, etc.) the higher the
energy consumption.
Related information
•
Range for electric operation (p. 293)
•
Winter driving (p. 292)
Driving in water
Driving in water means that the car is driven
through deep water on a water-covered road-
way. Fording must be carried out with great cau-
tion.
The car can be driven through water at a maxi-
mum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of
walking pace. Extra caution must be exercised
when passing through flowing water.
During driving in water, maintain a low speed and
do not stop the car. When the water has been
passed, depress the brake pedal lightly and
check that full brake function is achieved. Water
and mud for example can make the brake linings
wet resulting in delayed brake function.
•
If necessary, clean the contacts for the elec-
tric heater and trailer coupling after driving in
water and mud.
•
Do not let the car stand with water over the
sills for any long period of time - this could
cause electrical malfunctions.
IMPORTANT
Engine damage can occur if water enters the
air filter.
In depths greater than 25 cm, water could
enter the transmission. This reduces the lubri-
cating ability of the oils and shortens the
service life of these systems.
Damage to any component, engine, transmis-
sion, turbocharger, differential or its internal
components caused by flooding, hydrostatic
locking or oil shortage, is not covered by the
warranty.
In the event of the engine stalling in water, do
not try restart - tow the car from the water to
a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended. Risk of engine breakdown.
Related information
•
Recovery (p. 320)
•
Towing (p. 319)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
291
Overheating
Under special conditions, for example hard driv-
ing in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk
that the engine and drive system may overheat -
in particular with a heavy load.
For information about overheating when driving
with a trailer, see Driving with a trailer* (p. 312).
•
Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of
the grille when driving in hot climates.
•
If the temperature in the engine's cooling
system is too high then a warning symbol is
illuminated in the combined instrument pan-
el's information display and a text message
High engine temperature Stop safely is
shown there - stop the car in a safe way and
allow the engine to run at idling speed for
several minutes in order to cool down.
•
If the text message
High engine
temperature Turn off engine or Engine
coolant level low Stop safely is shown
then the engine must be switched off after
stopping the car.
•
In the event of overheating in the gearbox a
built-in protection function is activated which,
amongst other things, illuminates a warning
symbol in the combined instrument panel,
and its display shows the text message
Transmission hot Reduce speed or
Transmission hot Stop safely Wait for
cooling - follow the recommendation given
and lower the speed and stop the car in a
safe way and allow the engine to run at idling
speed for a few minutes in order to allow the
gearbox to cool down.
•
If the car overheats, the air conditioning may
be switched off temporarily.
•
Do not turn the engine off immediately you
stop after a hard drive.
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to
operate for a time after the engine has been
switched off.
Driving with open tailgate/boot lid
When driving with the tailgate open, toxic
exhaust fumes can be sucked into the car
through the cargo area.
WARNING
Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic
exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car
through the cargo area.
Related information
•
Loading (p. 154)
STARTING AND DRIVING
292
Overload - starter battery
The electrical functions in the car load the starter
battery (p. 380) to varying degrees. Avoid using
the key position II (p. 83) when the car is
switched off. Instead use position I - which uses
less power.
Also, be aware of different accessories that load
the electrical system. Do not use functions which
use a lot of power when the car is switched off.
Examples of such functions are:
•
ventilation fan
•
headlamps
•
windscreen wiper
•
audio system (high volume).
If the starter battery voltage is low then the com-
bined instrument panel's information display
shows the text
Low battery charge Power
save mode. The energy-saving function then
shuts down certain functions or reduces certain
functions such as the ventilation fan and/or
audio system.
–
In which case, charge the starter battery by
starting the car and then running it for at
least 15 minutes - starter battery charging is
more effective during driving than running
the engine at idling speed while stationary.
Before a long journey
Before a long journey, it makes good sense to
go through the following points:
•
Check that the engine is working normally
and that fuel consumption (p. 424) is nor-
mal.
•
Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil or
other fluid).
•
Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths.
•
Carrying a warning triangle (p. 332) is a
legal requirement in certain countries.
Related information
•
Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 364)
•
Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 328)
•
Lamp replacement - general (p. 368)
Winter driving
For winter driving it is important to perform cer-
tain checks in order to ensure that the car can
be driven safely.
Check the following in particular before the cold
season:
•
The engine coolant (p. 365) must contain
50% glycol. This mixture protects the engine
against frost erosion down to
approximately –35 °C. To avoid health risks,
different types of glycol must not be mixed.
•
The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent
condensation.
•
Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with
lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate starting
in cold weather and also reduce fuel con-
sumption while the engine is cold. For more
information on suitable oils, see Engine oil -
adverse driving conditions (p. 415).
IMPORTANT
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard
driving or in hot weather.
•
The condition of the starter battery and
charge level must be inspected. Cold
weather places great demands on the starter
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
293
battery and its capacity is reduced by the
cold.
•
Use washer fluid (p. 379) to avoid ice form-
ing in the washer fluid reservoir.
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recom-
mends using winter tyres on all wheels if there is
a risk of snow or ice.
NOTE
The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement
in certain countries. Studded tyres are not
permitted in all countries.
Slippery driving conditions
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under con-
trolled conditions to learn how the car reacts.
Related information
•
Winter driving (p. 292)
Range for electric operation
The car's range for electric operation depends
on several factors, e.g. the number of active
power consumers. The ability to achieve a long
range varies according to the circumstances and
conditions under which the car is being driven.
Factors that affect the range
The driver can influence some factors, but has no
influence over others. The longest range can be
achieved under extremely favourable conditions
when all factors have a positive impact.
Factors the driver cannot influence
There are several external factors that affect the
range in varying degrees:
•
traffic situation
•
short driving distances
•
topography
•
outside temperature and headwind
•
road condition and surface.
Factors the driver can influence
The driver should be aware that the following fac-
tors affect the range so he/she can operate the
car in an energy-efficient manner:
•
regular charging
•
Preconditioning
•
drive mode
Pure
•
Climate settings
•
speed and acceleration
•
drive mode
Save
•
tyres and tyre pressure.
Power consumers
In order to achieve the longest possible mileage
for electric operation, the driver of an electric car
must think about energy (p. 301) conservation.
The more consumers there are (stereo, electric
heating in windows/mirrors/seats, very cold air
from the climate control system, etc.) that are
switched on - the shorter the potential mileage.
NOTE
In addition to high power output in the pas-
senger compartment, high speed, sudden
acceleration, heavy loads and uphill gradients
can also reduce the possible driving distance.
Driving with electric operation
Select drive mode Pure for the most energy-effi-
cient driving - to get as far as possible with elec-
tric power alone.
Select drive mode
Save at higher speeds during
drives which are longer than the range of the
electricity.
Longer periods of inactive time
During normal hybrid battery charging (p. 300)
some of the charging current is used to keep the
car's drive system ready to drive, mainly to control
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
294
the hybrid battery's temperature. If the car is not
being used for a few days then energy can be
saved by not starting preconditioning. If the car is
not used for a long time, the hybrid battery per-
forms best if the car is parked in a cool place. For
further information about what to consider during
longer periods of inactive time, see Long-term
storage of vehicles with hybrid batteries (p. 311).
Related information
•
Economical driving (p. 289)
•
Drive system - drive modes (p. 270)
Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing
The fuel filler flap can be opened/closed as fol-
lows:
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
Open the fuel filler flap using the button on the
lighting panel - the flap opens when the button is
released.
In the combined instrument panel's dis-
play the arrow on the symbol indicates
which side of the car the fuel cap is located.
•
Close the fuel filler flap by pressing it in until
a click confirms that it is closed.
Related information
•
Filling up with fuel (p. 295)
Fuel filler flap - manual opening
The fuel filler flap can be opened manually when
electric opening from the passenger compart-
ment is not possible.
1. Open/remove the side hatch in the cargo
area (same side as fuel filler flap).
2. Expand/open a perforated section in the iso-
lation and locate a green cord with handle.
3. Pull the cord gently straight back until the
fuel filler flap folds out with a "click".
IMPORTANT
Pull the wire gently - minimal force is required
to disengage the hatch lock.
Related information
•
Filling up with fuel (p. 295)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
295
Filling up with fuel
Important things to consider when refuelling.
Opening/closing the fuel cap
The fuel filler cap can be attached onto the flap.
A certain overpressure may arise in the tank in
the event of high outside temperatures. Open the
cap slowly.
•
After refuelling - refit the cap and turn it until
one or more clicking sounds are heard.
Filling up with fuel
1. Choose fuel that is approved for use in the
car in accordance with the identifier
9
on the
inside of the fuel filler flap.
See information on approved fuels in the
section on diesel (p. 296).
2. Do not overfill the tank but stop refuelling
when the pump nozzle cuts out the first time.
NOTE
Overfilled fuel in the tank can overflow in hot
weather.
Filling with a fuel can
10
When filling with a fuel can, use the funnel
located under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
Make sure you insert the funnel's pipe firmly into
the filler pipe. The filler pipe has an openable
cover and the funnel's pipe must be slid past the
cover before filling can begin.
Related information
•
Fuel filler flap - manual opening (p. 294)
•
Fuel - handling (p. 295)
Fuel - handling
Fuel of a lower quality than that recommended
by Volvo must not be used as engine power and
fuel consumption is negatively affected.
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and getting
fuel splashes in the eyes.
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any
contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of
water for at least 15 minutes and seek medi-
cal attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, bioe-
thanol and mixtures of them and diesel are
highly toxic and could cause permanent injury
or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical atten-
tion immediately if fuel has been swallowed.
WARNING
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be igni-
ted.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star-
ting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone when
refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark
build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to
fire and injury.
9
The identifier in accordance with the CEN standard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations throughout Europe at the
latest by the end of 2018.
10
Only applies to a car with diesel engine.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
296
IMPORTANT
Mixtures of various fuel types or use of fuels
which are not recommended will invalidate
Volvo's guarantees and any supplementary
service agreements; this is applicable to all
engines.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combina-
tion with fuel grade are factors that could
affect the car's performance.
Related information
•
Fuel - diesel (p. 296)
•
Diesel particle filter (DPF) (p. 298)
•
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 424)
•
Fuel tank - volume (p. 421)
Fuel - diesel
Diesel is a type of engine fuel that is intended for
cars with a diesel engine.
Only use diesel fuel from well-known producers.
Never use fuel of dubious quality. Diesel fuel
must fulfil the EN 590 or SS 155435 standard.
Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants in
the fuel, such as excessively high volumes of sul-
phur and metals.
Identifier
The identifier in accordance with the CEN stand-
ard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel
filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel
pumps and their nozzles at filling stations
throughout Europe at the latest by the end of
2018.
This is the identifier that applies for current
standard fuel in Europe. Diesel with the following
identifiers may be used in cars with diesel
engine:
B7 is diesel with maximum
7 volume % fatty acid methyl
ester (FAME).
At low temperatures (lower than 0 °C) a paraffin
precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which may
lead to ignition problems. The fuel qualities that
are sold must be adapted for season and climate
zone, but in the event of extreme weather condi-
tions, old fuel or moving between climate zones,
paraffin precipitate may occur.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When refu-
elling, check that the area around the fuel filler
pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the paint-
work. Wash off any spillage with detergent and
water.
IMPORTANT
Diesel fuel must:
•
fulfil the EN 590 and/or SS 155435
standards
•
have a sulphur content not exceeding
10 mg/kg
•
have a maximum of 7 vol % FAME
11
(B7).
11
Fatty Acid Methyl Ester
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
297
IMPORTANT
Diesel type fuels that must not be used:
•
Special additives
•
Marine diesel fuel
•
Heating oil
•
FAME
12
and vegetable oil.
These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in
accordance with Volvo recommendations and
generate increased wear and engine damage
that is not covered by the Volvo warranty.
Limitation due to low outside
temperature
To avoid the risk of paraffin precipitate (see previ-
ous section) in the diesel fuel due to low thermal
resistance, the car has a market-dependent func-
tion which automatically limits the option of using
electric operation with the PURE or HYBRID
drive mode in low temperatures. If such a situa-
tion occurs then the diesel engine will be running
the whole time.
Diesel fuel thermal resistance is a measure of
the usefulness of the fuel at low temperatures.
Normally, the diesel fuel's thermal properties are
adapted to the climate zone and season in which
it is distributed and sold.
The automatic limitation in low temperatures
increases gradually depending on the age of the
fuel in the tank. When the car has recently been
refuelled there is no limitation, but it increases
the older the fuel in the tank becomes, counted
in months.
The purpose of the function is, in low outside
temperatures, to allow the car to consume fuel at
such a rate that fresh fuel - with the correct ther-
mal resistance - can/must be added before the
critical temperature for the current fuel is
reached.
Fuel age
Old diesel fuel (from approx. 5 months and older)
in combination with condensation can, in some
circumstances, lead to algal and bacterial growth
in the fuel system and/or oxidation of the fuel
with the risk of operational disruption as a result.
To avoid such problems, the car has a built-in
function which checks the age of the fuel. In con-
nection with this, a self-explanatory text message
may appear, for example:
•
Aged fuel Start combustion engine to
consume fuel
•
Aged fuel Engine will run to consume
fuel
•
Aged fuel Fill up fuel tank
Follow the recommended action where appropri-
ate.
Empty tank
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel starva-
tion, the fuel system needs a few moments to
carry out a check. Do this before starting the
engine, once the fuel tank has been filled with
diesel:
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch and push it in to the end position. For
more information, see Key positions (p. 82).
2.
Press the START button without depressing
the brake and/or clutch pedal.
3. Wait approx. one minute.
4. To start the engine: Depress the brake
and/or clutch pedal and then press the
START button again.
NOTE
Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel
shortage:
•
Stop the car on as flat/level ground as
possible - if the car is tilting there is a risk
of air pockets in the fuel supply.
12
Diesel fuel with maximum 7 vol % FAME (B7) is permitted.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
298
To bear in mind when you have run out
of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel. In the event of an
empty tank, it is possible to continue driving with
the available charge in the hybrid battery. After
refilling the fuel, it may seem to take longer to
start the engine (up to 30 seconds). In certain
cases, repeated attempts to start the car may
also be required.
Once the engine has been started, it is recom-
mended to keep it running for at least 5 minutes.
Select drive mode AWD or POWER in order to
facilitate the supply of fuel.
If the message
Internal combustion engine
unavailable Limited performance and
mileage is shown in the combined instrument
panel's information display - switch off and then
restart the engine again to regain full function.
Draining condensation from the fuel
filter
13
The fuel filter separates condensation from the
fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine operation.
For optimum performance, it is important to fol-
low the service intervals for fuel filter change as
well as to use genuine parts developed specifi-
cally for this purpose.
The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet or
if you suspect that the car has been filled with
contaminated fuel. For more information, see
Volvo service programme (p. 356).
IMPORTANT
Certain special additives remove the water
separation in the fuel filter.
Related information
•
Fuel - handling (p. 295)
•
Diesel particle filter (DPF) (p. 298)
•
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 424)
Diesel particle filter (DPF)
Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter,
which results in more efficient emission control.
The particles in the exhaust gases are collected
in the filter during normal driving. So-called
"regeneration" is started in order to burn away
the particles and empty the filter. This requires
the engine to have reached normal operating
temperature.
Regeneration of the particle filter is automatic
and normally takes 10-20 minutes. It may take a
little longer at a low average speed. Fuel con-
sumption may increase slightly during regenera-
tion.
During regeneration, charging of the hybrid bat-
tery is activated temporarily in the background,
which is similar to the SAVE function, see Drive
system - drive modes (p. 270).
Regeneration in cold weather
If the car is frequently driven short distances in
cold weather then the engine does not reach
normal operating temperature. This means that
regeneration of the diesel particle filter does not
take place and the filter is not emptied.
When the filter has become approx. 80% full of
particles, a yellow warning triangle is shown in
the combined instrument panel, and the message
13
Applicable to five-cylinder engines only.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
299
Soot filter full See manual is shown in its
information display.
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car
until the engine reaches normal operating tem-
perature, preferably on a main road or motorway.
The car should then be driven for approximately
20 minutes more.
NOTE
The following may arise during regeneration:
•
a smaller reduction of engine power may
be noticed temporarily
•
fuel consumption may increase temporar-
ily
•
a smell of burning may arise.
When regeneration is complete the warning text
is cleared automatically.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather - the
engine then reaches normal operating tempera-
ture more quickly.
IMPORTANT
If the filter is completely filled with particles, it
may be difficult to start the engine and the fil-
ter is non-functional. Then there is a risk that
the filter will need to be replaced.
Related information
•
Fuel - handling (p. 295)
•
Fuel - diesel (p. 296)
•
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 424)
•
Fuel tank - volume (p. 421)
Catalytic converters
The purpose of the catalytic converters is to
purify exhaust gases. They are located close to
the engine so that operating temperature is
reached quickly.
The catalytic converters consist of a monolith
(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel
walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/
rhodium/palladium. These metals act as cata-
lysts, i.e. they participate in and accelerate a
chemical reaction without being used up them-
selves.
Lambda-sond
TM
oxygen sensor
The Lambda-sond is part of a control system
intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel
economy. For more information, see Fuel con-
sumption and CO2 emissions (p. 424).
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content
of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This
value is fed into an electronic system that contin-
uously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel to
air directed to the engine is continuously
adjusted. These adjustments create optimal con-
ditions for efficient combustion, and together with
the three-way catalytic converter reduce harmful
emissions (hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide and
nitrous oxides).
Related information
•
Fuel - diesel (p. 296)
STARTING AND DRIVING
300
Charging the hybrid battery
In addition to the fuel tank, as in a conventional
car, the car is equipped with a rechargeable bat-
tery - a so-called hybrid battery of the lithium-ion
type.
The hybrid battery is charged using a charging
cable with control unit (p. 303) which is located
in the storage area under the cargo area floor,
see Charging cable with control unit (p. 303).
NOTE
Volvo recommends a charging cable in
accordance with IEC 62196 and IEC 61851
which supports temperature monitoring.
The time it takes for the hybrid battery to be
charged is dependent on the charging current
(p. 301) that is used.
During the charging of the car's hybrid battery,
the control unit shows the current status (p. 305)
during ongoing charging and after charging is
complete.
While the hybrid battery is being charged, charg-
ing is also in progress for the car's starter battery
(p. 380).
If the hybrid battery's temperature is below
-10 ºC or above 30 ºC then it may mean that
some of the car's functions are changed or
unavailable because the capacity of the hybrid
batteries is reduced outside this temperature
range.
Electric operation is not possible if the tempera-
ture of the battery is too low or too high. If drive
mode PURE(see Drive systems and drive modes
(p. 270)) is then selected, the internal combus-
tion engine starts.
Charging with fixed control unit in
accordance with mode 3
14
In certain markets the control unit is installed
within a charging station connected to the mains
power circuit. In which case, the charging cable
has no control unit of its own.
Instead, it has a special connector to be used to
connect the charging cable to the charging sta-
tion. Follow the instructions at the charging sta-
tion.
NOTE
The car is not compatible with all types of
charging station and cannot take more than
20 A of current intensity. If the car is con-
nected to a charging station that is incompati-
ble with the car or which transmits a current
intensity above the car's current limit, the LED
indicator in the charging input socket will illu-
minate in red. Charging is then not possible.
Charging with the fuel-driven engine
The car generates current for the battery and the
battery is charged when the fuel-driven engine is
running. In the SAVE drive mode the fuel-driven
engine charges the battery and makes sure that
the energy level in the battery does not fall below
a capacity equivalent to approx. 20 km driving
with electric operation.
Read more about Drive systems and drive modes
(p. 270).
Related information
•
Charging the hybrid battery - preparations
(p. 302)
•
Range for electric operation (p. 293)
14
European standard - EN 61851-1.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
301
Charging current
Charging current is used for charging the hybrid
battery (p. 300) as well as preconditioning of
the car. Charging cable (p. 303) between the
car's charging input socket and a 230 VAC
socket can be set for different current intensity
loads (6-16 A) using the control unit.
When the charging cable is activated the com-
bined instrument panel shows a message and a
lamp (p. 308) in the car's charging input socket
illuminates. The charging current is mainly used
for battery charging, but is also used for precon-
ditioning (p. 138) the car.
IMPORTANT
Never unplug the charging cable from the
230 VAC socket while charging is in progress
- there is then a risk of damaging the
230 VAC socket. Always stop charging first,
and then disconnect the charging cable.
Charging time varies with the amperage setting
on the control unit.
See examples in the following table:
Current intensity (A)
A
Charging time (hours)
6 7.5–10.0
10 4.5–7.0
16 4.0–5.5
A
Maximum charging current may vary depending on market.
NOTE
•
If the weather is very hot or very cold,
some of the charging current is used to
heat/cool the hybrid battery and the pas-
senger compartment, which results in a
longer charging time.
•
The charging time is extended if precon-
ditioning (p. 138) has been selected. The
time required depends mainly on the out-
side temperature.
Charging cable plug and charging input socket.
Normally several 230 VAC consumers are
included in a fuse circuit, so additional consum-
ers (e.g. lighting, vacuum cleaner, electric drill,
etc.) can be on the same fuse.
Example 1
If the car is connected to a 230 VAC/10 A
socket and the control unit is set at 16 A, then
the car will attempt to draw 16 A from the
230 VAC mains power circuit - after a while the
overloaded 10 A fuse for the socket will be trip-
ped and battery charging stopped.
In which case, reset the fuse for the socket and
select a lower charging current on the control
unit, see Charging the hybrid battery - prepara-
tions (p. 302).
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
302
Example 2
If the car is connected to a 230 VAC/10 A
socket and the control unit is set at 10 A, then
the car will draw 10 A from the 230 VAC mains
power circuit. If additional consumers are con-
nected to the same socket (or another socket in
the same fuse circuit) then there is a risk that the
fuse for the socket/fuse socket will be overloa-
ded and triggered, at which point battery charg-
ing is stopped.
In which case, reset the fuse for the socket/fuse
circuit and select a lower charging current on the
control unit - or disconnect other consumers
from the socket.
Example 3
If the car is connected to a 230 VAC/10 A
socket and the control unit is set at 6 A, then the
car will only draw 6 A from the 230 VAC mains
power circuit. Battery charging will of course take
longer, but then additional consumers can be
connected at the same time to the same socket
(or fuse circuit) as long as the total load does not
exceed the capacity of the fuse circuit.
Related information
•
Range for electric operation (p. 293)
Charging the hybrid battery -
preparations
Before recharging the car's hybrid battery can
be started (p. 308) a number of preparations
need to be made.
WARNING
•
Charging the hybrid battery must only
take place from approved grounded 230
VAC sockets.
•
The control unit's ground fault breaker
protects the car, but there may still be a
risk of overloading the 230 VAC mains
power circuit.
•
Avoid visible worn or damaged mains
sockets since they may lead to fire dam-
age and/or personal injury if used.
•
Never use an extension cable.
WARNING
The hybrid battery must only be replaced by a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
Before charging
IMPORTANT
•
The control unit should not be flooded or
immersed in water.
•
Avoid exposing the control unit and its
plug to direct sunlight. In such cases, the
overheating protection in the plug is at
risk of reducing or interrupting the charg-
ing of the hybrid battery.
IMPORTANT
•
Check that the 230 VAC socket has ade-
quate power supply for charging electric
vehicles - in the event of uncertainty the
socket must be checked by a qualified
professional.
•
If the socket has unknown current inten-
sity - use the lowest level on the control
unit.
On the charging cable's control unit (p. 303)
select the required charging current (p. 301)
6-16 A
15
. On delivery, the lowest possible charg-
ing current is preset.
15
Maximum charging current may vary depending on market.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
303
Opening/closing the cover for the
charging input socket
Press in the rear section of the cover and
release.
Open the cover.
Pull away the cover for the charging input
socket and secure it in the holder inside the
cover. Make sure that the cover's rubber
straps are bent downwards in order to pre-
vent the cover coming off from the holder.
Close the cover for the charging input socket in
reverse order.
Related information
•
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 300)
•
Charging the hybrid battery - ending (p. 310)
Charging cable with control unit
The charging cable with its control unit is used
to charge the car's hybrid battery. Use a charg-
ing cable recommended by Volvo.
The charging cable is located in the storage compart-
ment under the cargo area's floor cover.
Specifications, charging cable
Enclosure class IP67
Ambient temperature
-32 ºC to +50 ºC
WARNING
The charging cable must not be used if any
part of it is damaged - there is then the risk of
electric shock and serious personal injury.
A damaged or inoperative charging cable
must only be repaired by a workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
IMPORTANT
Never unplug the charging cable from the
230 VAC socket while charging is in progress
- there is then a risk of damaging the
230 VAC socket. Always stop charging first,
and then disconnect the charging cable.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
304
Control unit
Control unit indicators and controls.
Indicator shows selected charging current
16
.
The symbol illuminates when the charging
cable is plugged into a 230 VAC socket.
Pushbuttons to increase/decrease the
charging current.
The symbol illuminates when the charging
cable is plugged into the car's 230 VAC
input socket.
IMPORTANT
Multiple plugs, overvoltage protection or simi-
lar devices must not be used together with
the charging cable since this may involve a
risk of fire, electric shocks, etc.
An adapter between the 230 VAC socket and
charging cable may only be used if the
adapter is marked with approval in accord-
ance with IEC 61851 and IEC 62196.
NOTE
The charging cable will remember the last
setting of the charging current. It is therefore
important to adjust the setting if another
230 VAC socket is used at the next charging.
Related information
•
Charging cable with control unit - status
messages (p. 305)
•
Charging cable with control unit - ground
fault breaker (p. 307)
•
Charging current (p. 301)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
305
Charging cable with control unit -
status messages
During the charging (p. 300) of the car's hybrid
battery, the indicators on the charging cable's
control unit (p. 303) show the current status
during ongoing charging and after charging is
complete.
Control unit indicators and controls.
16
Maximum charging current may vary depending on market.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
306
Control unit display Status Specification Recommended action
The indicator for charging current (1) is
extinguished. The car symbol (4) illuminates
with a constant green glow.
Standby
•
The charging cable is connected to the car.
•
Charging is possible but has not yet been
activated by the electronics in the car.
Wait until the battery is fully charged.
Existing current consumption is shown with
a green indicator (1). The car symbol (4)
illuminates with a constant green glow.
Charging in pro-
gress.
•
The car's electronics have started charging.
•
Charging in progress.
Wait until the battery is fully charged.
The indicator for charging current (1) is
extinguished. The car symbol (4) flashes
red.
Charging is not
possible.
•
There is a communication error between the
control unit and the car.
•
The ventilation for the car's electronics is not
adequate, not activated or defective.
1. Check all connections or use
another 230 VAC socket.
2. Restart the battery charging.
The car symbol (4) illuminates with a con-
stant red glow.
Charging is not
possible.
•
The ground fault breaker on the charging
cable has triggered.
1. Unplug the charging cable from
the 230 VAC socket.
2. The ground fault breaker is reset
and the unit restarts.
The indicator for charging current (1) and
the house symbol (2) flash red.
Charging is not
possible.
Temperature monitoring has triggered for the
230 VAC socket.
Restart charging. If the problem per-
sists - consult a qualified professional.
Related information
•
Charging current (p. 301)
STARTING AND DRIVING
307
Charging cable with control unit -
temperature monitoring
In order for the car's hybrid battery to be
charged (p. 300) safely every time, the control
unit (p. 303) has a built-in monitoring device for
the charging current.
The control unit's monitoring device ensures that
the permissible charging current (p. 301) is auto-
matically adjusted to take into account the safety
aspect. This ensures safe operation without
supervision as well as optimised charging time.
NOTE
Use a charging cable recommended by Volvo
in accordance with IEC 62196 and IEC
61851 that supports temperature monitoring.
Temperature fuse
Temperature monitoring is activated automatically
when the car's hybrid battery starts charging. If a
critical temperature is reached then the charging
current is lowered. If this happens repeatedly,
then charging is switched off.
IMPORTANT
If the temperature monitoring has automati-
cally lowered the charging current repeatedly
and charging has been interrupted then the
cause of the overheating must be investiga-
ted and rectified.
Charging cable with control unit -
ground fault breaker
The control unit for the charging cable (p. 303)
has a built-in ground fault breaker that protects
the car and the user from electric shocks
caused by system faults.
If the control module's built-in ground fault
breaker is tripped then the car symbol illuminates
with red constant glow - check the 230 VAC
socket.
IMPORTANT
The control unit's earth fault switch does not
protect the 230 VAC socket.
Related information
•
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 300)
STARTING AND DRIVING
308
Charging the hybrid battery -
starting
The car's hybrid battery is charged with a charg-
ing cable between the car and a 230 VAC
socket
17
.
IMPORTANT
Never connect the charging cable when there
is a risk of lightning.
NOTE
Use a charging cable recommended by Volvo
in accordance with IEC 62196 and IEC
61851 that supports temperature monitoring.
Take out the charging cable (p. 303) from the
storage compartment under the cargo area floor.
Connect the charging cable to a 230 VAC
socket. Never use an extension cord.
2. Set the correct charging current (p. 301) (for
current 230 VAC socket) on the control unit.
Remove the charging handle's cover and
then connect the handle to the car.
Location of the charging handle's cover.
IMPORTANT
To avoid damage to the paint, e.g. in the event
of high winds, position the charging handle's
protective cover so that it does not touch the
car.
17
The voltage in the socket may vary depending on market.
STARTING AND DRIVING
309
5. The charging cable's charging handle is fas-
tened/locked in, and charging starts after
approx. 10 seconds.
To check the remaining charging time:
•
Press the remote control key's button for
Approach lighting - the combined instru-
ment panel then shows the estimated
time.
Battery charging can be interrupted for a
while if the car is unlocked:
•
and the door is opened - charging restarts
after 2 minutes.
•
without the door being opened - the car is
relocked automatically, see Locking/
unlocking - from the outside (p. 178).
Charging restarts after 1 minute.
NOTE
Approach lighting must be active in order to
show the remaining charging time. Its settings
are managed in the menu system MY CAR
(p. 115).
IMPORTANT
Never unplug the charging cable from the
230 VAC socket while charging is in progress
- there is then a risk of damaging the
230 VAC socket. Always stop charging first,
and then disconnect the charging cable.
6. When charging is complete (see following
below) - open the driver's door. Then the
combined instrument panel illuminates and
can show information about charge status.
The LED lamps show the current status while
charging is in progress. The white, blue, red and
yellow lamps are activated when the passenger
compartment lighting is switched on - they
remain switched on for a while after the passen-
ger compartment lighting has been switched off.
LED lamp glow Specification
White constant LED light
Yellow constant
Waiting mode
A
- waiting
for charging to start.
Green flashing
Charging in progress
B
.
LED lamp glow Specification
Green constant
Charging complete
C
.
Blue - flashing or
constant
Timer switched on.
Red - flashing, con-
stant
A fault has arisen.
A
For example, after a door has been opened or the charging
cable's plug is not locked in.
B
The slower the flashing, the closer to fully charged.
C
Extinguishes after a while.
Condensation from the air conditioning may drip
under the car during charging. This is normal and
takes place due to cooling of the hybrid battery.
Related information
•
Charging the hybrid battery - ending (p. 310)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
310
Charging the hybrid battery - ending
Finish charging by unlocking the car, unplugging
the charging cable from the car's charging input
socket and then from the 230 VAC socket
18
.
NOTE
To be able to detach the charging cable glove
from the car's 230 VAC intake, the car must
first be unlocked using the remote control
key/PCC.
Unlock the car with the remote control
key/PCC* - the charging cable's locked plug
releases/is unlocked.
Unplug the cable from the car's electrical
input socket, refit the charging input socket's
cover and close the hatch, see Charging the
hybrid battery - preparations (p. 302).
Unplug the cable from the 230 VAC socket.
Return the charging cable to the storage
space under the cargo area floor.
Charging with the diesel engine
The hybrid battery can also be
charged by the car's diesel
engine, see Drive systems
(p. 269).
Related information
•
Charging cable with control unit (p. 303)
•
Charging the hybrid battery - starting
(p. 308)
18
The voltage in the socket may vary depending on market.
STARTING AND DRIVING
311
Long-term storage of vehicles with
hybrid batteries
To minimise hybrid battery degradation during
prolonged storage (longer than 1 month) of the
vehicle, a charge level of approximately 25% is
recommended, as indicated in the combined
instrument panel.
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the "Hybrid" theme for the combined
instrument panel. For information on menu
navigation, see Combined instrument panel
(p. 68).
2. If the state of charge is high - run the car
until approx. 25% remains. If the state of
charge is low - press the POWER button and
run the car until approx. 25% is achieved. For
more information on the drive modes, see
Drive system - drive modes (p. 270).
3. If storage has lasted longer than 6 months or
the hybrid battery's charge level is apprecia-
bly lower than 25% - start the engine in
POWER drive mode and leave it running for
at least 10 minutes until the state of charge
has stabilised at around 25% again.
This compensates for the natural self-dis-
charge that occurred during the prolonged
storage. Check the charge level continuously
in the combined instrument panel, see
Charging the hybrid battery - starting
(p. 308).
If the car is locked in and cannot be driven, and
the hybrid battery's charge level is significantly
below 25% - charge the battery for approx.
45 minutes at the lowest level, depending on the
state of charge. Check the charge level continu-
ously in the combined instrument panel.
For handling the starter battery in connection
with long-term storage, see Starter battery - gen-
eral (p. 380).
NOTE
Choose the coolest location possible for the
vehicle in order to minimise aging of the bat-
tery during long-term storage. During summer
the vehicle should preferably remain indoors
or outdoors in the shade, depending on
where the temperature is lowest.
IMPORTANT
During long-term storage, the charging cable
must not be plugged into the car's charging
input socket.
Old fuel
Old diesel fuel (from approx. 5 months and older)
in combination with condensation can, in some
circumstances, lead to algal and bacterial growth
in the fuel system and/or oxidation of the fuel
with the risk of operational disruption as a result.
For more information, see Energy flow (p. 273).
Related information
•
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 300)
•
Range for electric operation (p. 293)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
312
Driving with a trailer*
When driving with a trailer there are a number of
important points to think about regarding e.g. the
towing bracket, the trailer and how the load is
positioned in the trailer.
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's pay-
load by a corresponding weight. For more
detailed information, see Weights (p. 412).
If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo, then
the car is delivered with the necessary equipment
for driving with a trailer.
•
The car's towing bracket must be of an
approved type.
•
If the towbar is retrofitted, check with your
Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped for
driving with a trailer.
•
Distribute the load on the trailer so that the
weight on the towing bracket complies with
the specified maximum towball load.
•
Increase the tyre pressure to the recom-
mended pressure for a full load. For informa-
tion on the tyre pressure, see Tyres -
approved tyre pressures (p. 429).
•
The engine is loaded more heavily than usual
when driving with a trailer.
•
Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is
brand new. Wait until it has been driven at
least 1000 km.
•
The brakes are loaded much more than usual
on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift
to a lower gear and adjust your speed.
•
For safety reasons, the maximum permitted
speed for the car when coupled with a trailer
should not be exceeded. Follow the regula-
tions in force for the permitted speeds and
weights.
•
Maintain a low speed when driving with a
trailer up long, steep ascents.
•
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more
than 12%.
Trailer cable
An adapter is required if the car's towing bracket
has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has 7 pin
electrics. Use an adapter cable approved by
Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on the
ground.
Direction indicators and brake lights on
the trailer
If any of the trailer's lamps for direction indicators
are broken, then the combined instrument pan-
el's symbol for direction indicators flashes faster
than normal and the information display shows
the text
Trailer indicator malfunction.
If any of the trailer's lamps for the brake light are
broken then the
Trailer brake light
malfunction text is shown.
Trailer weights
For information on Volvo's permitted trailer
weights, see Towing capacity and towball load
(p. 413).
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer weights
are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle
regulations can further limit trailer weights
and speeds. Towbars can be certified for
higher towing weights than the car can
actually tow.
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for trailer
weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be
difficult to control in the event of sudden
movement and braking.
Related information
•
Driving with a trailer* - automatic gearbox
(p. 313)
•
Towing bracket/Towbar* (p. 313)
•
Lamp replacement - general (p. 368)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
313
Driving with a trailer* - automatic
gearbox
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot
climate there may be a risk of overheating.
•
An automatic gearbox selects the optimum
gear related to load and engine speed.
•
In the event of overheating a warning symbol
is illuminated in the combined instrument
panel with a message that is shown in the
information display - follow the recommenda-
tion given.
Steep inclines
•
Do not lock the automatic transmission in a
higher gear than the engine "can cope with"
- it is not always a good idea to drive at a
high gear with low engine revolutions.
Parking on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Activate the parking brake.
3.
Move the gear selector to position P.
4. Release the foot brake.
•
Move the gear selector to park position P
when parking an automatic car with a hitched
trailer. Always use the parking brake.
•
Block the wheels with chocks when parking
a car with hitched trailer on a hill.
Starting on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
2.
Move the gear selector to driving position D.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Release the foot brake and start driving off.
Related information
•
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic (p. 277)
Towing bracket/Towbar*
A towing bracket means that it is possible to e.g.
tow a trailer behind the car.
If the car is equipped with a detachable/remova-
ble towbar, the installation instructions for the
loose section must be followed carefully, see
Detachable towbar* - attachment/removal
(p. 315).
WARNING
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable
towbar:
•
Follow the installation instructions care-
fully.
•
The detachable section must be locked
with the key before setting off.
•
Check that the indicator window shows
green.
Important checks
•
The towbar's towball must be cleaned and
greased regularly.
NOTE
When a hitch with a vibration damper is used,
the towball must not be lubricated.
This also applies when fitting a bicycle rack
that is clamped in around the towball.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
314
Related information
•
Driving with a trailer* (p. 312)
Detachable towbar* - storage
Store the detachable towbar in the cargo area.
Towbar storage space.
IMPORTANT
Always remove the towbar after use and store
it in the appointed location in the car.
Related information
•
Detachable towbar* - specifications (p. 314)
•
Detachable towbar* - attachment/removal
(p. 315)
•
Driving with a trailer* (p. 312)
Detachable towbar* - specifications
Specifications for detachable towbar.
Specifications
G021485
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
315
Dimensions, mounting points (mm)
A 998
B 81
C 854
D 427
E 109
F 282
G Side member
H Ball centre
Related information
•
Detachable towbar* - attachment/removal
(p. 315)
•
Detachable towbar* - storage (p. 314)
•
Driving with a trailer* (p. 312)
Detachable towbar* - attachment/
removal
The attachment/removal of the detachable tow-
bar is performed in the following way:
Attaching
G018928
Remove the protective cover by first pressing
in the catch
and then pulling the cover
straight back
.
G021487
Ensure that the mechanism is in the
unlocked position by turning the key clock-
wise.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
316
G021488
The indicator window must show red.
G021489
Insert the towbar until you hear a click.
G021490
The indicator window must show green.
G000000
Turn the key anticlockwise to locked position.
Remove the key from the lock.
G021494
Check that the towbar is secure by pulling it
up, down and back.
WARNING
If the towbar is not fitted correctly then it must
be detached and reattached in accordance
with the previous instructions.
IMPORTANT
Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch,
the remainder of the towbar should be clean
and dry.
NOTE
When a hitch with a vibration damper is used,
the towball must not be lubricated.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
317
G021495
Safety cable.
WARNING
Take care to secure the trailer's safety cable
in the intended bracket.
Removing the towbar
Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the
unlocked position.
Push in the locking wheel and turn it
anticlockwise
until you hear a click.
Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it
comes to a stop. Hold it in this position while
pulling the towbar rearward and upward.
WARNING
Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in the
car, see Detachable towbar* - storage
(p. 314).
G018929
Push the protective cover until it snaps tight.
Related information
•
Detachable towbar* - storage (p. 314)
•
Detachable towbar* - specifications (p. 314)
•
Driving with a trailer* (p. 312)
STARTING AND DRIVING
318
Trailer Stability Assist - TSA
19
The trailer stability assist TSA (Trailer Stability
Assist) function is designed to stabilise the car
and trailer combination if it begins to snake.
TSA- the function is included in the stability sys-
tem (p. 190) ESC
20
.
Function
The snaking phenomenon can occur with any
car/trailer combination. Snaking normally occurs
at high speeds. But, there is a risk of it occurring
at lower speeds if the trailer is overloaded or the
load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back.
In order for snaking to occur, there must be a
triggering factor, e.g.:
•
Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and
powerful side wind.
•
Car with trailer drives on an uneven road sur-
face or in a pothole.
•
Sweeping steering wheel movements.
Operation
If snaking has started, it could be difficult or even
impossible to suppress. This makes the car/
trailer combination difficult to control and there is
a risk that you could, for example, end up in the
wrong lane or leave the carriageway.
The trailer stability assist function continually
monitors car movements, particularly lateral
movements. If snaking is detected, the front
wheels are individually braked. This serves to sta-
bilise the car/trailer combination. This is often
enough to help the driver regain control of the
car.
If snaking is not eliminated the first time the TSA
system comes into action, the car/trailer combi-
nation is braked with all wheels and engine
power is reduced. Once snaking has been gradu-
ally suppressed and the car/trailer combination is
stable once again, the system stops regulating
and the driver once again has full control of the
car. For more information, see Electronic stability
control (ESC) - operation (p. 191).
Miscellaneous
Engagement of TSA may take place at higher
speeds.
NOTE
TSA function is switched off if the driver
selects
Sport mode, see Electronic stability
control (ESC) - general (p. 190).
TSA may fail to engage if the driver uses sudden
steering wheel movements to try to rectify the
snaking because, in such a situation, the system
cannot determine whether it is the trailer or the
driver that is causing the snaking.
The ESC
20
symbol in the combined
instrument panel flashes when the TSA
system is working.
Related information
•
Electronic stability control (ESC) - general
(p. 190)
19
Included in the installation of Volvo genuine towbar.
20
(Electronic Stability Control) - Electronic stability control.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
319
Towing
Towing the V60 Twin Engine is not permitted.
When moving the car it must be transported
(p. 320) raised up with all the wheels on a
recovery vehicle's platform.
When towing another car
Towing another car consumes a lot of energy -
use drive mode AWD. This then charges the
hybrid battery, in combination with improving the
car's driving characteristics and roadholding, see
Drive system - drive modes (p. 270).
Jump starting
Do not tow the car to bump start the engine. Use
a donor battery if the starter battery is discharged
and the engine does not start, see Jump starting
with another battery (p. 268).
IMPORTANT
The electric drive motor and the catalytic con-
verter may be damaged during attempts to
tow-start the car.
Related information
•
Hazard warning flashers (p. 99)
•
Towing eye (p. 319)
•
Recovery (p. 320)
Towing eye
The towing eye is screwed into a threaded
socket behind a cover on the rear right-hand
side of the bumper.
Attaching the towing eye
Take out the towing eye, which is located
behind the panel on the left-hand side of the
cargo area.
The cover for the towing eye's attachment
point is available in two variants which must
be opened in different ways:
•
Open the variant with a recess using a
coin or similar inserted in the recess, turn-
ing it outwards. Then turn out the cover
completely and remove it.
•
The second variant has a marking along
one side or in a corner: Press the marking
with a finger and fold out the opposite
side/corner at the same time using a coin
or similar - the cover turns around its axis
and can then be removed.
Screw the towing eye right in up to its flange.
Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g. using the
wheel wrench.
After use, unscrew the towing eye and return
it to its place.
Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper.
The towing eye may be used to pull the car up
onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform.
The car's position and ground clearance deter-
mine whether it is possible. If the slope of the
recovery vehicle's ramp is too steep, or if the
ground clearance under the car is inadequate,
then the car may be damaged if you try to pull it
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
320
up using the towing eye. Raise the car using the
recovery vehicle's lifting device if necessary.
WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind
the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up
onto the flatbed platform.
Related information
•
Towing (p. 319)
•
Recovery (p. 320)
Recovery
Recovery means that the vehicle is transported
away by means of another vehicle.
Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
The towing eye may be used to pull the car up
onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform.
The car's position and ground clearance deter-
mine whether it is possible. If the slope of the
recovery vehicle's ramp is too steep, or if the
ground clearance under the car is inadequate,
then the car may be damaged if you try to pull it
up using the towing eye. Raise the car using the
recovery vehicle's lifting device if necessary.
WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind
the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up
onto the flatbed platform.
IMPORTANT
Note that the V60 Twin Engine must always
be transported raised up with all the wheels
on the recovery vehicle's platform.
Related information
•
Towing (p. 319)
WHEELS AND TYRES
WHEELS AND TYRES
322
Tyres - maintenance
Amongst other things, the function of the tyres is
to carry load, provide grip on the road surface,
dampen vibration and protect the wheel from
wear.
Driving characteristics
Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characteris-
tics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pressure
and speed rating are important for how the car
performs.
Tyre age
All tyres older than 6 years old should be
checked by an expert even if they seem undam-
aged. Tyres age and decompose, even if they are
hardly ever or never used. The function can
therefore be affected. This applies to all tyres that
are stored for future use. Examples of external
signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for
use are cracks or discoloration.
New tyres
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin
to harden at the same time as the friction
capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For
this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as possible
when you replace them. This is especially impor-
tant with regard to winter tyres. The last four dig-
its in the sequence mean the week and year of
manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking
(Department of Transportation), and this is stated
with four digits, for example 1510. The tyre in the
figure was manufactured in week 15 of 2010.
Summer and winter wheels
When summer and winter wheels are changed
the wheels should be marked with which side of
the car they were mounted on, for example L for
left and R for right.
Wear and maintenance
Correct tyre pressure (p. 324) results in more
even wear. Driving style, tyre pressure, climate
and road condition affect how quickly your tyres
age and wear.
To avoid differences in tread depth and to pre-
vent wear patterns arising, the front and rear
wheels can be switched with each other. A suita-
ble distance for the first change is approx.
5000 km and then at 10000 km intervals.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop is contacted for checking if you are
uncertain about tread depth. If significant differ-
ences in wear (> 1 mm difference in tread depth)
between tyres have already occurred, then the
least worn tyres must always be fitted on the rear.
Understeer is normally easier to correct than
oversteer, and leads to the car continuing for-
wards in a straight line rather than having the
rear end skidding to one side, resulting in possi-
ble complete loss of control over the car. This is
why it is important for the rear wheels never to
lose grip before the front wheels.
WARNING
A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control
over the car.
Storage
Wheels with tyres fitted must be stored lying
down or hanging up - never standing up.
WHEELS AND TYRES
323
Related information
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 325)
•
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 326)
•
Tyres - load index (p. 326)
•
Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 323)
•
Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 324)
Tyres - direction of rotation
Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to
only turn in one direction have the direction of
rotation marked with an arrow.
G021778
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
The tyre must always rotate in the same direction
throughout its lifespan. Tyres should only be
switched between front and rear positions, never
between left and right-hand sides, or vice versa. If
the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's braking
characteristics and capacity to force rain and
slush out of the way are adversely affected. Tyres
with the greatest tread depth should always be
fitted to the rear of the car (to decrease the risk
of skidding).
NOTE
Make sure that both pairs of wheels have the
same type and dimension, and also the same
make.
Follow the recommended tyre pressures speci-
fied in the tyre pressure table (p. 429).
Related information
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 325)
•
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 326)
•
Tyres - load index (p. 326)
•
Tyres - maintenance (p. 322)
•
Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 324)
WHEELS AND TYRES
324
Tyres - tread wear indicators
Tread wear indicators show the status of the
tyre's tread depth.
G021829
Tread wear indicators.
A tread wear indicators is a narrow elevation
across the longitudinal grooves of the tyre's tread
pattern. On the side of the tyre are the letters
TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread
depth is down to 1.6 mm, the tread will be level in
height with the tread wear indicators. Change to
new tyres as soon as possible. Remember that
tyres with little tread depth provide very poor grip
in rain and snow.
Related information
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 325)
•
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 326)
•
Tyres - load index (p. 326)
•
Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 323)
•
Tyres - maintenance (p. 322)
Tyres - air pressure
Tyres can have different air pressures which are
measured in bar.
Check the air pressure in the tyres
The tyre pressures must be checked every
month.
Check the tyre pressure on cold tyres. "Cold
tyres" means the tyres are the same temperature
as the ambient temperature. After several few kil-
ometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the
pressure increases.
Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel con-
sumption, shortens tyre lifespan and impairs the
car's driving characteristics. Driving on tyres with
tyre pressure that is too low could result in the
tyres overheating and being damaged. Tyre pres-
sure affects travelling comfort, road noise and
driving characteristics.
NOTE
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a
natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also var-
ies depending on ambient temperature.
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
325
Tyre pressure label
G021830
The tyre pressure label on the driver side's door
pillar (between frame and rear door) shows the
tyre pressures for the car's recommended tyre
dimensions. This is also specified in the tyre
pressure table, see Tyres - approved tyre pres-
sures (p. 429).
Related information
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 325)
•
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 326)
•
Tyres - load index (p. 326)
•
Tyres - maintenance (p. 322)
•
Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 324)
•
Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 429)
Wheel and wheel rim dimensions
Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in
accordance with the examples in the table
below.
The car has an approval for the complete vehicle.
This means that certain combinations of wheel
(wheel rim) and tyre are approved.
Wheels (rims) have a designation of dimensions,
for example: 7Jx16x50.
7 Rim width in inches
J Rim flange profile
16 Rim diameter in inches
50 Off-set in mm (distance from wheel cen-
tre to wheel contact surface against the
hub)
Related information
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 325)
•
Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 429)
•
Wheels and tyres - approved dimensions
(p. 427)
Tyres - dimensions
The car's tyres have a certain dimension, see the
examples in the table below.
The dimensions are stated on all car tyres.
Example of designation:235/45R17 97W.
235 Tyre width (mm)
45 Ratio between tyre wall height and tyre
width (%)
R Radial ply
17 Rim diameter in inches (")
97 Codes for the maximum permitted tyre
load, tyre load index (LI)
W Speed rating for maximum permitted
speed, speed rating (SS). (In this case
270 km/h (168 mph).)
The car has an approval for the complete vehicle
with certain combinations of wheel rims and
tyres.
Related information
•
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 326)
•
Tyres - load index (p. 326)
•
Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 323)
•
Tyres - maintenance (p. 322)
•
Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 429)
•
Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 325)
WHEELS AND TYRES
326
•
Wheels and tyres - approved dimensions
(p. 427)
•
Load index and speed rating (p. 428)
Tyres - load index
Load index indicates a tyre's ability to carry a
certain load.
Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load, a
load index (LI). The car's weight determines the
load capacity required of the tyres. Lowest per-
missible index is specified in the tyre load index
table, see section "Specifications" in the printed
owner's manual.
Related information
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 325)
•
Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 429)
•
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 326)
•
Tyres - maintenance (p. 322)
•
Wheels and tyres - approved dimensions
(p. 427)
Tyres - speed ratings
Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum
speed and therefore belongs to a particular
speed rating (SS - Speed Symbol).
Tyre speed class must at least correspond with
the car's top speed. The table below indicates the
maximum permitted speed that applies for each
speed rating (SS). The only exception to these
regulations is the winter tyre (p. 327)
1
, where a
lower speed rating may be used. If such a tyre is
chosen, the car must not be driven faster than
the speed rating of the tyre (for example, class Q
can be driven at a maximum of 160 km/h
(100 mph)). Traffic regulations determine how
fast a car can be driven, not the speed rating of
the tyres.
NOTE
The maximum permitted speed is specified in
the table.
Q 160 km/h (100 mph) (only used on win-
ter tyres)
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
V 240 km/h (149 mph)
1
Both those with metal studs and those without.
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
* Option/accessory.
327
W 270 km/h (168 mph)
Y 300 km/h (186 mph)
WARNING
The car must be fitted with tyres which have
the same or a higher load index (p. 326) (LI)
and speed rating (SS) than specified. If a tyre
with too low a load index or speed rating is
used, it may overheat.
Related information
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 325)
•
Tyres - load index (p. 326)
•
Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 323)
Wheel bolts
Wheel bolts are used to fasten the wheels at the
hubs and are available in different versions.
IMPORTANT
The wheel bolts must be tightened to
140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.). Overtightening or loose
tightening may damage the nuts and the
bolts.
Only use rims that are tested and approved by
Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accessories.
Check the torque with a torque wrench.
Do not use lubricant on the threads of the wheel
bolts.
Locking wheel bolts*
Locking wheel bolts* can be used on both alumi-
nium and steel rims.
Related information
•
Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 325)
Winter tyres
Winter tyres are tyres that are adapted for winter
road conditions.
Winter tyres
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular
dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on
engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, the
correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four
wheels.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo
dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types
are most suitable.
Studded tyres
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for
500-1000 km so the studs settle properly into
the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the
studs, a longer service life.
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded
tyres vary from country to country.
Tread depth
Road conditions with ice, slush and low tempera-
tures place considerably higher demands on tyres
than summer conditions. Volvo therefore recom-
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
328
mends not to drive on winter tyres that have a
tread depth of less than 4 mm.
Using snow chains
Snow chains may only be used on the front
wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars).
Never drive faster than 50 km/h (31 mph) with
snow chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this
wears out both the snow chains and tyres.
WARNING
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent
chains designed for the car model, and tyre
and rim dimensions. In the event of uncer-
tainty Volvo recommends that you consult an
authorised Volvo workshop. The wrong snow
chains may cause serious damage to your car
and lead to an accident.
Related information
•
Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 328)
Changing wheels - removing wheels
The car's wheels can be changed for e.g. winter
wheels/winter tyres.
Spare wheel*
The following instructions only apply if a
spare wheel has been purchased as an
accessory for the car. If the car is not equipped
with a spare wheel - see information about Emer-
gency puncture repair (TMK) (p. 346).
The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only
intended for use temporarily and must be
replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as possi-
ble. The car's handling may be altered by the use
of the spare wheel. The spare wheel is smaller
than the normal wheel. The car's ground clear-
ance is affected accordingly. Pay attention to
high kerbs and do not machine wash the car. If
the spare wheel is fitted on the front axle, you
cannot use snow chains at the same time. On all-
wheel drive cars the drive on the rear axle can be
disconnected. The spare wheel must not be
repaired.
The correct tyre pressure for the spare wheel is
stated in the tyre pressure table (p. 429).
IMPORTANT
•
Never drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph) with a spare wheel on the car.
•
The car must never be driven fitted with
more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel.
The spare wheel is supplied in a bag and must be
secured on the cargo area floor using straps.
Cars with four load retaining eyelets.
Turn the handle on the spare wheel bag out
towards you. Attach the sewn-in tensioning strap
hooks in the front load retaining eyelets. Attach
the long strap into one of the front load retaining
eyelets, run the strap diagonally over the spare
wheel and through the upper handle. Tighten the
short tensioning strap onto the long one. Attach
the rear load retaining eyelet and tighten.
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
* Option/accessory.
329
Before changing a wheel
1. Loosen the straps, lift out the spare wheel
from the cargo area and remove it from the
spare wheel bag.
2. To access the towing eye, open the hatch on
the left-hand side of the cargo area.
3.
Take out the jack*, tool to remove the plastic
caps on the wheel bolts and the wheel
wrench* (located in a bag on the cargo area
floor). If another jack is selected, see Raising
the car (p. 359).
Tool for removing the plastic caps on the wheel bolts.
WARNING
Check that the jack is not damaged, that the
threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is
free from dirt.
NOTE
•
If the car is not equipped with the acces-
sory spare wheel then the jack need not
be stored in the car.
•
Volvo recommends only using the jack*
that belongs to the car model in question,
which is indicated on the jack's label.
•
The decal also indicates the jack's maxi-
mum lift capacity at a specified lifting
height.
4. Set up the warning triangle (p. 332) if a
wheel is replaced in a trafficked location. The
car and jack* must be on a firm horizontal
surface.
Removing
1. Apply the parking brake (p. 285) and engage
reverse gear, or position P if the car has an
automatic gearbox.
2. Place chocks in front of and behind the
wheels which will remain on the ground to
prevent them from rolling. Use heavy wooden
blocks or large stones for example.
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
330
3. Screw together the towing eye with the
wheel wrench* until the stop position in
accordance with the following figure.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye must be screwed all the way
into the wheel bolt wrench*.
4. Remove the plastic caps from the wheel
bolts with the intended tool.
5. Loosen the wheel bolts ½-1 turn anticlock-
wise with the wheel wrench*.
WARNING
Never position anything between the ground
and the jack, nor between the jack and the
car's jacking point.
6. There are two jacking points on each side of
the car. Wind up the jack* so that the flange
in the bodywork ends up in the notch in the
head of the jack.
IMPORTANT
The ground must be firm, smooth and level.
7. Lift the car so that the wheel is free. Remove
the wheel bolts and lift off the wheel.
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised on
the jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack. If a wheel must be
changed in a trafficked environment, passen-
gers must stand in a safe place.
NOTE
The normal car jack is only designed for occa-
sional, short-term use, such as when chang-
ing a wheel after a puncture, changing to win-
ter/summer wheels, etc. Only the jack for the
specific car model may be used to raise the
car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or
for a longer time than is required just to
change a wheel, use of a garage jack is rec-
ommended. In this instance, follow the
instructions for use that come with the equip-
ment.
Related information
•
Changing wheels - fitting (p. 331)
•
Jack* (p. 333)
•
Warning triangle (p. 332)
•
Wheel bolts (p. 327)
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
* Option/accessory.
331
Changing wheels - fitting
It is important that the procedure for fitting the
wheel is carried out correctly.
Installation
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised on
the jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack. If a wheel must be
changed in a trafficked environment, passen-
gers must stand in a safe place.
1. Clean the contact surfaces between wheel
and hub.
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts
thoroughly.
Do not use lubricant on the threads of the
wheel bolts.
3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot
rotate.
4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is
important that the wheel bolts are tightened
properly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Check the tor-
que with a torque wrench.
5. Refit the plastic caps on the wheel bolts.
The white arrow must point toward the front of the car.
6. Screw apart the towing eye and the wheel
bolt wrench*. Place the wheel bolt wrench*
and the jack* in their respective compart-
ments in the bag. Tighten the bag's centre
strap firmly and use the other strap to secure
the bag in the rear load retaining eyelet on
the left-hand side of the cargo area. Position
the bag so it is not pinched when the tailgate
is closed. The white arrow on the bag must
point toward the front of the car.
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
332
NOTE
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
WARNING
The bag should be secured so that the white
arrow (see the inset figure) points forward in
the car.
When changing to another tyre
dimension
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for updat-
ing the software at each change of tyre dimen-
sion. A software download may be necessary
both when changing to larger and smaller dimen-
sions, and also when switching between summer
and winter wheels.
Related information
•
Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 328)
•
Jack* (p. 333)
•
Warning triangle (p. 332)
•
Wheel bolts (p. 327)
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is used to warn other road
users of a stationary vehicle.
Storage and folding up
Lift the floor hatch and take out the warning
triangle.
Take the warning triangle from the case, fold
out and assemble the two loose sides.
Fold out the warning triangle's support legs.
Follow the regulations for the use of a warning
triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suita-
ble place with regard to traffic.
Ensure the warning triangle and its case are
properly secured in the cargo area after use.
NOTE
If the car has been locked with privacy locking
then the boot lid/tailgate and floor hatch can-
not be opened, see Privacy locking* (p. 171).
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
* Option/accessory.
333
Tools
Amongst other things, the car contains towing
eye, jack* and wheel wrench*.
The car's towing eye, emergency puncture repair
kit and the tool for the plastic wheel bolt caps are
located behind the hatch on the left-hand side of
the cargo area. There is also space for the sleeve
for the lockable wheel bolts. Jack* and wheel
wrench* are located in a bag on the cargo area
floor.
If the car is not equipped with the accessory
spare wheel then the jack need not be stored in
the car.
WARNING
When the towing eye and emergency punc-
ture repair kit are stored in the foam block,
they must always be strapped in with the ten-
sioning strap.
Related information
•
Emergency puncture repair (p. 346)
•
Towing eye (p. 319)
•
Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 328)
•
Wheel bolts (p. 327)
•
Jack* (p. 333)
Jack*
Use the jack to raise the car when changing a
wheel.
The original jack should only be used for chang-
ing to the spare wheel. The jack's thread must
always be well greased.
NOTE
The normal car jack is only designed for occa-
sional, short-term use, such as when chang-
ing a wheel after a puncture, changing to win-
ter/summer wheels, etc. Only the jack for the
specific car model may be used to raise the
car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or
for a longer time than is required just to
change a wheel, use of a garage jack is rec-
ommended. In this instance, follow the
instructions for use that come with the equip-
ment.
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
334
Tools - returning into place
The white arrow must point toward the front of the car.
After use, crank the jack together and screw
apart the towing eye and wheel bolt wrench*.
Place the wheel bolt wrench* and the jack* in
their respective compartments in the bag. Tighten
the bag's centre strap firmly and use the other
strap to secure the bag in the rear load retaining
eyelet on the left-hand side of the cargo area.
Position the bag so it is not pinched when the
tailgate is closed. The white arrow on the bag
must point toward the front of the car. Refit the
towing eye in the foam block on the left-hand
side of the cargo area.
WARNING
The bag should be secured so that the white
arrow (see the inset figure) points forward in
the car.
NOTE
If the floor hatch in the cargo area floor is not
closed then privacy locking does not work.
Related information
•
Warning triangle (p. 332)
•
Emergency puncture repair (p. 346)
First aid kit*
The first aid box contains first aid equipment.
A case with first aid equipment is located under
the floor in the cargo area.
NOTE
If the car has been locked with privacy locking
then the boot lid/tailgate and floor hatch can-
not be opened, see Privacy locking* (p. 171).
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
* Option/accessory.
335
Tyre pressure monitoring*
2
The tyre pressure monitoring system TPMS (Tyre
Pressure Monitoring System) warns with an indi-
cator symbol in the combined instrument panel
when the pressure is too low in one or more of
the car's tyres.
For certain markets the tyre pressure monitoring
is standard in accordance with legal require-
ments. The system does not replace normal tyre
maintenance.
Indicator symbol for tyre pressure monitoring.
Related information
•
Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)* -
general information (p. 335)
Tyre pressure monitoring system
(TPMS)*
3
- general information
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS) (Tyre Pressure
Monitoring System) warns the driver when the
pressure is too low in one or more of the car's
tyres.
System description
The TPMS system uses sensors located inside
the air valve in each wheel. When the car is
driven at approx. 30 km/h (20 mph) the system
detects the tyre pressure.
Both factory-fitted and optional wheels can be
equipped with TPMS sensors in the valves.
The system does not replace normal tyre mainte-
nance.
Messages
If the pressure is too low then an indicator sym-
bol
illuminates in the combined instrument
panel and one of the following messages is
shown:
•
Tyre pressure low Check front right tyre
•
Tyre pressure low Check front left tyre
•
Tyre pressure low Check rear right tyre
•
Tyre pressure low Check rear left tyre
•
Tyre needs air now Check front right
tyre
•
Tyre needs air now Check front left tyre
•
Tyre needs air now Check rear right tyre
•
Tyre needs air now Check rear left tyre
•
Tyre pressure system Service required
If wheels without TPMS sensors are used or if a
sensor has failed then
Tyre pressure system
Service required will be shown.
For information on the correct tyre pressure, see
Tyres - air pressure (p. 324).
IMPORTANT
If a fault occurs in the TPMS system the indi-
cator symbol
in the combined instrument
panel will flash for approx. 1 minute and then
illuminate with a constant glow. A message is
also shown in the combined instrument panel.
Related information
•
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - adjust
(recalibration) (p. 336)
•
Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)* -
rectifying low tyre pressure (p. 338)
•
Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)* -
activate/deactivate (p. 337)
2
Standard in certain markets.
3
Standard in certain markets.
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
336
•
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - recom-
mendations (p. 338)
•
Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)* -
driveable punctured tyres* (p. 339)
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)*
4
-
adjust (recalibration)
TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System) uses
a reference value on which the warning for low
tyre pressure is based.
Change the reference value by recalibrating the
system, such as for driving with a heavy load, for
example.
Always adjust the tyre pressure according to Vol-
vo's recommended tyre pressure values before
recalibration.
NOTE
The car must be stationary when calibration is
started.
Settings are made using the centre console's
controls, see MY CAR (p. 115).
1. Inflate the tyres to the desired pressure in
accordance with the tyre pressure label on
the driver's side door pillar (between front
and rear doors).
2. Start the engine.
3.
Open the menu system MY CAR.
4.
Select the
Tyre pressure menu.
5.
Select
Calibrate tyre pressure and press
OK.
6. Drive for at least 10 minutes at a speed of at
least 30 km/h (20 mph).
> Calibration is performed automatically fol-
lowing initialisation by the driver. The sys-
tem provides no confirmation when the
calibration is complete.
The new reference values apply until steps 1-6
are carried out again.
Related information
•
Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 335)
•
Tyres - air pressure (p. 324)
4
Standard in certain markets.
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
337
Tyre pressure monitoring system
(TPMS)*
5
- tyre status
Using the tyre pressure monitoring system
TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System) it is
possible to check the tyre status in the centre
console's screen.
System and tyre status
The current status of the system and the tyres
can be checked, see MY CAR (p. 115).
1.
Open the menu system MY CAR.
2.
Select the
Tyre pressure menu.
> Status for tyre pressures is shown with a
colour code.
The status is colour-coded for each tyre in
accordance with the following:
•
All-green: the system is operating normally
and the tyre pressure in all tyres is slightly
above the recommended level.
•
Yellow wheel: corresponding tyre's pressure
is too low.
•
Red wheel: corresponding tyre's pressure is
very low.
•
All wheels grey: the system is temporarily
unavailable. It may be necessary to drive the
car for a few minutes at a speed above
30 km/h (20 mph) before the system
becomes active again.
•
All wheels grey and the message
Tyre
pressure system Service required: an
error has occurred in the system. Contact a
Volvo dealer or workshop.
Related information
•
Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 335)
•
Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)* -
rectifying low tyre pressure (p. 338)
Tyre pressure monitoring system
(TPMS)*
6
- activate/deactivate
7
In certain markets it is possible to activate/deac-
tivate the tyre pressure monitoring system TPMS
(Tyre Pressure Monitoring System).
NOTE
The car must be stationary when the tyre
pressure monitoring is activated/deactivated.
Settings are made using the centre console's
controls, see MY CAR (p. 115).
1. Start the engine.
2.
Open the menu system MY CAR.
3.
Select the
Tyre pressure menu.
4.
Select
Tyre monitoring and press OK.
>
An
X is shown in the information display if
the system is activated, the option disap-
pears if the system is deactivated.
Related information
•
Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 335)
5
Standard in certain markets.
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
338
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)*
8
- recommendations
Recommendations for the tyre pressure monitor-
ing system TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring
System).
•
Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors are
fitted to all wheels on the car, including win-
ter wheels.
•
Volvo recommends that sensors are not
moved between different wheels.
•
The spare wheel is not equipped a with
TPMS sensor.
•
If the spare wheel or a wheel without a
TPMS sensor is used, the error message
Tyre pressure system Service required
will be shown in the combined instrument
panel.
•
Always check the system after changing a
wheel in order to ensure that replacement
wheels work with the system.
•
If a wheel has been changed, or if the TPMS
sensor has been moved to another wheel
then the seal, nut and valve core must be
replaced.
•
When TPMS sensors are installed, the car
should be switched off for at least 15
minutes otherwise an error message will be
shown in the combined instrument panel.
WARNING
When inflating a tyre equipped with TPMS,
hold the nozzle of the pump directly against
the valve to avoid damaging the valve.
NOTE
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
NOTE
If you want to change the tyre dimension then
the TPMS system must be reconfigured. For
further information - contact a Volvo dealer.
Related information
•
Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 335)
Tyre pressure monitoring system
(TPMS)*
9
- rectifying low tyre
pressure
When the tyre pressure monitoring system
TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System) gives
a warning, the tyre pressure is too low in one or
more of the car's tyres.
If a tyre pressure message has been shown and
the TPMS indicator lamp has been illuminated:
1. Check the tyre pressure on the indicated
tyre/tyres with a tyre pressure gauge.
2. Inflate the tyre/tyres to the correct pressure
in accordance with the tyre pressure label on
the driver's side door pillar (between front
and rear doors).
3. In some cases it may be necessary to drive
the car for a few minutes at a speed above
30 km/h (20 mph) in order to clear the mes-
sage. At which point, the TPMS indicator
lamp is extinguished as well.
6
Standard in certain markets.
7
Only in certain markets.
8
Standard in certain markets.
9
Standard in certain markets.
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
339
NOTE
•
The TPMS system uses a so-called com-
pensated pressure value, based on both
tyre temperature and ambient tempera-
ture. This means that the tyre pressure
may differ slightly from the recommended
pressures listed on the tyre pressure
label on the driver's side door pillar
(between front and rear doors). For this
reason, it may be necessary to inflate the
tyres to a slightly higher pressure in order
to clear a low tyre pressure message.
•
To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pres-
sure should be checked on cold tyres.
"Cold tyres" means the tyres are the
same temperature as the ambient tem-
perature (approx. 3 hours after the car
has been driven). After a few kilometres
of driving, the tyres warm up and the
pressure increases.
WARNING
•
Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre
failure, which could result in the driver
losing control of the car.
•
The system cannot indicate sudden tyre
damage in advance.
Related information
•
Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 335)
Tyre pressure monitoring system
(TPMS)*
10
- driveable punctured
tyres*
If SST (Self Supporting run flat Tires)* is
selected, the car is also equipped with TPMS
(p. 335).
This type of tyre has a specially reinforced side
wall that makes continued driving possible to a
limited extent despite the tyre losing all or some
of its pressure. These tyres are fitted on a special
rim. (Normal tyres can also be fitted to this rim.)
If an SST tyre loses tyre pressure then the yellow
TPMS lamp in the combined instrument panel
illuminates and a message is shown in the infor-
mation display. If this occurs, reduce speed to
max. 80 km/h (50 mph). The tyre must be
changed as soon as possible.
Drive carefully, in some cases it can be difficult to
see which tyre is faulty. In order to establish
which tyre needs attention, check all four tyres.
WARNING
Only people with knowledge of SST tyres
should fit them.
SST tyres must only be fitted together with
TPMS.
After a message about low tyre pressure has
been shown, do not drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph).
Maximum mileage before tyre replacement is
80 km.
Avoid hard driving such as sudden braking or
turning.
SST tyres must be replaced if they are dam-
aged or punctured.
Related information
•
Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 335)
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
340
Type approval - tyre pressure
monitoring system (TPMS)*
11
Type approval of the sensors in tyre pressure
monitoring - TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring
System) can be read in the table.
10
Standard in certain markets.
11
Standard in certain markets.
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
341
Country/Area
Brazil
Ukraine
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
342
Country/Area
Israel
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
343
Declaration of Conformity (Declaration of Conformity)
Country/
Area
Countries
in the EU:
Exporting country: Germany
Manufacturer: Continental Automotive GmbH
Type of equipment: TPMS unit
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
344
Country/
Area
Czech
Republic:
Continental tímto prohlašuje, že tento Radio Transmitter je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními
směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Denmark:
Undertegnede Continental erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr Radio Transmitter overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige
relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Germany:
Hiermit erklärt Continental, dass sich das Gerät Radio Transmitter in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen
und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.
Estonia:
Käesolevaga kinnitab Continental seadme Radio Transmitter vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist
tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
UK Hereby, Continental declares that this Radio Transmitter is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of
Directive 1999/5/EC.
Spain:
Por medio de la presente Continental declara que el Radio Transmitter cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras
disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Greece:
Η ΑΑ Continental ΗΩ Radio Transmitter ΩΑ Ω ΑΑΗ Α
ΑΑ Η ΗΑ 1999/5/.
France:
Par la présente Continental déclare que l'appareil Radio Transmitter est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres
dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Italy:
Con la presente Continental dichiara che questo Radio Transmitter è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni
pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latvia:
Ar šo Continental deklarē, ka Radio Transmitter atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem
noteikumiem.
Lithuania:
Šiuo Continental deklaruoja, kad šis Radio Transmitter atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.
Nether-
lands:
Hierbij verklaart Continental dat het toestel Radio Transmitter in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere
relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
345
Country/
Area
Malta:
Hawnhekk, Continental, jiddikjara li dan Radio Transmitter jikkonforma mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti oħrajn relevanti
li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
Hungary: Alulírott, Continental nyilatkozom, hogy a Radio Transmitter megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv
egyéb elõírásainak.
Poland:
Niniejszym Continental oświadcza, że Radio Transmitter jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi
postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Portugal:
Continental declara que este Radio Transmitter está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva
1999/5/CE.
Slovenia: Continental izjavlja, da je ta Radio Transmitter v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Slovakia: Continental týmto vyhlasuje, že Radio Transmitter spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.
Finland:
Continental vakuuttaa täten että Radio Transmitter tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä
koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
Sweden:
Härmed intygar Continental att denna Radio Transmitter står I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga
relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
Iceland: Hér með lýsir Continental yfir því að Radio Transmitter er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
Norway:
Continental erklærer herved at utstyret Radio Transmitter er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante krav i
direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Related information
•
Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 335)
WHEELS AND TYRES
346
Emergency puncture repair
The emergency puncture repair kit, Temporary
Mobility Kit (TMK), is used to seal a puncture
and check and adjust the tyre pressure
(p. 429).
The emergency puncture repair kit (p. 347) con-
sists of a compressor and a bottle of sealant. The
sealing works as a temporary repair. The sealing
fluid effectively seals tyres punctured in the tread.
The emergency puncture repair kit has limited
capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in the
wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency punc-
ture repair kit if they have larger slits, cracks or
similar damage.
NOTE
The emergency puncture repair kit is only
intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in
the tread.
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo.
Related information
•
Emergency puncture repair kit - location
(p. 346)
•
Emergency puncture repair kit - overview
(p. 347)
•
Emergency puncture repair - operation
(p. 348)
•
Tools (p. 333)
Emergency puncture repair kit -
location
The emergency puncture repair kit, Temporary
Mobility Kit (TMK), is used to seal a puncture
and check and adjust the tyre pressure.
Location of the emergency puncture
repair kit
The puncture repair kit is behind the hatch on the
left-hand side of the cargo area.
Related information
•
Emergency puncture repair kit - overview
(p. 347)
•
Emergency puncture repair (p. 346)
WHEELS AND TYRES
347
Emergency puncture repair kit -
overview
Overview of the component parts of the emer-
gency puncture repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit
(TMK).
The parts are stored under the floor in the cargo
area.
Label, maximum permitted speed
Switch
Electrical cable
Bottle holder (orange cap)
Protective cap
Pressure reducing valve
Air hose
Sealing fluid bottle
Pressure gauge
Sealing fluid bottle
Replace the sealing fluid bottle before the expira-
tion date has passed. Treat the old bottle as envi-
ronmentally hazardous waste.
The sealing fluid bottle must be replaced after
use. Volvo recommends that the replacement is
performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
The bottle with sealing fluid contains 1.2-
Ethanol and natural rubber-latex.
Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic
reaction in the event of skin contact.
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
Store out of the reach of children.
WARNING
•
In the event of skin contact with the seal-
ing fluid, it must be washed off immedi-
ately with soap and plenty of water.
•
Sealing fluid that makes contact with an
eye must be rinsed away immediately with
eye wash fluid or with plenty of water. If
the discomfort persists then the eye
should be examined by a doctor.
Related information
•
Emergency puncture repair kit - location
(p. 346)
•
Emergency puncture repair (p. 346)
WHEELS AND TYRES
348
Emergency puncture repair -
operation
Sealing a puncture with the emergency puncture
repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK).
Emergency puncture repair
For information on the function of the parts, see Emer-
gency puncture repair kit - overview (p. 347).
1. Set up the warning triangle and activate the
hazard warning lights if a tyre is being sealed
in a trafficked location.
If the puncture was caused by a nail or simi-
lar, allow this to remain in the tyre. It helps to
seal the hole.
2. Detach the label for maximum permitted
speed (which is fitted on one side of the
compressor) and affix it to the steering
wheel. You should not drive faster than
80 km/h (50 mph) after the emergency tyre
repair kit has been used.
3.
Check that the switch is in position 0 (Off),
and locate the electrical cable and the air
hose.
4. Unscrew the orange-coloured cap from the
compressor, and unscrew the cork from the
sealing fluid bottle.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use. The
seal is broken automatically when the bottle is
screwed in.
5. Screw in the bottle to the bottom of the bot-
tle holder.
> The bottle and the bottle holder are
equipped with a reverse catch to prevent
sealant leakage. When the bottle is
screwed in it cannot be unscrewed from
the bottle holder again. Bottle removal
must be performed at a workshop, Volvo
recommends an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
WARNING
•
In the event of skin contact with the seal-
ing fluid, it must be washed off immediately
with soap and plenty of water.
•
Sealing fluid that makes contact with an
eye must be rinsed away immediately with
eye wash fluid or with plenty of water. If the
discomfort persists then the eye should be
examined by a doctor.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with
a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
349
6.
Remove the valve cover
12
Take the torx wrench (which is fitted in the
foam block behind the panel on the left-hand
side of the cargo area).
Press the torx wrench into the hole.
Prize off the cover using the torx wrench (A).
7. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap.
Check that the pressure reducing valve on
the air hose is fully screwed on, and screw in
the air hose's valve connection to the bottom
of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
8. Plug the electrical cable into the closest
12 V socket and start the car.
NOTE
Make sure that none of the other 12 V sock-
ets is in use when the compressor is operat-
ing.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
9. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to
position I (On).
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the com-
pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness
arise then the compressor must be switched
off immediately. The journey should not be
continued. Call roadside assistance for recov-
ery to a tyre centre. Volvo recommends an
authorised tyre centre.
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure
can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure
drops after approximately 30 seconds.
10. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
IMPORTANT
The compressor must not be operated for
longer than 10 minutes - risk of overheating.
12
Only 17" wheel Thia
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
350
11. Switch off the compressor to check the pres-
sure on the pressure gauge. Minimum pres-
sure is 1.8 bar and maximum 3.5 bar.
(Release air with the pressure reducing valve
if the tyre pressure is too high.)
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar (22 psi) then
the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey
should not be continued. Call roadside assis-
tance for recovery to a tyre centre. Volvo rec-
ommends an authorised tyre centre.
12. Switch off the compressor and unplug the
electrical cable.
13. Unscrew the air hose from the tyre's air valve
and refit the dust cap on the tyre.
Refit the cover
12
over the tyre's air valve with
the hole towards the wheel hub. Two clicks
confirm that the cover is fitted in place.
14. Fit the protective cap on the air hose in order
to avoid leakage of the remaining sealing
fluid. Place the equipment in the cargo area.
15. As soon as possible, drive at least 3 km at a
maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) so
that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre and
then perform a follow-up check.
NOTE
Sealant will spurt out of the puncture during
the first few rotations of the tyre.
WARNING
Make sure that nobody is standing near the
car and gets the sealing fluid splashed onto
them when the car is driven away. The dis-
tance should be at least 2 metres (7 feet).
16. Follow-up inspection:
Connect the air hose on the tyre's air valve
again and check the tyre pressure with the
pressure gauge, see Emergency puncture
repair - rechecking (p. 350).
Related information
•
Emergency puncture repair (p. 346)
•
Emergency puncture repair - rechecking
(p. 350)
•
Emergency puncture repair kit - overview
(p. 347)
Emergency puncture repair -
rechecking
When a tyre has been sealed with the emer-
gency puncture repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit
(TMK), a subsequent check must be made after
approx. 3 kilometres of driving.
Check tyre pressure
Take out the tyre sealing equipment. The com-
pressor must be switched off.
1. Remove the valve cover, see (p. 349).
Unscrew the tyre's dust cap.
Take out the air hose and screw in the
valve connection to the bottom of the thread
on the tyre's air valve.
12
Only 17" wheel Thia
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
351
2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
gauge.
•
If the tyre pressure is below 1.3 bar
13
then the tyre is insufficiently sealed. The
journey should not be continued. Call
roadside assistance for recovery.
•
If the tyre pressure is higher than
1.3 bar
13
, the tyre must be inflated to the
pressure specified in accordance with the
tyre pressure table, see Tyres - approved
tyre pressures (p. 429).
•
Release air using the pressure reducing
valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
3. If the tyre needs to be inflated:
1. Plug the electrical cable into the closest
12 V socket and start the car.
2. Start the compressor and inflate the tyre
to the pressure specified in accordance
with the tyre pressure table.
3. Switch off the compressor.
4. Remove the tyre sealing equipment.
Fit the protective cap on the air hose in order
to avoid leakage of the remaining sealing
fluid.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with
a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
5. Refit the dust cap on the tyre.
NOTE
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
6.
Refit the valve cover
14
Press one edge of the cover (without the
hole) into place (nearest the tyre - B). Then
fold the cover in toward the wheel rim - and
at the same time, gently press down the
angled top edge in order to help it in under
the edge of the wheel rim. Check that the
cover is flush with the surface of the wheel
rim - if not, gently press in the part that is
bulging out.
13
1 bar = 100 kPa.
14
Only 17" wheel Thia.
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
352
NOTE
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must be
replaced after use. Volvo recommends that
this replacement is performed by an author-
ised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
Volvo recommends that the car is driven to the
nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the
replacement/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise
the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph) after the emergency tyre repair kit
has been used. Volvo recommends a visit to
an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection
of the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance
is 200 km). The staff there can determine
whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it
needs to be replaced.
Related information
•
Emergency puncture repair (p. 346)
•
Emergency puncture repair - operation
(p. 348)
•
Emergency puncture repair kit - overview
(p. 347)
Emergency puncture repair kit -
inflating the tyres
The car's original tyres can be inflated using the
compressor in the emergency puncture repair kit
(p. 347).
1. The compressor must be switched off. Make
sure that the switch is in position 0 (Off) and
take out the electrical cable and air hose.
2.
Remove the valve cover
15
- for instructions
on removing the valve cover, see (p. 349).
3. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in the
air hose's valve connection to the bottom of
the thread on the tyre's air valve.
4. Plug the electrical cable into the closest
12 V socket and start the car.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine running
in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient
ventilation.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
5. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to
position I (On).
WHEELS AND TYRES
353
IMPORTANT
The compressor must not be operated for
longer than 10 minutes - risk of overheating.
6. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in
accordance with the tyre pressure table, see
Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 429).
Release air using the pressure reducing
valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
7. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and the electrical cable.
8. Refit the dust cap on the tyre.
9.
Refit the valve cover
15
by pressing one edge
of the cover (the one without the hole) into
place (nearest the tyre), see Emergency
puncture repair - rechecking (p. 350). Then
fold the cover in toward the wheel rim - and
at the same time, gently press down the
angled top edge in order to help it in under
the edge of the wheel rim. Check that the
cover is flush with the surface of the wheel
rim - if not, gently press in the part that is
bulging out.
Related information
•
Emergency puncture repair (p. 346)
•
Emergency puncture repair kit - overview
(p. 347)
•
Emergency puncture repair - rechecking
(p. 350)
15
Only 17" wheel Thia
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
356
Volvo service programme
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible,
follow the Volvo service programme as specified
in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo
workshop to perform the service and mainte-
nance work. Volvo workshops have the personnel,
special tools and service literature to guarantee
the highest quality of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and
follow the instructions in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
Service and repair
Service the car regularly. Follow Volvo's recom-
mended service intervals.
If inspection and repair are required then only an
authorised Volvo workshop may carry out the
work.
WARNING
Do not carry out any repairs of your own on
this vehicle. Electrical cables and/or compo-
nents that have detached must only be recti-
fied by an authorised workshop - an author-
ised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Service interval and next service,
charging cable
The hour meter on the charging cable counts
charging time to the next service. Volvo recom-
mends having the control unit checked by an
electrician after every 5000 operating hours.
IMPORTANT
Do not modify the control unit in any way.
Related information
•
Climate control system - fault tracing and
repair (p. 368)
Book service and repair*
1
Manage service, repair and booking information
directly in your Internet-connected car.
This service
1
provides a convenient way to book a
service and workshop visit directly in the car. Car
information is sent to your dealer, who can pre-
pare the workshop visit. The dealer will contact
you to schedule an appointment time. For certain
markets, the system reminds you of a scheduled
appointment time as it approaches and the navi-
gation system
2
can also guide you to the work-
shop when the time comes.
1
Applies to certain markets.
2
Applies to Sensus Navigation.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
357
Before the service can be used
Volvo ID and my profile
•
Register a Volvo ID. For more information
and how to create a Volvo ID, see Volvo ID
(p. 20).
•
Go to www.volvocars.com, log in and proceed
as follows:
1. Check that the car is connected to your pro-
file.
2. Check that your contact information is cor-
rect.
3. Select the Volvo dealer you want to contact
for service and repair.
4. Choose preferred communication channel
(phone). Booking information is always sent
to the car and to you via email.
Prerequisite for booking from car
•
To send and receive booking information
from and to the car, the car must be con-
nected to the Internet, see the Sensus Info-
tainment supplement for information about
how to connect the car to the Internet.
•
Since the booking information is sent over
your private phone subscription, you will be
asked whether you want to send the informa-
tion. The question is asked once and then
applies to the selected connection for a lim-
ited time.
•
For the service to work and for the system to
communicate via the car's screen, notifica-
tions/pop-up messages must be accepted.
In the normal view for the MY CAR source,
press OK/MENU and then
Service & repair
Display notifications.
Using the service
All menus and settings are accessed from the
normal view in MY CAR by pressing OK/MENU
and then
Service & repair.
When it is time for service, and in some cases
when the car is in need of repair, this is notified
in the combined instrument panel (p. 68) and via
a pop-up menu in the screen.
Service message in the screen.
Meaning of the answer options in the screen's
pop-up menu:
•
Yes - A booking enquiry is sent to your
dealer who then comes back with a booking
proposal. The service lamp and service mes-
sage in the combined instrument panel are
extinguished.
•
No - No more pop-up messages will be
shown in the screen. The message in the
combined instrument panel remains. After
this option has been selected, it is possible
to start the manual booking in the car, see
below.
•
Postpone - The pop-up menu is shown the
next time the car is started.
Book a service or repair manually
1
1.
Press the MY CAR button in the centre con-
sole and select
Service & repair Dealer
information
Request service or repair.
> Vehicle data is sent automatically to your
dealer.
2. The dealer sends a booking proposal to the
car.
3. Accept or request a new booking proposal.
After the booking has been accepted the book-
ing information is stored in the car, see My book-
ings. The car will automatically communicate with
you via the screen by means of reminders about
the booking and guide you to the workshop visit.
1
Applies to certain markets.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
358
My bookings
1
Show booking information in the car's screen.
Accept or request a new booking proposal.
–
Select Service & repair My bookings.
Call the dealer
1
With a phone connected to the car via
Bluetooth
®
, you can call your dealer. For connect-
ing the phone, see the Sensus Infotainment sup-
plement.
–
Select Service & repair Dealer
information
Call dealer.
Using the navigation system
1,
2
Enter your workshop as destination or waypoint
in the navigation system.
–
Select Service & repair Dealer
information
Set single destination.
–
Select Service & repair Dealer
information
Add as waypoint.
Sending vehicle data
1
Vehicle data are sent to a central Volvo database
(not your dealer) from which Volvo dealers can
retrieve vehicle information using the car's identi-
fication number (VIN
3
). The number is printed in
the car's service and warranty booklet, alterna-
tively inside the windscreen's bottom left-hand
corner.
–
Select Service & repair Send car data.
Booking information and vehicle data
When you decide to book a service from your car,
the booking information and vehicle data will be
sent. Vehicle data information consists of infor-
mation within the following areas:
•
service requirement
•
function status
•
fluid levels
•
meter reading
•
the car's vehicle identification number (VIN
3
)
•
the car's software version.
Related information
•
Volvo ID (p. 20)
1
Applies to certain markets.
2
Applies to Sensus Navigation.
3
Vehicle Identification Number
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
359
Raising the car
When raising the car it is important that the jack
or lifting arms are fitted in the intended points on
the car's underbody.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that
belongs to the car model in question. If a jack
is selected other than the one recommended
by Volvo, follow the instructions supplied with
the equipment.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
360
Jacking points (arrows) for the jack that belongs to the car and lifting points (marked in red).
If the car is raised with a front workshop jack
then this must be positioned under one of the
four lifting points furthest in under the car. If the
car is raised with a rear workshop jack then it
must be positioned under one of the lifting
points. Ensure that the workshop jack is posi-
tioned so that the car cannot slide off the jack.
Always use axle stands or similar.
If the car is raised with a two-pillar workshop lift
then the front and rear lifting arms can be posi-
tioned under the outer lifting points (jacking
points). Alternatively, the inner lifting points can
be used at the front.
Related information
•
Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 328)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
361
Bonnet - opening and closing
The bonnet can be opened when the handle in
the passenger compartment has been turned
clockwise and the lock by the radiator grille has
been moved to the left.
The handle for bonnet opening is always on the left-
hand side.
Turn the handle about 20-25 degrees clock-
wise. You will hear when the catch releases.
Move the catch to the left and open the bon-
net. (The catch hook is located between the
headlamp and radiator grille, see illustration.)
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly when
closed.
Related information
•
Engine compartment - checking (p. 362)
•
Engine compartment - overview (p. 361)
Engine compartment - overview
The overview shows some service-related com-
ponents.
Some of the car's batteries and several of the
components included in the car's electric drive
system are located under the bonnet. Exercise
caution in this area and only touch anything that
is related to normal maintenance.
WARNING
Orange-coloured cables must only be handled
by qualified personnel.
WARNING
Several components in the car work with
high-voltage current that could be dangerous
in the event of incorrect intervention.
•
Do not touch anything that is not clearly
described in this owner's manual.
•
Exercise caution when checking/refilling
fluids in the engine compartment.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
362
Normal checking points - other parts require specialist
expertise.
Checking/refilling the coolant for the cooling
and climate control systems
Checking/filling the power steering fluid
Engine oil filler pipe
Checking/filling of brake fluid (on driver's
side)
Starter battery
Relay and fuse box
Washer fluid filler pipe
WARNING
The car's electrical system must always be in
key position 0 when work is being performed
in the engine compartment; see Key positions
- functions at different levels (p. 83).
Related information
•
Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 361)
•
Engine compartment - checking (p. 362)
Engine compartment - checking
Some oils and fluids should be checked at regu-
lar intervals.
Regular checking
Check the following oils and fluids at regular
intervals, e.g. when refuelling:
•
Coolant
•
Engine oil
•
Power steering fluid
•
Washer fluid
WARNING
Remember that the radiator fan (located at
the front of the engine compartment, behind
the radiator) may start or continue to operate
automatically for up to approx. 6 minutes after
the engine has been switched off.
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-
shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec-
ommended. There is a risk of fire if the engine
is hot.
Related information
•
Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 361)
•
Engine compartment - overview (p. 361)
•
Coolant - level (p. 365)
•
Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 364)
•
Power steering fluid - level (p. 367)
•
Washer fluid - filling (p. 379)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
363
Engine oil - general
An approved engine oil must be used in order
that the recommended service intervals can be
applied.
Volvo recommends:
When driving under adverse conditions, see
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p. 415).
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are filled
with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil
at the factory. The choice of oil has been
made very carefully with regard to service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption and
environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in order
that the recommended service intervals can
be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil
for both filling and oil change, otherwise you
will risk affecting service life, starting charac-
teristics, fuel consumption and environmental
impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty
liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade
and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are car-
ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Volvo uses different systems for warning of low/
high oil level or low oil pressure. Certain engine
variants have an oil pressure sensor, and then the
combined instrument panel's warning symbol for
low oil pressure is used
. Other variants
have an oil level sensor, when the driver is
informed via the instrument's warning symbol
and display texts. Certain variants have
both systems. Contact a Volvo dealer for more
information.
Change the engine oil and oil filter in accordance
with the intervals specified in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
Using oil of a higher than specified grade is per-
mitted. If the car is driven in adverse conditions,
Volvo recommends using an oil of a higher grade
than the one specified, see Engine oil - adverse
driving conditions (p. 415).
For filling capacities, see Engine oil - grade and
volume (p. 417).
Related information
•
Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 364)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
364
Engine oil - checking and filling
The oil level is detected with the electronic oil
level sensor.
5-cyl. diesel
Filler pipe
4
.
No action needs to be taken on engine oil level
until a message is shown in the combined instru-
ment panel's display, see the following illustra-
tion.
Message and graphic shown in the display.
Message
Engine oil level
The oil level is checked using the electronic oil
level gauge with the thumbwheel when the
engine is switched off, see Menu navigation -
combined instrument panel (p. 112).
WARNING
If the message Oil service required is
shown, visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended. The oil level may
be too high.
IMPORTANT
In the event of the message Oil level low
Refill 0.5 litre, only fill with 0.5 litres.
WARNING
Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4)
appears as shown in the illustration below.
The level must never be above MAX or below
MIN, as this could lead to engine damage.
NOTE
The oil level is only detected by the system
when certain conditions are fulfilled. For this
reason the system cannot always directly
detect changes when the oil is filled or
drained. Under certain conditions, internal
combustion engine operation may be required
for approx. 30 km.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold
due to the risk of fire.
4
Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
365
Measuring the oil level, 5-cyl. diesel
If the oil level needs to be checked then it should
be carried out in accordance with the following
sequence.
1.
Activate key position II; see Key positions -
functions at different levels (p. 83).
2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand
stalk switch to position
Oil level.
> Information is then displayed on the
engine's oil level; see the following illus-
tration, which shows the message and
graphic in the display.
For more information on menu navigation,
see Menu navigation - combined instru-
ment panel (p. 112).
The figures 1-4 represent filling level. Do not fill more oil
if filling level (3) or (4) is shown. Recommended filling
level is 4.
Related information
•
Engine oil - general (p. 363)
Coolant - level
The coolant cools the internal combustion
engine to the correct operating temperature. The
heat that is transferred from the engine to the
coolant can be used to heat the passenger com-
partment.
Checking the level
The coolant level must lie between the MIN and
MAX marks on the expansion tank. If the cooling
system is not filled sufficiently, excessively high
temperatures could occur, causing a risk of dam-
age to the engine.
NOTE
Check the coolant level regularly when the
engine is cold.
Filling
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
366
When topping up the coolant, follow the instruc-
tions on the packaging. Never top up with water
only. The risk of freezing increases with both too
little and too much coolant concentrate.
If there is coolant under the car, if there is cool-
ant smoke, or if more than 2 litres have been
filled, always call for recovery to avoid the risk of
engine damage when starting due to a defective
cooling system.
WARNING
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant
requires topping up when the engine is at
operating temperature, unscrew the expan-
sion tank cap slowly to gently release the
overpressure.
IMPORTANT
•
A high content of chlorine, chlorides and
other salts may cause corrosion in the
cooling system.
•
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion
agent as recommended by Volvo.
•
Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50%
water and 50% coolant.
•
Mix the coolant with approved quality
water. In the event of any doubt about
water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in
accordance with Volvo recommendations.
•
When changing coolant/replacing cool-
ing system components, flush the cooling
system clean with approved quality water
or flush with ready-mixed coolant.
•
The engine must only be run with a well-
filled cooling system. Otherwise, tempera-
tures that are too high may occur result-
ing in the risk of damage (cracks) in the
cylinder head.
For capacities and for standards regarding water
quality; see Coolant - grade and volume (p. 418).
Brake and clutch fluid - level
The brake fluid level should be between contain-
er's MIN and MAX marks.
Checking the level
The level must be between the MIN and MAX
marks that are visible inside the reservoir. Check
the level regularly.
Change the brake fluid every other year or at
every other regular service.
The fluid should be changed annually on cars
driven in conditions requiring hard, frequent brak-
ing, such as driving in mountains or tropical cli-
mates with high humidity.
For capacities and recommended brake fluid
grade, see Brake fluid - grade and volume
(p. 420).
WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid. Volvo rec-
ommends that the reason for the loss of
brake fluid is investigated by an authorised
Volvo workshop.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
367
Filling
The fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side.
The fluid reservoir is protected under the cover
over the cold zone in the engine compartment.
The round cover must be removed first before the
reservoir cap can be reached.
Turn and open the cover located on the cov-
ering.
Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid.
The level must be between the MIN and
MAX marks, which are located on the inside
of the reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Do not forget to refit the cap.
Power steering fluid - level
The power steering fluid level must be between
the reservoir's MIN and MAX marks. The fluid
does not need to be changed.
IMPORTANT
Keep the area around the power steering
fluid reservoir clean when checking. The cover
must not be opened.
Check the level frequently. The fluid does not
require changing. The level must be between the
MIN and MAX marks.
For recommended fluid grade, see Power steer-
ing fluid - grade (p. 420).
WARNING
If there is a fault in the power steering system
or if the engine is switched off and the car
has to be towed, the steering is much heavier
than normal. Read about what applies for tow-
ing (p. 319).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
368
Climate control system - fault
tracing and repair
The air conditioning system must only be serv-
iced and repaired by an authorised workshop.
Fault tracing and repair
The air conditioning system contains fluorescent
tracing agents. Ultraviolet light must be used dur-
ing leak detection.
Volvo recommends that you contact an author-
ised Volvo workshop.
Cars with R134a refrigerant
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressur-
ised refrigerant R134a. This system must only
be serviced and repaired by an authorised
workshop.
Cars with R1234yf refrigerant
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressur-
ised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with
SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe
Service and Containment of Refrigerants
Used in Mobile A/C System), service and
repair of the refrigerant system must only be
performed by trained and certified technicians
in order to ensure the safety of the system.
Related information
•
Volvo service programme (p. 356)
Lamp replacement - general
Several of the car's bulbs can be replaced by
the driver. For replacement of LED lamps and
xenon lamps, please contact a workshop.
The bulbs are specified (p. 376). The following
list contains locations of bulbs and other light
sources that are specialised, such as LED
5
5
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
369
lamps, or are unsuitable for changing for some
other reason, except at a workshop
6
:
•
active xenon headlamps - ABL (xenon lamps)
•
daytime running lights/position lamps, front
•
cornering lights
•
side direction indicators, door mirrors
•
approach lighting, door mirrors
•
interior lighting apart from Courtesy lighting
front
•
position lamps, rear
•
side marker lamps
•
brake light.
WARNING
On cars with xenon headlamps, the replace-
ment of xenon lamps must be carried out at a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended. Working with xenon lamps
demands extreme caution because the head-
lamp is equipped with a high voltage unit.
WARNING
The car's electrical system must be in key
position 0 for bulb replacement; see Key posi-
tions - functions at different levels (p. 83).
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease from your fingers is
vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector
and then causing damage.
NOTE
If an error message remains after the broken
bulb has been replaced then we recommend
visiting an authorised Volvo workshop.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear
lamps may temporarily have condensation on
the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exte-
rior lighting is designed to withstand this.
Condensation is normally vented out of the
lamp housing when the lamp has been
switched on for a time.
Related information
•
Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 370)
•
Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps
(p. 375)
•
Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting
(p. 376)
•
Lamp replacement - lighting in cargo area
(p. 375)
•
Lamp replacement - number plate lighting
(p. 375)
6
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
370
Lamp replacement - headlamps
All of the headlamp bulbs are replaced via the
engine compartment. First loosen and remove
the whole headlamp.
Removing the headlamp
Set the car's electrical system in key position 0,
see Key positions - functions at different levels
(p. 83).
Pull out the headlamp's locking pins.
Release the headlamp by alternately tilting
and pulling it out.
IMPORTANT
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the con-
nector.
Detach the headlamp connector by pressing
down the clip with your thumb.
At the same time, guide out the connector
with your other hand.
5. Lift out the headlamp and place it on a soft
surface to avoid scratching the lens.
6. Replace the bulb in question.
Securing the headlamp
1. Plug in the connector, a clicking sound
should be heard.
2. Reinstall the headlamp and locking pins. The
short pin is fitted closest to the radiator grille.
Check that they are firmly inserted.
3. Check the lighting.
The connector must be plugged in properly and
the headlamp mounted before the lighting is
switched on or the remote control key is inserted
in the ignition switch.
Related information
•
Lamp replacement - general (p. 368)
•
Lamp replacement - cover for main/dipped
beam bulbs (p. 371)
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 376)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
371
Lamp replacement - cover for main/
dipped beam bulbs
Main/dipped beam bulbs are accessed by
releasing the headlamp's larger cover.
Before starting to replace a bulb, see Lamp
replacement - headlamps (p. 370).
1. Unscrew the cover's four screws using a Torx
tool, size T20 (1). They should not be loos-
ened completely. (3 - 4 turns are sufficient.)
2. Slide the cover to one side.
3. Remove the cover.
Reinstall the cover in reverse order.
Related information
•
Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 370)
•
Lamp replacement - dipped beam (p. 371)
•
Lamp replacement - main beam (p. 372)
•
Lamp replacement - extra main beam
(p. 373)
Lamp replacement - dipped beam
The dipped beam bulb is fitted inside the head-
lamp's larger cover.
NOTE
Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.
1. Detach the headlamp (p. 370).
2. Remove the cover (p. 371).
3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
4. Detach the bulb by pulling it straight out.
5. The guide pin on the lamp should be straight
up when it is fitted and a clicking sound
should be heard when it clicks into place.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
372
Related information
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 376)
Lamp replacement - main beam
The main beam bulb is fitted inside the head-
lamp's larger cover.
NOTE
Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.
1. Detach the headlamp (p. 370).
2. Remove the cover (p. 371).
3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise and
then pulling straight out.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
5. Replace the bulb and align it in the socket
and turn clockwise in order to secure it. It
can only be secured in one position.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Related information
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 376)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
373
Lamp replacement - extra main
beam
The extra main beam bulb is fitted inside the
headlamp's larger cover.
NOTE
Applies to cars with Xenon headlamps*.
1. Detach the headlamp (p. 370).
2. Remove the cover (p. 371).
3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise and
then pulling straight out.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
5. Replace the bulb and align it in the socket
and turn clockwise in order to secure it. It
can only be secured in one position.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Related information
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 376)
Lamp replacement - direction
indicators front
The direction indicator lamp is fitted inside the
headlamp's smaller cover.
1. Detach the headlamp (p. 370).
2. Detach the cover by pulling it straight out.
3. Pull the bulb holder in order to extract the
bulb.
4. Press and simultaneously turn the bulb anti-
clockwise in order to detach it.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Related information
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 376)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
374
Lamp replacement - rear lamp
Bulbs for rear direction indicators, rear fog lamp
and reversing lamp are replaced from inside the
cargo area.
Lamp housing, rear
The bulbs for reversing lamp, fog lamp and direc-
tion indicator in the rear lamp cluster are
replaced from inside the cargo area.
The lamps are accessible when emergency puncture
repair kit is lifted out.
1. Open the panel.
2. Lift the emergency puncture repair kit.
3. Remove the insulation that is fitted in front of
the bulb holder by pulling it straight out.
4. Press down the catch and pull out the bulb
holder.
5. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in and
turning anticlockwise.
6. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clock-
wise.
7. Press down the catch when the bulb holder
is refitted.
8. Refit the insulation, emergency puncture
repair kit and panel.
Related information
•
Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps
(p. 375)
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 376)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
375
Lamp replacement - location of rear
lamps
The overview shows the location of the lamps at
the rear.
Brake light (LED)
Position lamps (LED)/Side marker lamps
(LED)
Indicator (p. 374)
Brake light (LED)
Reversing lamp
Fog lamp
Related information
•
Lamp replacement - general (p. 368)
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 376)
Lamp replacement - number plate
lighting
The number plate lighting is located under the
tailgate handle.
1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.
2. Carefully detach the whole bulb housing and
withdraw it.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Refit the whole bulb housing and screw it
into place.
Related information
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 376)
Lamp replacement - lighting in
cargo area
The cargo area lighting is located in the tailgate.
G031942
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently prize so that
the lamp housing comes loose.
2. Replace the bulb.
3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press
back the lamp housing.
Related information
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 376)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
376
Lamp replacement - vanity mirror
lighting
The vanity mirror's lamps are fitted inside the
lamp lenses.
Removal of lamp lens
1. Insert a screwdriver under the lamp lens and
gently prize up the lug on the edge.
2. Carefully detach and lift aside the lamp lens.
3. Use needle-nose pliers to pull the bulb
straight out to the side and replace with a
new one. Note! - Do not squeeze the bulb
too hard with the pliers. Otherwise, the bulb
glass could then break.
Attaching the lamp lens
1. Refit the lamp lens.
2. Press it into place.
Related information
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 376)
Lamps - specifications
The specifications apply to bulbs. For replace-
ment of LED lamps and xenon lamps, please
contact a workshop.
Lighting
W
A
Type
Dipped beam, halo-
gen
55 H7 LL
Main beam, halogen 65 H9
Extra main beam,
ABL
65 H9
Front direction indi-
cators
24 PY24W
Courtesy lighting
front
3 T10 Socket
W2.1x9.5d
Glovebox lighting 5 Socket SV8.5
Length 43 mm
Vanity mirror light-
ing
1.2 T5 Socket
W2x4.6d
Cargo area lighting 5 Socket SV8.5
Length 43 mm
Number plate light-
ing
5 C5W LL
Direction indicators,
rear
21 PY21W LL
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
377
Lighting
W
A
Type
- - -
Reversing lamp 21 P21W LL
Rear fog lamp 21 H21W LL
A
Watt
Related information
•
Lamp replacement - general (p. 368)
Wiper blades
The wiper blades sweep water away from the
windscreen and rear window. Together with the
washer fluid they clean the windows and ensure
visibility for driving.
The windscreen wiper blades must be in service
position when they are to be replaced.
Service position
Wiper blades in service position.
In order to change, clean or lift the wiper blades
(for scraping off ice from the windscreen, for
example) they must be in service position.
IMPORTANT
Before placing the wiper blades in the service
position, make sure that they are not frozen
down.
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch
7
and briefly press the START/STOP
ENGINE button to set the car's electrical
system to key position I. For detailed infor-
mation on key positions, see Key positions -
functions at different levels (p. 83).
2.
Briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE
button again to set the car’s electrical system
in key position 0.
3. Within 3 seconds, move the right stalk switch
up and hold it in position for
approx. 1 second.
> The wipers then move to standing straight
up.
The wipers return to their starting position when
you briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE
button to set the car’s electrical system to key
position I (or when the car is started).
7
Not required in cars with keyless start and lock system.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
378
IMPORTANT
If the wiper arms in service position have
been folded up from the windscreen, they
must be folded back down onto the wind-
screen before the wipers are activated. This is
to avoid scraping the paint on the bonnet.
Replacing the wiper blades
Fold up the wiper arm when it is in service
position. Press the button located on the
wiper blade mounting and pull straight out
parallel with the wiper arm.
Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click" is
heard.
Check that the blade is firmly installed.
4. Fold the wiper arm back towards the wind-
screen.
The wipers return from service position to their
starting position when you briefly press the
START/STOP ENGINE button to set the car’s
electrical system to key position I (or when the
car is started).
NOTE
The wiper blades are different lengths. The
blade on the driver's side is longer than on
the passenger side.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
379
Replacing the wiper blades, rear
window
1. Fold out the wiper arm.
2. Angle the wiper blade out slightly from the
wiper arm.
3. Grip the wiper arm and use force from your
thumb to press the blade forwards (at the
arrow) in order to detach the blade.
4. Press the new wiper blade into position.
Check that it is firmly installed.
5. Fold the wiper arm back towards the wind-
screen.
Cleaning
For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see
Car wash (p. 399).
IMPORTANT
Check the blades regularly. Neglected main-
tenance shortens the service life of the wiper
blades.
Related information
•
Washer fluid - filling (p. 379)
Washer fluid - filling
Washer fluid is used for cleaning the headlamps
and windows. Washer fluid with antifreeze must
be used when the temperature is below freezing
point.
Topping up the washer fluid takes place by open-
ing the blue cap.
The windscreen and headlamp washers share a
common reservoir.
NOTE
When there is approx. 1 litre of washer fluid
remaining in the reservoir, a message to top
up the washer fluid will be shown in the com-
bined instrument panel, together with the
symbol
.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
380
Prescribed grade: Washer fluid recommended
by Volvo - with frost protection during cold
weather and below freezing point.
IMPORTANT
Use Volvo genuine washer fluid or equivalent
with a recommended pH of between 6 and 8,
in working dilution (e.g. 1:1 with neutral
water).
IMPORTANT
Use washer fluid with antifreeze when the
temperature is below freezing to avoid freez-
ing in the pump, reservoir and hoses.
Volume:
•
Cars with headlamp washing: 3.4 litres.
•
Cars without headlamp washing: 3.4 litres.
Related information
•
Wiper blades (p. 377)
•
Wipers and washers (p. 103)
•
Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 361)
Starter battery - general
The starter battery is used to drive the starter
motor and other electrical equipment in the car.
The car's traditional 12 V battery is here called
"starter battery" even if the hybrid battery
(p. 384) is often used for starting the internal
combustion engine.
The service life and function of the starter battery
is influenced by factors such as the number of
starts, discharging, driving style, driving condi-
tions, climatic conditions, etc.
•
Never disconnect the battery when the
engine is running.
•
Check that the cables to the battery are cor-
rectly connected and properly tightened.
Voltage (V) 12
Cold start capacity
A
- CCA
B
(A)
720
Size, L×W×H (mm) 278×175×190
Capacity (Ah) 70
A
In accordance with EN standard.
B
Cold Cranking Amperes.
IMPORTANT
If the starter battery is replaced, make sure
you replace it with a battery with the same
cold starting capacity and type as the original
battery (see the label on the battery).
NOTE
The starter battery's container size should be
consistent with the original battery's dimen-
sions.
WARNING
•
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can
be formed if a jump lead is connected
incorrectly, and this can be enough for
the battery to explode.
•
Do not connect the jump leads to any
fuel system component or any moving
part. Be careful of hot engine parts.
•
The battery contains sulphuric acid, which
can cause serious burns.
•
If sulphuric acid comes into contact with
eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large
quantities of water. If acid splashes into
the eyes - seek medical attention imme-
diately.
•
Never smoke near the battery.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
381
IMPORTANT
When charging the starter battery, only use a
modern battery charger with controlled charg-
ing voltage. Fast charging function must not
be used since it may damage the battery.
NOTE
If both the starter battery and the hybrid bat-
tery (p. 300) are discharged then both batter-
ies must be charged. In such a case, charging
only the hybrid battery first is not possible.
In order for the hybrid battery to be charged
the starter battery must have a certain state
of charge.
IMPORTANT
If the following instruction is not observed
then the energy saving function for infotain-
ment system may be temporarily disengaged,
and/or the message in the combined instru-
ment panel's information display about the
starter battery's state of charge may be tem-
porarily inapplicable, following the connection
of an external starter battery or battery
charger:
•
The negative battery terminal on the car's
starter battery must never be used for
connecting an external starter battery or
battery charger - only the car chassis
may be used as the grounding point.
See Jump starting with another battery
(p. 268) for a description of how the cable
clamps must be attached.
NOTE
The life of the battery is shortened if it
becomes discharged repeatedly.
The life of the battery is affected by several
factors, including driving conditions and cli-
mate. Battery starting capacity decreases
gradually with time and therefore needs to be
recharged if the car is not used for a longer
time or when it is only driven short distances.
Extreme cold further limits starting capacity.
To maintain the battery in good condition, at
least 15 minutes of driving/week is recom-
mended or that the battery is connected to a
battery charger with automatic trickle charg-
ing.
A battery that is kept fully charged has a
maximum service life.
Related information
•
Battery - symbols (p. 382)
•
Starter battery - replacement (p. 382)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
382
Battery - symbols
There are information and warning symbols on
the batteries.
Symbols on the batteries
Use protective goggles.
Further information in the
owner's manual for the car.
Store the battery out of the
reach of children.
The battery contains corro-
sive acid.
Avoid sparks and naked
flames.
Risk of explosion.
Must be taken for recycling.
NOTE
An expended battery must be recycled in an
environmentally safe manner as it contains
lead.
Related information
•
Starter battery - general (p. 380)
Starter battery - replacement
The starter battery in the car can be replaced
without the help of a workshop.
Removal
First of all: Take the remote control key from the
ignition switch and wait at least 5 minutes before
any electrical connections are touched - this is
because the car's electrical system needs to
store the necessary information to control mod-
ules.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
383
Open the clips on the front cover and remove
the cover.
Release the rubber moulding so that the rear
cover is free.
Remove the rear cover by screwing one
quarter turn and lifting it away.
WARNING
Connect and remove the positive and nega-
tive cables in the correct order.
Detach the black negative cable.
Detach the red positive cable.
Detach the ventilation hose from the battery.
Loosen the screw holding the battery clamp.
Move the battery aside.
Lift it up.
Fitting
1. Lower the battery into the battery box.
2. Move the battery inward and to the side until
it reaches the rear edge of the box.
3. Tighten the clamp that holds the battery.
4. Connect the ventilation hose.
> Check that it is correctly connected to
both battery and outlet in the body.
5. Connect the red positive cable.
6. Connect the black negative cable.
7. Press in the rear cover. (See earlier section
"Removal".)
8. Fit the rubber moulding. (See "Removal".)
9. Align the front cover and secure it with the
clips. (See "Removal".)
For more information on the car's starter battery,
see Starter battery - general (p. 380) and Jump
starting with another battery (p. 268).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
384
Hybrid battery
The car is equipped with a hybrid battery for
electric motor operation - a maintenance-free
rechargeable Lithium-ion type battery.
NOTE
If both the starter battery and the hybrid bat-
tery (p. 300) are discharged then both batter-
ies must be charged. In such a case, charging
only the hybrid battery first is not possible.
In order for the hybrid battery to be charged
the starter battery must have a certain state
of charge.
WARNING
The hybrid battery must only be replaced by a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
Coolant
The hybrid battery's cooling system has a sepa-
rate expansion tank.
IMPORTANT
The hybrid battery's coolant must only be top-
ped up by a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Starter battery - general (p. 380)
Electrical system
The electrical system is single-pole and uses the
chassis and engine casing as a conductor.
The size, type and performance of the starter bat-
tery depend on the car's equipment and function.
IMPORTANT
If the starter battery is replaced, make sure
you replace it with a battery with the same
cold starting capacity and type as the original
battery (see the label on the battery).
Related information
•
Starter battery - replacement (p. 382)
•
Starter battery - general (p. 380)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
385
Fuses - general
All electrical functions and components are pro-
tected by a number of fuses in order to protect
the car's electrical system from damage by short
circuiting or overloading.
WARNING
Orange-coloured cables must only be handled
by qualified personnel.
WARNING
Several components in the car work with
high-voltage current that could be dangerous
in the event of incorrect intervention.
Do not touch anything that is not clearly
described in this owner's manual.
If an electrical component or function does not
work, it may be because the component's fuse
was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the
same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in
the circuit. Volvo recommends that you visit an
authorised Volvo workshop for checking.
Changing
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side to
see whether the curved wire has blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse
of the same colour and amperage.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an
amperage higher than that specified when
replacing a fuse. This could cause significant
damage to the electrical system and possibly
lead to fire.
Location of central electrical units
Central electrical unit locations in a left-hand
drive car. In a right-hand drive car the central
electrical units under the glovebox change sides.
Engine compartment
Under the glovebox
Under the glovebox
Cargo area
Engine compartment, cold zone
Related information
•
Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 386)
•
Fuses - under glovebox (p. 389)
•
Fuses - in the control module under the glo-
vebox (p. 391)
•
Fuses - in cargo area (p. 393)
•
Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold
zone (p. 397)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
386
Fuses - in engine compartment
Fuses in the engine compartment protect engine
and brake functions, amongst other things.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
387
General fuses, engine compartment
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that
facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting
of fuses.
Positions (see preceding illustration)
Engine compartment, upper
Engine compartment, front
Engine compartment, lower
These fuses are all located in the engine com-
partment box. The fuses in (C) are located under
(A).
On the inside of the cover is a label that shows
the location of the fuses.
•
Fuses 1-7 and 42-44 are of the "Midi Fuse"
type and must only be replaced by a work-
shop
8
.
•
Fuses 8-15 and 34 are of the "JCASE" type
and should be replaced by a workshop
8
.
•
Fuses 16-33 and 35-41 are of the "Mini
Fuse" type.
Function
A
A
- -
Primary fuse for the central elec-
tronic module (CEM) under the
glovebox
50
- -
Primary fuse for relay/fuse box
under the glovebox
60
- -
- -
- -
- -
Windscreen wipers 30
Parking heater*
25
- -
- -
ABS pump 40
ABS valves 20
Function
A
A
Headlamp washers*
20
Headlamp levelling*; Active Xenon
headlamps - ABL*
10
Primary fuse for the central elec-
tronic module (CEM) under the
glovebox
20
ABS 5
Adjustable steering force*
5
Engine control module; Transmis-
sion control module; Airbags
10
Heated washer nozzles*
10
- -
Headlamp control 5
- -
- -
- -
Relay coils 5
Auxiliary lamps*
20
8
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
388
Function
A
A
Horn 15
Relay coil in main relay for engine
management system; Engine con-
trol module
10
Transmission control module 15
- -
Relay coils in central electrical unit
in engine compartment cold zone
5
Start relay 30
Glow control module 10
Engine Control Module (ECM) 15
Mass air flow sensor; Control
valves
15
Valves; Oil level sensor 10
Lambda-sonds; Control module,
radiator roller cover
15
Diesel filter heater 20
Crankcase ventilation heater 10
Function
A
A
Glow plugs 70
Cooling fan 80
Power steering 100
A
Ampere
Behind the engine
A: Left-hand drive car. B: Right-hand drive car.
Fuse
Function
A
A
Monitoring of vacuum pump for
brake system
5
A
Ampere
Related information
•
Fuses - under glovebox (p. 389)
•
Fuses - in the control module under the glo-
vebox (p. 391)
•
Fuses - in cargo area (p. 393)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
389
Fuses - under glovebox
Fuses under the glovebox protect the infotain-
ment system and seat functions, amongst other
things.
Positions
Function
A
A
Primary fuse for audio control mod-
ule*; Primary fuse for fuses 16-20:
Infotainment
40
Windscreen washers; Rear window
washer
25
- -
Function
A
A
- -
- -
Door handles, keyless system*
5
- -
Control panel, driver's door 20
Function
A
A
Control panel, front passenger door 20
Control panel, rear passenger door,
right
20
Control panel, rear passenger door,
left
20
Keyless system*
7.5
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
390
Function
A
A
Power seat, driver's side*
20
Power seat, passenger side*
20
- -
Infotainment Control Module or
Screen
B
5
Audio control unit (amplifier)*; TV*;
Digital radio*
10
Audio control module or Control
module Sensus
B
15
Telematics*; Bluetooth*
5
- -
Sunroof*; Interior lighting roof; Cli-
mate sensor*
5
12 V socket, tunnel console 15
Seat heating, rear right*
15
Seat heating, rear left*
15
Electrically-driven heater 5
Seat heating, front passenger side 15
Seat heating, front driver's side 15
Function
A
A
Parking assistance*; Parking cam-
era*; BLIS*
5
- -
- -
A
Ampere
B
Certain model variants.
Related information
•
Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 386)
•
Fuses - in the control module under the glo-
vebox (p. 391)
•
Fuses - in cargo area (p. 393)
•
Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold
zone (p. 397)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
391
Fuses - in the control module under
the glovebox
Fuses in the control module under the glovebox
protect airbag and collision warning system
functions, amongst other things.
Positions
Function
A
A
Rear window wiper 15
- -
Interior lighting; Driver's door con-
trol panel, power windows; Power
seats*
7.5
Function
A
A
Combined instrument panel 5
Adaptive cruise control, ACC*; colli-
sion warning system*
10
Interior lighting; Rain sensor*
7.5
Steering wheel module 7.5
Function
A
A
Central locking system, fuel filler
flap
10
Heated steering wheel*
15
- -
Unlocking, tailgate 10
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
392
Function
A
A
Folding head restraint*
10
Fuel pump 20
Movement detector for alarm*; Cli-
mate panel
5
Steering lock 15
Siren*; Data link connector OBDII
5
- -
Airbags 10
Collision warning system*
5
Accelerator pedal sensor; Dimming
interior rearview mirror*; Seat heat-
ing, rear*
7.5
Infotainment control module (Per-
formance); Audio (Performance)
15
Brake light 5
Sunroof*
20
Immobiliser 5
A
Ampere
Related information
•
Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 386)
•
Fuses - under glovebox (p. 389)
•
Fuses - in cargo area (p. 393)
•
Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold
zone (p. 397)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
393
Fuses - in cargo area
Fuses in the cargo area protect the electric park-
ing brake and electric operation functions,
amongst other things.
The fuse box is located behind the upholstery on the left-hand side.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
394
The emergency puncture repair kit needs to be lifted out
for the central electrical unit to be accessible.
Positions
Box A Function
A
A
Electric parking brake, left 30
Electric parking brake, right 30
Rear window defroster 30
Trailer socket 2*
15
- -
12 V socket, cargo area 15
- -
- -
Box A Function
A
A
- -
- -
Trailer socket 1*
40
- -
A
Ampere
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
395
The fuse box is located behind the upholstery on the left-hand side.
The emergency puncture repair kit needs to be lifted out
for the central electrical unit to be accessible.
Box
B
Function
A
A
Coolant pump 1 for hybrid bat-
tery; Valve for coolant pumps 1
and 2
10
Coolant pump 2 for hybrid bat-
tery
10
Charging unit; Voltage converter
400 V-12 V; Control module for
hybrid battery
5
Coolant pump for the cooling
system's low temperature circuit
15
Box
B
Function
A
A
Charging unit; Voltage converter
400 V-12 V; Control module for
hybrid battery
10
Relay coils; High voltage con-
verter for electric motor and
integrated starter generator
10
Disengaging the electric motor
from the rear axle
15
- -
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
396
Box
B
Function
A
A
High voltage converter for elec-
tric motor and integrated starter
generator; Control module for
hybrid battery
10
Coolant valves for the cooling
system's low temperature circuit;
Electric A/C compressor; Valve
for heat exchanger; Valve for cli-
mate control system
10
- -
- -
A
Ampere
Related information
•
Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 386)
•
Fuses - under glovebox (p. 389)
•
Fuses - in the control module under the glo-
vebox (p. 391)
•
Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold
zone (p. 397)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
397
Fuses - in the engine
compartment's cold zone
Fuses in the engine compartment's cold zone
are fitted in cars with the Start/Stop function.
•
Fuses A1 and A2 are of the "MEGA Fuse"
type and must only be replaced by a work-
shop
9
.
•
Fuses 1-11 are of the "Midi Fuse" type and
must only be replaced by a workshop
9
.
•
Fuse 12 is of the "Mini Fuse" type.
For more information on Start/Stop - see Drive
system - drive modes (p. 270).
Positions
Function
A
A
Main fuse for central electrical
unit in the engine compartment
175
Function
A
A
Main fuse for central electronic
module (CEM) under the glove-
box, relay/fuse box under the glo-
vebox, central electrical units in
cargo area
175
Vacuum pump for brake system 40
9
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
398
Function
A
A
Primary fuse for the central elec-
tronic module (CEM) under the
glovebox
50
Primary fuse for relay/fuse box
under the glovebox
60
Primary fuse for central electrical
unit B in cargo area
50
Primary fuse for central electrical
unit A in cargo area
60
Ventilation fan 40
- -
- -
- -
- -
Oil pump automatic gearbox 30
- -
A
Ampere
Related information
•
Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 386)
•
Fuses - under glovebox (p. 389)
•
Fuses - in the control module under the glo-
vebox (p. 391)
•
Fuses - in cargo area (p. 393)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
399
Car wash
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier
to clean as the dirt does not attach as firmly. It
also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the
car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil
separator. Use car shampoo.
Handwashing
•
Remove bird droppings from the paintwork
as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain
substances that affect and discolour paint-
work very quickly. For example, use soft
paper or sponge soaked in plenty of water.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended for the removal of any discoloration.
•
Hose down the underbody.
•
Rinse the whole car until the loose dirt has
been removed in order to reduce the risk of
scratches from washing. Do not spray directly
onto the locks.
•
If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on
very dirty surfaces. Note that the surfaces
must not then be warmed up by the sun!
•
Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and
plenty of lukewarm water.
•
Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap
solution or car shampoo.
•
Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a
water scraper. If you avoid allowing water
droplets to dry in strong sunlight then the
risk of water stains that may need to be pol-
ished away is reduced.
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-
shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.
IMPORTANT
Dirty headlamps have impaired functionality.
Clean them regularly, when refuelling for
example.
Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents but
use water and a non-scratching sponge
instead.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear
lamps may temporarily have condensation on
the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exte-
rior lighting is designed to withstand this.
Condensation is normally vented out of the
lamp housing when the lamp has been
switched on for a time.
Automatic car washes
An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way
of washing the car, but it cannot reach every-
where. Washing the car by hand is recommended
to achieve a good result, or to supplement auto-
matic car washes with washing by hand.
NOTE
The car must only be washed by hand over
the first few months. This is because the paint
is more delicate when it is new.
High-pressure washing
When using high-pressure washing, use sweep-
ing movements and make sure that the nozzle
does not come closer than 30 cm to the surface
of the car. Do not spray directly onto the locks.
Testing the brakes
WARNING
Always test the brakes after washing the car,
including the parking brake, to ensure that
moisture and corrosion do not attack the
brake linings and reduce braking perform-
ance.
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then
when driving long distances in rain or slush. The
heat from the friction causes the brake linings to
warm up and dry. Do the same thing after starting
in very damp or cold weather.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
400
Wiper blades
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, as
well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, impair
the service life of wiper blades.
For cleaning:
- Set the wiper blades to the service position, see
Wiper blades (p. 377).
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen regu-
larly with a lukewarm soap solution or car
shampoo. Do not use any strong solvents.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
dealers is recommended for the cleaning and
care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim
components, such as glossy trim mouldings.
When using such a cleaning agent the instruc-
tions must be followed carefully.
The frames around the side windows, the car's
roof rails and the door frames at the windows*
are produced in anodised aluminium. This means
that they should only be washed using a cleaning
agent with a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5.
This is in order to avoid discolouration.
Parts that should be washed using a cleaning agent with
a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and rubber,
only rub with light pressure if it is necessary.
Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear
away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must
not be used.
IMPORTANT
Avoid washing the car with cleaning agent
with a pH value lower than 3.5 or higher than
11.5. This may result in discolouration of ano-
dised aluminium parts such as roof rack and
around the side windows.
Never use metal polishing agent on anodised
aluminium parts, this can result in discoloura-
tion and destroy the surface treatment.
Rims
Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by
Volvo.
After washing, discolouration at the base of the
spokes may remain due to metal dust from the
brake discs attaching in the wheel rim's paint.
Paint cleaner works in many cases, with very fine
polishing using a soft cloth.
Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the sur-
face and cause stains on chrome-plated alumi-
nium rims.
Related information
•
Polishing and waxing (p. 401)
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 402)
•
Water and dirt-repellent coating (p. 401)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
401
Polishing and waxing
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or
to give the paintwork extra protection.
The car does not need to be polished until it is
at least one year old. However, the car can be
waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax the
car in direct sunlight.
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you
begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt and
tar stains using tar remover or white spirit. More
stubborn stains can be removed using fine rub-
bing paste designed for car paintwork.
Polish first with a polish and then wax with liquid
or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the pack-
aging carefully. Many preparations contain both
polish and wax.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and rubber,
only rub with light pressure if it is necessary.
Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear
away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must
not be used.
IMPORTANT
Only paint treatment recommended by Volvo
should be used. Other treatment such as pre-
serving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or
similar could damage the paintwork. Paint-
work damage caused by such treatments is
not covered by Volvo warranty.
Related information
•
Car wash (p. 399)
Water and dirt-repellent coating
The windows are treated with a surface coating
that improves visibility in difficult weather condi-
tions.
Water and dirt-repellent coating*
There is natural wear of the water-
repellent coating.
Maintenance:
•
Never use products such as car wax,
degreaser or similar on glass surfaces as this
could ruin their water-repellent properties.
•
Take care when cleaning so as not to dam-
age the glass surface.
•
To avoid damaging glass surfaces when
removing ice – only use plastic ice scrapers.
•
Treatment with a special finishing agent
available from Volvo dealers is recommended
in order to maintain the water-repellent prop-
erties on the side windows. This should be
used first after three years and then each
year.
IMPORTANT
Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice
from the windows. Use the heating to remove
ice from the door mirrors, see Windows and
rearview and door mirrors - heating (p. 108).
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
402
Related information
•
Car wash (p. 399)
Rustproofing
The car received a thorough and complete rust-
proofing at the factory. Parts of the body are
made of galvanised sheet metal. The underbody
is protected by a wear-resistant anti-corrosion
compound. A thin, penetrating rustproofing fluid
was sprayed into the exposed members, cavi-
ties, closed sections and side doors.
Inspection and maintenance
The car's anti-corrosion protection does not nor-
mally need to be maintained, but keeping the car
clean always helps to further reduce the risk of
corrosion. Strong alkaline or acidic cleaning solu-
tions must always be avoided on the glossy trim
components. Any stone chips should be rectified
as soon as they are discovered.
Related information
•
Paint damage (p. 404)
Cleaning the interior
Only use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming
is important prior to using cleaning agents.
IMPORTANT
•
Certain items of coloured clothing (e.g.
dark jeans and suede garments) may
stain the upholstery. If this occurs, it is
important to clean and treat these parts
of the upholstery as soon as possible.
•
Never use strong solvents such as
washer fluid, pure petrol or white spirit to
clean the interior, since this may damage
the upholstery as well as other interior
materials.
•
Never spray the cleaning agent directly
onto components that have electrical but-
tons and controls. Wipe them instead
using a moistened cloth containing the
cleaning agent.
•
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage
the fabric upholstery.
Fabric upholstery and ceiling upholstery
Volvo offers a comprehensive fabric care product
for fabric upholstery and ceiling upholstery which,
when used in accordance with the instructions,
preserves the properties of the upholstery. The
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
403
fabric care product is available for purchase from
a Volvo dealer.
Leather upholstery
Volvo's leather upholstery is treated to preserve
its original appearance.
Leather upholstery is a natural product that
changes and acquires a beautiful patina over
time. Regular cleaning and treatment are
required in order that the properties and colours
of the leather shall be preserved. Volvo offers a
comprehensive product, Volvo Leather Care Kit/
Wipes, for the cleaning and treatment of leather
upholstery which, when used in accordance with
the instructions, preserves the leather's protective
coating.
To achieve best results, Volvo recommends the
cleaning and application of the protective cream
once to four times per year (or more if required).
The Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is available for
purchase from a Volvo dealer.
Leather steering wheel
Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the
leather steering wheel with protective plastic.
Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is recommended
for cleaning the leather steering wheel.
Interior plastic, metal and wood parts
A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly mois-
tened with water, available from Volvo dealers, is
recommended for cleaning interior parts and sur-
faces.
Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong
stain removers. A special cleaning agent available
from Volvo dealers can be used for more difficult
cleaning.
Seatbelts
Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special
textile cleaning agent is available from a Volvo
dealer. Ensure that the seatbelt is dry before
allowing it to retract.
Inlay mats and floor mat
Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of
the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a vac-
uum cleaner to remove dust and dirt. Each inlay
mat is secured with pins.
Remove the inlay mat by taking hold of the inlay
mat at each pin and lifting the mat straight up.
Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at each
pin.
WARNING
Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and
check before setting off that the mat by the
driver's seat is firmly affixed and secured in
the pins so that it does not get caught adja-
cent to and under the pedals.
A special textile cleaner is recommended for
stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor
mats must be cleaned with agents recommended
by a Volvo dealer.
Related information
•
Car wash (p. 399)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
404
Paint damage
Paint is an important part of the car's rustproof-
ing and should therefore be checked regularly.
The most common types of paintwork damage
are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the
edges of wings, doors and bumpers.
Touching up minor paintwork damage
To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork
should be rectified immediately.
Materials that may be needed
•
Primer
10
- for e.g. bumpers, there are special
adhesive primers available in spray cans.
•
Base coat and clear coat - are available in
spray cans or as touch-up pens/sticks
11
.
•
Masking tape.
•
Fine sand paper
10
.
Colour code
The label for colour code is located on the car's
door pillar and is visible when the right-hand rear
door is opened.
Exterior colour code
Any secondary exterior colour code
It is important that the correct colour is used. For
product label location, see Type designations
(p. 408).
Repairing minor paint damage such as
stone chips and scratches
G021832
Before work is started, the car must be clean and
dry as well as at a temperature above 15 °C.
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the dam-
aged surface. Then remove the tape to
remove any loose paint.
If the damage has reached down to a metal
surface (sheet steel), it is preferable to use a
primer. In the event of damage to a plastic
surface, an adhesive primer should be used
for better results - spray into the spray can's
cap and brush thinly.
10
If required.
11
Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
405
2. Before painting, gentle polishing using a very
fine polishing agent may be carried out
locally if required (e.g. if there are any uneven
edges). Clean the surface thoroughly and
allow to dry.
3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
brush, matchstick or similar. Finish with base
coat and clear coat once the primer has
dried.
4. For scratches, proceed as above, but mask
around the damaged area to protect the
undamaged paintwork.
NOTE
If the stone chip has not penetrated down to
the meal and an undamaged layer of paint
remains in place, fill in with base coat and
clear coat as soon as the surface has been
cleaned.
Related information
•
Rustproofing (p. 402)
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
408
Type designations
Type designation, vehicle identification number,
etc., i.e. information unique to the car, can be
read on a label in the car.
SPECIFICATIONS
}}
409
Label location
The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on market and model.
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle iden-
tification and engine numbers can facilitate all
||
SPECIFICATIONS
410
contact with an authorised Volvo dealer regarding
the car and when ordering spare parts and
accessories.
Decal for type designation, vehicle identifica-
tion number, permissible maximum weights
and code designation for exterior colour and
type approval number. The decal is posi-
tioned on the door pillar, and will be visible
when the right-hand rear door is opened.
Label for A/C system.
Label for parking heater.
Decal for engine code and the engine's
serial number.
Label for engine oil.
Decal for gearbox type designation and serial
number.
Decal for the car's identification number -
VIN (Vehicle Identification Number).
Further information on the car is presented in the
registration document.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in
the owner's manual should be exact replicas
of those in the car. They are included to show
their approximate appearance and locations
in the car. The information that applies to your
particular car can be found on the decal on
the car.
Related information
•
Weights (p. 412)
•
Engine specifications (p. 414)
•
Specifications for air conditioning (p. 422)
SPECIFICATIONS
411
Dimensions
Measurement of car length, height, etc. can be
read in the table.
Dimensions mm
A Wheelbase 2776
B Length 4635
C Load length, floor, folded rear seat 1749
D Load length, floor 978
E Height 1484
F Load height 592
G Front track 1578
Dimensions mm
H Rear track 1575
I Load width, floor 1082
J Width 1866
K Width including door mirrors 2097
L Width including folded-in door
mirrors 1899
SPECIFICATIONS
412
Weights
Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read on a
label in the car.
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank
90% full and all fluids.
The weight of passengers and accessories, and
towball load (p. 413) (when a trailer is hitched)
influence the load capacity and are not included
in the kerb weight.
Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight -
Kerb weight.
NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies to cars
in the standard version - i.e. a car without
extra equipment or accessories. This means
that for every accessory added the loading
capacity of the car is reduced correspondingly
by the weight of the accessory.
Examples of accessories that reduce load
capacity are the different equipment levels
(e.g. Kinetic, Momentum, Summum), as well
as other accessories such as towbar, load
carrier, space box, audio system, auxiliary
lamps, GPS, fuel-driven heater, safety grille,
carpets, cargo cover, power seats, etc.
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer-
taining the kerb weight of your own particular
car.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on how heavily it is loaded and
how the load is distributed.
For information on label location, see Type designations
(p. 408).
Max. gross vehicle weight
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
Equipment level
Max. load: See registration document.
Max. roof load: 75 kg.
Related information
•
Towing capacity and towball load (p. 413)
•
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 424)
SPECIFICATIONS
* Option/accessory.
413
Towing capacity and towball load
Towing capacity and towball load for driving with
a trailer can be read in the tables.
Max. weight braked trailer
Engine
Engine code
A
Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
D5 AWD D87PHEV Automatic, TF-80SD 1800 90
D6 AWD D97PHEV Automatic, TF-80SD 1800 90
A
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 408).
Max. weight unbraked trailer
Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
750 50
Related information
•
Weights (p. 412)
•
Driving with a trailer* (p. 312)
•
Trailer Stability Assist - TSA (p. 318)
SPECIFICATIONS
414
Engine specifications
Engine specifications (output etc.) for each
respective engine alternative can be read in the
table.
Diesel engine
Engine
Engine code
A
Output
(kW/rpm)
Output
(hp/rpm)
Torque
(Nm/rpm)
No. of cylinders Bore
(mm)
Stroke
(mm)
Swept volume
(litres)
Compression ratio
D5 AWD D87PHEV 120/4000 163/4000 420/1500–2500 5 81.0 93.2 2.400 16.5:1
D6 AWD D97PHEV 162/4000 220/4000 440/1500-3000 5 81.0 93.2 2.400 16.5:1
A
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 408).
Related information
•
Coolant - grade and volume (p. 418)
•
Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 417)
SPECIFICATIONS
}}
415
Motor specifications - Electric drive
motor
V60 Twin Engine is driven both by a diesel
engine and an electric drive motor (ERAD –
Electric Rear Axle Drive).
Max. power output: 50 kW (70 hp).
Torque: 200 Nm.
Related information
•
Engine specifications (p. 414)
Engine oil - adverse driving
conditions
Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor-
mally high oil temperature or oil consumption.
Below are some examples of adverse driving
conditions.
Check the oil level (p. 364) more frequently for
long journeys:
•
towing a caravan or trailer
•
in mountainous regions
•
at high speeds
•
in temperatures colder than -30 °C or hotter
than +40 °C.
The above also apply to shorter driving distances
at low temperatures.
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse
driving conditions. It provides extra protection for
the engine.
Volvo recommends:
||
SPECIFICATIONS
416
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are filled
with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil
at the factory. The choice of oil has been
made very carefully with regard to service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption and
environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in order
that the recommended service intervals can
be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil
for both filling and oil change, otherwise you
will risk affecting service life, starting charac-
teristics, fuel consumption and environmental
impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty
liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade
and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are car-
ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Related information
•
Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 417)
•
Engine oil - general (p. 363)
SPECIFICATIONS
417
Engine oil - grade and volume
Engine oil grade and volume for each respective
engine alternative can be read in the table.
Volvo recommends:
Engine
Engine code
A
Oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter
(litres)
D5 AWD D87PHEV
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
Viscosity: SAE 0W–30
approx. 5.9
D6 AWD D97PHEV approx. 5.9
A
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 408).
Related information
•
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions
(p. 415)
•
Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 364)
SPECIFICATIONS
418
Coolant - grade and volume
Approved coolant volume for each respective
engine alternative can be read in the table.
Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by
Volvo mixed with 50% water
1
, see the packaging.
Engine Volume
(litres)
D5 AWD 12.9
D6 AWD 12.9
Related information
•
Coolant - level (p. 365)
1
Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.
SPECIFICATIONS
419
Transmission fluid - grade and
volume
The prescribed transmission fluid and volume for
each respective gearbox alternative can be read
in the table.
Automatic gearbox
Automatic gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid
TF-80SD approx 7.0 AW1
NOTE
The transmission fluid does not need to be
changed under normal driving conditions.
However, it may be necessary under adverse
driving conditions.
Related information
•
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions
(p. 415)
•
Type designations (p. 408)
SPECIFICATIONS
420
Brake fluid - grade and volume
Brake fluid is the term for the medium in a
hydraulic brake system that is used to transfer
pressure from the master brake cylinder to the
mechanical brakes.
Prescribed grade: Volvo Original Dot 4 class 6
or equivalent.
Volume: 0.6 litres
Related information
•
Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 366)
Power steering fluid - grade
Power steering fluid is the denomination of the
medium used in the car's power steering sys-
tem.
Prescribed grade: Power steering fluid recom-
mended by Volvo.
Related information
•
Power steering fluid - level (p. 367)
SPECIFICATIONS
422
Specifications for air conditioning
The climate control system in the car uses a
refrigerant, either R1234yf or R134a, depend-
ing on market. Information about which refriger-
ant the car's climate control system uses can be
seen on a decal, located on the inside of the
bonnet.
Prescribed grades and volumes of fluids and
lubricants in the air conditioning system can be
read in the tables below.
A/C decal
Decal for R134a
The label is fitted on the inside of the bonnet.
Decal for R1234yf
The label is fitted on the inside of the bonnet.
Symbol explanation R1234yf
Symbol Meaning
Caution
Mobile air conditioning system
(MAC)
Lubricant type
Symbol Meaning
A trained and certified technician is
required in order to service the
mobile air conditioning system
(MAC)
Flammable refrigerants
Refrigerant
Cars with refrigerant R134a
Weight Prescribed grade
880 g R134a
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressur-
ised refrigerant R134a. This system must only
be serviced and repaired by an authorised
workshop.
SPECIFICATIONS
423
Cars with refrigerant R1234yf
Weight Prescribed grade
825 g R1234yf
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressur-
ised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with
SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe
Service and Containment of Refrigerants
Used in Mobile A/C System), service and
repair of the refrigerant system must only be
performed by trained and certified technicians
in order to ensure the safety of the system.
Compressor oil
Volume Prescribed grade
140 ml PAG SP-A2
Evaporator
IMPORTANT
The A/C system's evaporator must never be
repaired or replaced with a previously used
evaporator. A new evaporator must be certi-
fied and labelled in accordance with SAE
J2842.
Related information
•
Climate control system - fault tracing and
repair (p. 368)
•
Type designations (p. 408)
SPECIFICATIONS
424
Fuel consumption and CO2
emissions
Fuel consumption in a vehicle is measured in
litres per 100 km and CO2 emissions in grams
CO2 per km.
Explanation
gram CO
2
/km
litre/100 km
Combined driving
Automatic gearbox
car's potential range ("up to") in km
for electric operation
NOTE
If the consumption and emission data is miss-
ing then it is included in the enclosed supple-
ment.
SPECIFICATIONS
}}
425
D5 AWD (D87PHEV) 48 1.8
50
A
D6 AWD (D97PHEV)
48 1.8
50
A
A
Drive mode PURE
NOTE
The capacity of the hybrid battery diminishes
with age and use, which may result in
increased use of the internal combustion
engine and, as a consequence, reduced fuel
economy and reduced range during electric
operation.
The values in the table above for fuel consump-
tion, emissions and range for electric operation
are based on special EU driving cycles (see
below), that apply for cars with a kerb weight in
basic version and without extra equipment. The
car's weight may increase depending on equip-
ment. This, as well as how heavily the car is loa-
ded, increases fuel consumption and carbon
dioxide emissions and also reduces the range for
electric operation.
There are several reasons for increased fuel con-
sumption and shorter mileage on electric power
compared with the table's values. Examples of
this are:
•
If the car is not charged regularly from the
mains power circuit.
•
If the car is equipped with extra equipment
that affects the car's weight.
•
The driver's driving style.
•
If the customer chooses wheels other than
those fitted as standard on the model's basic
version then rolling resistance may increase.
•
High speed results in increased wind resis-
tance.
•
Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,
weather and the condition of the car.
A combination of the above-mentioned examples
can result in significantly increased consumption.
Large deviations in fuel consumption may arise in
a comparison with the EU driving cycles (see
below) which are used in the certification of the
car and on which the consumption figures in the
table are based. For further information, please
refer to the regulations referred to.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combina-
tion with fuel quality are factors that consider-
ably increase the car's fuel consumption.
||
SPECIFICATIONS
426
EU driving cycles
Official fuel consumption figures and the range
for electric operation are based on two standar-
dised driving cycles in a laboratory environment
("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU
Regulation no 692/2008 and 715/2007 (Euro
5 / Euro 6) and UN ECE Regulation no 101.
Since the driving cycles are also used for quality
control, there are significant requirements for
repeatability of the tests. For this reason the tests
are carried out under close scrutiny and only with
the car's basic functions (e.g. air conditioning,
radio, etc. switched off). As a consequence of this
the results from the official figures are not obvi-
ously representative of what the customer sees
during actual usage.
The regulations cover the driving cycles for
"Urban driving" and "Extra-urban driving":
•
Urban driving - the measurement starts with
cold starting the engine. The driving is simu-
lated.
•
Extra-urban driving - the car is accelerated
and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h
(0-75 mph). The driving is simulated.
Cars with manual gearbox are started in 2nd
gear.
The official value for combined driving, which is
reported in the table, is a combination of the
results from the "Urban driving" and "Extra-urban
driving" driving cycles, in accordance with legal
requirements.
The exhaust gases are collected in order to
extrapolate the carbon dioxide emissions (CO
2
emissions) during the two driving cycles. These
are then analysed and give the value for CO
2
emissions.
Related information
•
Weights (p. 412)
SPECIFICATIONS
427
Wheels and tyres - approved
dimensions
In certain countries not all approved dimensions
are indicated by the registration document or
other documents. The following table shows all
approved combinations of wheel rims and tyres.
For information on the minimum permitted load
index (LI) and the minimum permitted speed rat-
ing (SS), see Load index and speed rating
(p. 428).
✓ = Approved
Engine man/
aut
235/45 R 17
8Jx17x55
235/45 R 18
8Jx18x55
235/40 R 19
8Jx19x55
D5 AWD D87PHEV aut
✓ ✓ ✓
D6 AWD D97PHEV aut
✓ ✓ ✓
Related information
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 325)
•
Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 325)
SPECIFICATIONS
428
Load index and speed rating
The table below shows the minimum permitted
load index (LI) and speed rating (SS). Informa-
tion on engine, front-wheel drive (FWD) or all-
wheel drive (AWD) and the type of transmission
is needed to read the table. For information with
respect to these details, see Type designations
(p. 408).
Engine man/
aut Minimum permitted load index (LI)
A
Minimum permitted speed rating (SS)
B
D5 AWD D87PHEV aut 96 H
D6 AWD D97PHEV aut 96 V
A
The tyre's load index must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table.
B
The tyre's speed rating must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table.
Related information
•
Wheels and tyres - approved dimensions
(p. 427)
•
Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 429)
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 325)
•
Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 325)
•
Tyres - load index (p. 326)
•
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 326)
SPECIFICATIONS
429
Tyres - approved tyre pressures
Approved tyre pressures for each respective
engine alternative can be read in the table.
Engine Tyre size Speed
(km/h)
Load, 1-3 persons Max. load
ECO pressure
A
Front
(kPa)
B
Rear
(kPa)
Front
(kPa)
Rear
(kPa)
Front/rear
(kPa)
D5 AWD (D87PHEV)
D6 AWD (D97PHEV)
235/45 R 17
235/45 R 18
235/40 R 19
0 - 160
C
280 280 280 280 280
160+
D
280 280 320 320 -
Temporary Spare Tyre
max. 80
E
420 420 420 420 -
A
Economical driving.
B
In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
C
0 - 100 mph
D
100+ mph
E
max 50 mph
Related information
•
Wheels and tyres - approved dimensions
(p. 427)
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 325)
•
Tyres - air pressure (p. 324)
•
Type designations (p. 408)
SPECIFICATIONS
430
Hybrid Battery - specification
The hybrid battery (battery for drive motor) is
used to power the electric motor when driving in
electric mode.
Type: Lithium-ion
Energy quantity: 11.2 kWh.
Related information
•
Charging the hybrid battery (p. 300)
•
Charging the hybrid battery - preparations
(p. 302)
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
431
A
ACC – Adaptive cruise control 204
Active bending lights 97
Active main beam 95
Active xenon headlamps 97
Active Yaw Control 190
Adaptation of headlamp beam 98
Adapting driving characteristics 190
Adaptive Cruise Control 204
deactivate 211
fault tracing 214
function 205
managing speed 207
overtaking 210
overview 206
radar sensor 217
setting the time interval 209
standby mode 209
temporary deactivation 209
Adjusting the steering wheel 89
Airbag
activating/deactivating, PACOS 38
driver's side 36
passenger side 36, 38
AIRBAG 36
Airbag system 34
warning symbol 34
Air cleaning
material 127
passenger compartment 125, 126, 127
Air conditioning 134
Air conditioning, fluid
volume and grade 422
Air conditioning system
repair 368
Air distribution 127
Recirculation 135
table 136
Air quality system IAQS 126
Alarm 185, 186, 187
alarm indicator 186
alarm signals 187
automatic re-arming 186
checking the alarm 168
reduced alarm level 187
remote control key not working 187
Allergy and asthma inducing substances. 126
All Wheel Drive, (AWD) 280
All Wheel Drive (AWD) 280
Approach lighting 102, 166
Automatic car washes 399
Automatic gearbox 277
manual gear positions (Geartronic) 278
trailer 313
Automatic relocking 178
AWD, All Wheel Drive 280
B
Backrest 85
front seat, lowering 85
rear seat, folding 87
Battery 268, 292, 380
HYBRID 384
jump starting 268
maintenance 380
overload 292
remote control key/PCC 172
start 380
symbols on the battery 382
warning symbols 382
BLIS 240, 241
Bonnet, opening 361
Book service and repair 356
Brake fluid 366
grade and volume 420
Brake light 99
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
432
Brakes 281, 284
Anti-lock braking system, ABS 284
brake light 99
brake system 281, 284
Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA 284
filling brake fluid 367
handbrake 285
symbols in the combined instrument
panel 282
bulbs, specifications 376
C
Camera sensor 224, 236
Car care 399
Leather upholstery 403
Cargo area
cargo cover 159
coolant 384
lighting 101
mounting points 156
protective net 157
Cargo cover 159
Cargo grille 158
Car key memory 163
Car upholstery 402
Car washing 399
Catalytic converter 299
Recovery 319
Charge current 301
Charging 302
finish charging 310
start charging 308
Charging cable 303
control unit 303
Checking the engine oil level 364
Children
child safety locks 45
child seat and airbag 51
child seats and side airbags 39
location in car 51
safety 45
Child safety locks 184
Child seat
integrated child seat 52
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats 55
lowering 54
raising 53
seating position 52
Child seats 45
recommended 46
size classes for child seats with ISOFIX
fixture system 56
types 57
upper mounting points for child seats 59
City Safety™ 222
Cleaning
automatic car wash 399
car washing 399
rims 400
seatbelts 403
upholstery 402
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) 126
Climate control
actual temperature 125
auto-regulation 133
general 124
personal preferences 127
sensors 125
temperature control 133
Clock, adjustment 78
CO
2
emissions 424
Collision 43
Collision warning 229, 230
Collision warning system
function 230
general limitations 235
operation 233
Pedestrian detection 232
Radar sensor 217, 223
Collision Warning System with Auto
Brake 229
Colour code, paint 404
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
433
Combined instrument panel 69
Compass 109
calibration 109
Condensation in headlamps 399
Controls lighting 92
Control symbols 72
Control unit 307
Control unit display 305
Coolant
volume and grade 418
Coolant, checking and filling
Engine compartment 365
Cooling system 291
overheating 291
Cornering lights 98
Corner Traction Control 191
Crash, see Collision 43
Cruise control 198
deactivate 200
managing speed 199
resume set speed 200
temporary deactivation 199
CTA – Cross Traffic Alert 242
Cyclist detection 231
CZIP (Clear Zone Interior Package) 126
D
Daytime running lights 93
Deadlock 183
deactivation 183
temporary deactivation 183
Defroster 134
Detachable towbar
storage 314
Diesel 296
run out of fuel 297
Diesel particle filter 298
Dimensions 411
Dipstick, electronic 364
Direction indicator 100
Direction indicators 100
direction of rotation 323
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor 279
Display lighting 92
Distance Warning 201
Limitations 202
Symbols and messages 203
Door mirrors 107
automatic dimming 107
resetting 107
Driveable punctured tyres 339
Driver Alert Control 249
operation 250
Driver Alert System 248
Drive systems 269
Driving 292
cooling system 291
with the tailgate open 291
Driving in water 290
Driving with a trailer 312
towball load 413
towing capacity 413
E
ECC, electronic climate control 130
EcoGuide 73
Ecolabelling, FSC, owner's manual 25
Electrically-driven heater 146
Electrical socket 153
cargo area 156
Electrical system 384
Electric drive motor
specifications 415
Electric parking brake
low battery voltage 285
Electronic climate control - ECC 130
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
434
Emergency equipment
first aid kit 334
warning triangle 332
Emergency puncture repair 346
action 348
inflating the tyres 352
rechecking 350
Emergency puncture repair kit
location 346
overview 347
Emissions of carbon dioxide 424
Engine
deactivate 267
overheating 291
start 266
Engine compartment
Brake fluid 366
Check 362
coolant 365
Engine oil 363
overview 361
power steering fluid 367
Engine drag control 191
Engine oil 363, 415
adverse driving conditions 415
filter 363
grade and volume 417
Engine oil, filling 364
Engine specifications 414, 415
Error messages
Adaptive Cruise Control 215
Driver Alert Control 251
Lane Departure Warning 255
see Messages and symbols 215, 286
Error messages in BLIS 244
exhaust gases, toxic, sucked in 291
External dimensions 411
F
Fan
ECC 132
Fault tracing for the camera sensor 225
First aid 334
First aid kit 334
Fluids, capacities 379, 418, 419, 420,
421, 422
Fluids and oils 418, 419, 420, 422
Fog lamp
rear 98
Foot brake 281, 284
FSC, ecolabelling 25
Fuel 295, 296
fuel consumption 424
fuel economy 324
fuel filter 298
identifier 296
Fuel-driven heater 146
auto mode 147
deactivate 147
fuelling 147
parking on a hill 147
starter battery and fuel 147
Fuelling
filling 295
fuel cap 295
fuel filler flap 294
fuel filler flap, manual opening 294
Fuel tank
volume 421
Fuse box 385
Fuses
behind the engine 388
changing 385
General 385
in cargo area 393
in engine compartment 386
In the control module under the glove-
box 391
in the engine compartment's cold
zone 397
under glovebox 389
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
435
G
Gearbox 276
automatic 277
Gear selector inhibitor 279
Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disen-
gagement 279
Gear shift indicator 276
Geartronic 278
Glass
laminated/reinforced 25
Glovebox 152
locking 181
Gross vehicle weight 412
Ground fault breaker 307
GSI - Gear selector assistance 276
H
Handbrake 285
Hazard warning flashers 99
Headlamp beam
adaptation 98
height adjustment 92
Headlamp control 91
Headlamp levelling of headlamps 92
Headlamp pattern, adjusting 98
Headlamp pattern adjustment 98
Headlamps 370
head restraint
centre seat, rear 87
lowering 87, 88
Heated wiper blades 104
Heater
electrically-driven 146
fuel-driven 146
Heating
rearview and door mirrors 108
rear window 108
seats 131, 132
steering wheel 90
Heat-reflecting windscreen 20
High engine temperature 291
High-pressure headlamp washing 104
Hill Start Assist 280
Home safe light duration 102
Horn 90
Hybrid battery 384
charging 300
specifications 430
Hybrid guide 73
I
IAQS - Interior Air Quality System 126
Immobiliser 165
Indicator symbols 74
Inflatable curtain 40
Information button, PCC 167, 168
Information display 69
Inlaid mats 152
Instrument lighting 92
Instrument overview
left-hand drive car 62
right-hand drive car 65
Instruments and controls 62, 65
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)
Air cleaning 126
Interior lighting 101
Interior rearview mirror 108
automatic dimming 109
Intermittent wiping 103
Internet-connected car
book service and repair 356
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
436
J
Jack 333
Journey statistics 121
Jump starting 268
K
Kerb weight 412
Key 162, 164
Key blade 169, 170
Keyless drive 173, 174, 175, 176, 177, 266
Keyless - locking 175
Keyless start (keyless drive) 173, 174,
175, 176, 177, 266
Keyless - unlocking 176
Keypad in the steering wheel 89
Key positions 82
L
Labels
location of 408
Laminated glass 25
Lamps 368
Lane assistance
operation 253, 254
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) 252, 253
Laser sensor 226
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 403
Light indications, PCC 168
Lighting
active bending lights 97
active xenon headlamps 97
approach lighting 102, 166
automatic lighting, passenger compart-
ment 101
Automatic main beam 95
bulbs, specifications 376
controls 91, 101
controls lighting 92
cornering lights 98
daytime running lights 93
display lighting 92
headlamp levelling 92
home safe lighting 102
instrument lighting 92
in the passenger compartment 101
main/dipped beam 94
position lamps 92
rear fog lamp 98
tunnel detection 94
Lighting, bulb replacement 368
bulb holder, rear 374
cargo area 375
dipped beam (cars with halogen head-
lamps) 371
direction indicators, front 373
main beam (cars with active xenon
headlamps) 373
main beam (cars with halogen head-
lamps) 372
number plate lighting 375
vanity mirror 376
Loading
cargo area 154
General 154
long load 155
roof load 155
Lock
locking 178
manual locking 178
unlocking 178, 179
Lockable wheel bolts 327
Lock confirmation 164
Lock indicator 164
Locking/unlocking
glovebox 181
inside 179
tailgate 181
Long-term storage 311
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
437
M
Main/dipped beam 94
Main beam, automatic activation 95
maintenance
Rustproofing 402
Manual gear positions (Geartronic) 278
Max. roof load 412
Memory function in seat 86
Menus
Combined instrument panel 112
menu overview 113
Messages 114
Messages and symbols
Adaptive Cruise Control 215
Collision Warning with Auto
Brake 228, 238
Driver Alert Control 251
Lane Departure Warning 255
Messages in BLIS 244
Messages in the information display 113
Meters
fuel gauge 70
speedometer 70
tachometer 70
Mileage 116
misting
attending to the windows 124
Misting
condensation in headlamps 399
Mood lighting 102
MY CAR 115
O
Oil, see also Engine oil 415, 417
Oil level low 364
Option/accessory 16
Output 414
electric motor 415
outside temperature gauge 77
Overheating 291, 312
Owner's manual, ecolabelling 25
P
PACOS 38
Paintwork
colour code 404
damage and touch-up 404
Panic function 166
Park Assist 256, 258
backward 257
fault indicator 259
function 256
parking assistance sensors 259
Park assist camera 260
settings 263
Parking brake 285
Parking on a hill 147
Passenger compartment filter 126
Passenger compartment lighting
automatic 101
PCC – Personal Car Communicator
functions 166
range 168, 174
Pedestrian detection 229
Personal Car Communicator 168
Pinch protection, sunroof 112
Polishing 401
Position lamp 92
Power seat 85
Power steering fluid
Checking the level 367
grade 420
Power sunroof 110
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
438
Power windows 105
resetting 106
Preconditioning
direct start 140
General 138
immediate stop 141
messages and symbols 144
parking inside 139
parking outside 139
timer 142
Privacy locking 171
Protective grille 158
Puncture 346
Q
Queue Assist 211
Queue assistance 211
R
Radar sensor 205
Limitations 217
Rain sensor 103
Raising the car 359
Range
during electric operation 424
Rear bulbs
location 375
Rear seat
Heating 132
Rearview and door mirrors
compass 109
door 107
electrically retractable 108
heating 108
interior 108
Rear window
heating 108
Recommendations during driving 292
Recommended child seats
table 46
Recovery 320
Refrigerant 368
Regeneration 298
Remote control immobiliser 165
Remote control key 162, 163, 164
battery replacement 172
detachable key blade 169, 170
functions 166
loss 162
range 167, 174
Remote control key system, type approval 188
Resetting, trip meter 119
Resetting the door mirrors 107
Resetting the power windows 106
Retractable power door mirrors 108
Road sign information 244
Limitations 248
operation 246
Roof load, max. weight 412
Rustproofing 402
S
Safety lock
children 45
Safety mode 43
moving the car 44
start attempt 44
Seat, see Seats 84
Seatbelt 30
loosen 32
pregnancy 32
putting on 31
rear seat 33
seatbelt reminder 33
seatbelt tensioner 33
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
439
Seatbelt reminder 33
Seatbelt tensioner 33
Seats 84
head restraints, rear 87
heating 132
Heating 131
lowering the front backrest 85
lowering the rear backrest 87
power 85
Self Supporting run flat Tyres (SST) 339
Sensus 81
Service position 377
Service programme 356
Set time interval 201
Side airbag SIPS 39
SIPS airbag 39
Skidding 292, 293
slippery driving conditions 293
Soot filter 298
SOOT FILTER FULL 298
spare wheel 328
installation 331
Speed limiter 195
alarm for speed exceeded 197
deactivation 197
getting started 195, 196
temporary deactivation 196
Speed ratings, tyres 326
Spin control 190
Stability and traction control system 190, 193
operation 191
Stability system 190
Stains 402
Start/Stop function 272
Starter battery
changing 382
Steering force, speed related 190
Steering force level, see Steering force 190
Steering lock 267
Steering wheel 89
heating 90
keypad 89
steering wheel adjustment 89
Stickers
location of 408
Stone chips and scratches 404
Storage spaces
glovebox 152
tunnel console 152
Storage spaces in the passenger compart-
ment 150
Sunroof
opening and closing 110
pinch protection 112
sunscreen 112
ventilation position 111
Sunscreen, sunroof 112
Support 15
Switching off the engine 267
Symbols
indicator symbols 72, 74
warning symbols 72
Symbols and messages
Adaptive Cruise Control 215
Collision Warning with Auto
Brake 228, 238
Driver Alert Control 251
Lane Departure Warning 255
T
Tailgate
Locking/unlocking 181
Temperature
actual temperature 125
Temperature control 133
Through-load hatch 155
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
440
Timer
deactivate 143
preconditioning 142
setting 142
start 143
Tools 333
Total airing function 124, 180
Towbar
detachable, attachment 315
detachable, removal 317
Towbar, see Towing equipment 313
Towbar - detachable
attachment/removal 315, 317
Towing 319
towing eye 319
Towing bracket 313, 314
specifications 314
Towing capacity and towball load 413
Towing eye 319
TPMS - Tyre Pressure Monitoring 335, 337
Traction control 190
Trailer 312
cable 312
driving with a trailer 312
snaking 318
Trailer stability assist 191
Trailer Stability Assist 318
Transmission oil
volume and grade 419
Transponder 20
Tread depth 327
Tread wear indicators 324
Trip computer 116, 118, 121
Trip meter 77, 116
Trip meter, resetting 119
Trip statistics 272
Troubleshooting
Adaptive Cruise Control 214
TSA - trailer stability assist 191, 318
Tunnel console 152
12 V socket 153
Tunnel detection 94
Type approval
radar system 219
remote control key system 188
tyre pressure monitoring 340
Type designations 408
Tyre dimension 325
Tyre load index 326
Tyre pressure label 324
Tyre pressure monitoring 335, 337
Adjust 336
arming 337
deactivate 337
driveable punctured tyres (SST) 339
low tyre pressure 338
recommendations 338
Tyres
dimensions 427
direction of rotation 323
maintenance 322
pressure 324, 429
puncture repair 346
specifications 427, 428, 429
tread depth 327
tread wear indicators 324
tyre pressure monitoring 335, 337
winter tyres 327
U
Unlocking
from the inside 179
from the outside 178
Unlocking with the key blade 176
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
441
V
V60 Twin Engine
introduction 28
overview 26
Vanity mirror 153
lighting 101
Ventilation 127
Vibration damper 313
Volvo ID 20
Volvo Sensus 81
W
Warning lamp
Adaptive Cruise Control 205
collision warning system 233
stability and traction control system 190
Warning lamps
Airbags – SRS 75
Fault in brake system 75
Parking brake applied 75
seatbelt reminder 33, 75
starter battery not charging 75
Warning 75
Warning sound
collision warning system 233
Warning symbols 72, 75
Warning triangle 332
Washer fluid 379
Washers
rear window 104
washer fluid, filling 379
windscreen 104
Water and dirt-repellent coating 401
Water-repellent surface, cleaning 401
Waxing 401
Weights
kerb weight 412
Wheel bolts 327
lockable 327
Wheel change 328
Wheel rim, dimensions 325
Wheel rims
cleaning 400
Wheels
installation 331
removal 328
snow chains 327
Wheels and tyres
approved dimensions 427
tyre load index and speed rating 428
Whiplash injury, WHIPS 41
WHIPS
child seat/booster cushion 41
seating position 42
whiplash protection 41
Windows, rearview and door mirrors 401
Windscreen washing 104
Windscreen wiper 103
rain sensor 103
Winter driving 292
Winter tyres 327
Winter wheels 327
Wiper blades 377
changing 378
Cleaning 379
replacing, rear window 379
Service position 377
Wiper blades, heated 104
Wipers and washing 103
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
442
TP 23423 (English), AT 1717, MY18, Copyright © 2000-2017 Volvo Car Corporation
